JP6682563B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  In a type of gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine), a big hit lottery (hit judgment) is performed based on the establishment of a start condition, and when a big hit is won, a big hit game involving opening of a special winning opening is performed as a kind of special game. . A large number of prize balls can be obtained by winning game balls in the special winning opening. The result of the jackpot lottery is shown to the player by the stop mode of the symbol after the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display means.

  When the big hit is won, a big hit finalizing effect may be executed, which suggests that the big hit game state is set during the change of the symbol.

JP, 2005-224379, A

  It is considered that there is room for improvement in the way of performing a big hit confirmation production when improving the interest of the game through the production.

  Therefore, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that contributes to the interest of the game through the production.

A gaming machine according to the present invention comprises a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player, an operation section including one or more operation means operable by the player, and the determination means. When it is determined to execute the special game, a special game execution means for executing the special game, a predetermined game state, or a specific game state having a higher probability of being determined to perform the special game than the predetermined game state In the special game, the game state control means capable of controlling the game at, and effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect including an operation effect for prompting the player to perform a predetermined operation on the operation unit, There is a first special game and a second special game that is more advantageous than the first special game, and the game state control means controls the second special game even after the first special game. After that, you can control the game in the specific game state In the operation effect, an operation corresponding effect based on the determination result of the determination means is performed in response to the predetermined operation performed on the operation unit, and the operation effect includes the first operation effect and the first operation effect. , There is a second operation effect that suggests that the expectation of execution of the special game is higher than the first operation effect, and the effect execution means, based on the determination result of the determination means, There are times when a specific effect that suggests that a special game is executed is executed, and in the specific effect, there are a plurality of specific effects having different effect modes, and when the second special game is executed, There is a case where the special effect of the special effect mode of the special effect is executed, and when the first special game is executed, the specific effect of the special effect mode is not executed, and the effect executing means is , The characteristic is determined by the determining means. When it is determined to execute a game, when performing the operation effect after executing the specific effect of the special effect mode, compared to when performing the operation effect without executing the specific effect of the special effect mode The second operation effect is easily executed as the operation effect.
Another gaming machine according to the present invention is a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player, an operation unit including one or more operation means operable by the player, and the determination. When it is determined by the means to execute the special game, the special game execution means for executing the special game, a predetermined game state, or a probability of being determined to perform the special game higher than the predetermined game state is high. A game state control means capable of controlling a game in a game state, and an effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect including an operation effect that prompts a player to perform a predetermined operation on the operation unit, and the special game is provided. Has a first special game and a second special game that is more advantageous than the first special game, and the game state control means controls the second special game after the first special game. Control the game in the specific game state even after the game It is possible, in the operation effect, an operation corresponding effect based on the determination result of the determination means is performed in response to the predetermined operation performed on the operation unit, and the operation effect includes the first operation effect. And a second operation effect that suggests that the expectation of execution of the special game is higher than the first operation effect, and the effect execution means, based on the determination result of the determination means, There is a case of executing a specific effect that suggests that the special game is executed, the specific effect includes a plurality of specific effects having different effect modes, and when the second special game is executed, There is a case where a special effect of a special effect mode is executed out of a plurality of special effects, and when the first special game is executed, the special effect of the special effect mode is not executed, and the effect execution means. Of the special production mode It is easier to execute the second operation effect as the operation effect when performing the operation effect after executing the fixed effect than when performing the operation effect without executing the specific effect in the special effect mode. Is characterized by.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that contributes to an increase in interest in a game through production.

It is a front view of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram of a part related to control of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is the figure which listed a part of processing performed in the main control part of the game machine. It is an explanatory view of a special figure hit determination table in the main control unit of the gaming machine. It is the figure which listed a part of the processing performed by the production control unit of the gaming machine. It is explanatory drawing of operation with respect to a production lever. It is a figure which shows the kind of the jackpot which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is an operation flowchart related to the setting of the game state and the change of the special symbol by the main control unit. It is an explanatory view of a decorative pattern. It is the explanation drawing of production mode. It is an explanatory view of the relationship between the variation effect and the big hit game, and the effect mode after the big hit game. It is a figure which shows the flow of the fluctuating effect including the reach effect. It is explanatory drawing of an upper gimmick and an upper gimmick production. It is an explanatory view of right and left gimmick and left and right gimmick production. It is an explanatory view of the operation effect during the variable effect. It is an explanatory view of a button effect and a lever effect. It is a relational diagram of one noticed special figure determination information, variation effect and jackpot game. It is an explanatory view of the operation effect and the operation corresponding effect performed in the execution period of the reach effect during the variable effect. It is a figure which concerns on Example EX1_1 which belongs to 1st Embodiment of this invention, and is a figure which shows the table for determining the production | generation aspect of operation corresponding production. It is a figure which shows the content of the some productions which can be selectively performed as operation corresponding productions. It is an explanatory view of a plurality of big hit production patterns that determine an effect during a big hit game according to Example EX1_2 belonging to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which concerns on Example EX1_2 which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention, and shows a table etc. for selecting a big hit production pattern. It is a figure which concerns on Example EX1_2 which belongs to 1st Embodiment of this invention, and is a figure which shows the modification table etc. for selecting a big hit production pattern. It is a figure which relates to the example EX1_3 which belongs to 1st Embodiment of this invention, and is a figure which shows the table for determining the production | generation aspect of operation corresponding production. It relates to Example EX1_4 belonging to the first embodiment of the present invention, and is an explanatory diagram of a plurality of jackpot effect patterns that determine the effect during the jackpot game. It is a figure which concerns on Example EX1_4 which belongs to 1st Embodiment of this invention, and shows a table etc. for selecting a big hit production pattern. It is a figure which concerns on Example EX1_4 which belongs to 1st Embodiment of this invention, and shows a transformation table etc. for selecting a big hit production pattern. It is explanatory drawing of the production mode assumed in Example EX1_5 which belongs to 1st Embodiment of this invention. It relates to Example EX1_5 belonging to the first embodiment of the present invention, and is an explanatory diagram of a plurality of jackpot effect patterns that determine the effect during the jackpot game and the flow of the effect after the jackpot game. It is a figure which concerns on Example EX1_5 which belongs to 1st Embodiment of this invention, and shows a plurality of effects that can be executed after the jackpot game. It is a figure which concerns on Example EX1_5 which belongs to 1st Embodiment of this invention, and shows a table etc. for selecting a big hit production pattern. It is a figure which concerns on Example EX1_5 which belongs to 1st Embodiment of this invention, and shows a transformation table etc. for selecting a big hit production pattern. It is a figure which concerns on Example EX1_6 which belongs to 1st Embodiment of this invention, and is a figure which shows the table for determining the production | generation aspect of operation corresponding production. It is a figure which shows the display content in a premier character production. It is a schematic diagram which shows the internal structure of the special winning opening which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the kind of the jackpot which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the kind of the jackpot which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is an explanatory view of a plurality of big hit production patterns which determine a production in a big hit game according to a 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the content of the effect which can be performed during a jackpot game according to 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention and shows the kind of decorative design, and the kind of aspect of a doublet. It is a figure which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention and shows the flow of the fluctuating effect by SP reach hit effect. It is a figure which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention and shows the flow of the fluctuation production by SP reach loss production. It is a figure which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention and shows the flow of the fluctuation production by the normal reach hit production. It is a figure which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention and shows the flow of the fluctuation production by a normal reach loss production. It is a figure which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention and shows the flow of the fluctuation production by the loss production with a tempai twist. It is a figure which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention and shows the flow of the fluctuation production by a basic loss production. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a plurality of display areas set in the image display unit according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram of types of tempai-raising effect and tempai-successful effect according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram of a re-lottery effect according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure concerning a 5th embodiment of the present invention and showing a plurality of doublet patterns concerning re-lottery effect. It is a figure which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention and shows a special figure fluctuation pattern table. It is a classification diagram of the jackpot confirmation effect according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 21 is a diagram listing examples of a plurality of types of jackpot finalizing effects according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention and shows the content of the jackpot finalization effect of several types. It is a figure which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention and shows the relationship between a fluctuation production and operation production, and the relationship between the kind of operation production, and the expectation degree of a jackpot. It is a flow chart of change effect contents determination processing concerning a 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention and shows a fixed production | generation determination table. It is a figure which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention and shows a winning operation production selection table. It is a figure which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention and shows the relationship between the presence or absence of execution of super-probability production, and winning operation production. It is a figure which concerns on Example EX6_1 which belongs to 6th Embodiment of this invention, and shows a winning operation effect selection table. It is a figure which concerns on Example EX6_2 which belongs to 6th Embodiment of this invention, and shows a winning operation effect selection table. It is a flow chart of change effect contents determination processing concerning example EX6_3 which belongs to a 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which concerns on Example EX6_3 which belongs to 6th Embodiment of this invention, and shows a winning operation effect selection table and a fixed effect determination table. FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram relating to Example EX6_4 belonging to the sixth embodiment of the present invention, and an operation effect executed in the re-lottery effect. It relates to Example EX6_5 belonging to the sixth exemplary embodiment of the present invention, and is a relational diagram between the aspect of the stopped doublet and the presence or absence of execution of a probability variation promotion challenge effect during a jackpot game. It is a figure which concerns on Example EX6_5 which belongs to 6th Embodiment of this invention, and shows a certainty change promotion challenge production. It is a figure which concerns on Example EX6_5 which belongs to 6th Embodiment of this invention, and is a figure which shows the table for the type determination of the operation production performed in the probability variation promotion challenge production. It relates to Example EX6_7 belonging to the sixth embodiment of the present invention, and is a relational diagram of the mode of the doublet of the stop and the presence / absence of execution of the round promotion challenge effect during the jackpot game. It is a figure which concerns on Example EX6_7 which belongs to 6th Embodiment of this invention, and shows a round promotion challenge production. It is a figure which concerns on Example EX6_7 which belongs to 6th Embodiment of this invention, and is a figure which shows the table for the type determination of the operation production performed in a round promotion challenge production. It is a figure which concerns on Example EX6_10 which belongs to 6th Embodiment of this invention, and shows the normal state of a production button, and the projection state. FIG. 28 is a diagram showing two types of operation input promotion images according to Example EX6_10 belonging to the sixth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 27 is a diagram showing another two types of operation input promotion images according to the example EX6_10 belonging to the sixth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 28 is an explanatory diagram of a button image for repeated hits according to Example EX6_10 belonging to the sixth embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which concerns on Example EX6_10 which belongs to 6th Embodiment of this invention, and shows a button / lever animation display. It is an explanatory view of a Lever probability production, and a figure showing a time relation between a Lever probability production and a jackpot decision production concerning a 7th embodiment of the present invention. It is explanatory drawing of the leverage certain effect limitation control which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the fixed production limit control which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart of the change production contents determination processing suitable for implementation of the leverage certain production restriction control according to the example EX7_1 which belongs to the seventh embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which concerns on Example EX7_1 which belongs to 7th Embodiment of this invention, and shows a leverage certain effect execution determination table. It is a flow chart of the fluctuating effect content determination processing suitable for implementation of the fixed effect restriction control according to Example EX7_2 belonging to the seventh embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which concerns on Example EX7_5 which belongs to 7th Embodiment of this invention, and shows an example of a combination of a lever probability production and a jackpot confirmation production. It is a figure which concerns on Example EX7_5 which belongs to 7th Embodiment of this invention, and shows an example of a lever positive production. It is a figure which concerns on the example EX7_5 which belongs to 7th Embodiment of this invention, and shows the other example of a lever probability production. It is a figure which concerns on Example EX7_5 which belongs to 7th Embodiment of this invention, and shows another example of a lever definite production. It is a figure which concerns on example EX7_5 which belongs to 7th Embodiment of this invention, and is a figure which shows the other example of a combination of a lever probability production and a jackpot fixed production. FIG. 19 is a classification diagram of special suggestion effects according to Example EX7_6 belonging to the seventh embodiment of the present invention. It relates to Example EX7_7 belonging to the seventh embodiment of the present invention, and is an explanatory diagram of an effect (a game state-dependent effect IE) in which the suggestion content changes depending on the game state of the gaming machine. It is a figure which concerns on example EX7_7 which belongs to 7th Embodiment of this invention, and shows an example of a game state dependent effect. It is a figure showing SP reach production concerning Example EX7_8 which belongs to a 7th embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 28 is an explanatory diagram of a lever certainty effect that can be executed according to an operation according to Example EX7_9 belonging to the seventh embodiment of the present invention. It is explanatory drawing which concerns on Example EX7_11 which belongs to 7th Embodiment of this invention, and the display position of a reserve image and a pseudo reserve image. It is a figure which concerns on Example EX7_11 which belongs to 7th Embodiment of this invention, and shows a mode that a reserve image and a pseudo reserve image are displayed. It is a figure which concerns on Example EX7_11 which belongs to 7th Embodiment of this invention, and shows the kind of the display mode of a hold image and a pseudo hold image. It is a figure which concerns on the example EX7_12 which belongs to 7th Embodiment of this invention, and has shown one pending image or pseudo pending image. FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram related to Example EX7_12 belonging to the seventh embodiment of the present invention, and showing how to properly use the display mode of the pending image or the pseudo pending image. It is explanatory drawing of the execution control method of the premier production which considered the special figure fluctuation pattern concerning 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the execution control method of the premier production which considered the special figure fluctuation pattern concerning 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart of change effect contents determination processing concerning Example EX8_1 which belongs to an 8th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which concerns on Example EX8_1 which belongs to 8th Embodiment of this invention, and shows that there are multiple types of premier productions. It is a figure which concerns on Example EX8_1 which belongs to 8th Embodiment of this invention, and shows a mode that a premium production is performed in SP reach per production. It is a figure which concerns on Example EX8_1 which belongs to 8th Embodiment of this invention, and shows a mode that a premium effect is performed in a normal reach per effect. FIG. 28 is a relationship diagram between the selected special figure variation pattern and the execution selection probability of the premier effect according to the example EX8_2 belonging to the eighth embodiment of the present invention. It is a modification relation diagram of a selected special figure variation pattern and an execution selection probability of a premier effect according to Example EX8_2 belonging to the eighth embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which concerns on Example EX8_6 which belongs to 8th Embodiment of this invention, and shows a mode that a premium production is performed twice in one variation production. It is a figure which concerns on Example EX8_7 which belongs to 8th Embodiment of this invention, and shows a mode that a premium production is performed after passing a simple winning / simple certainty production. It is a flow chart of change effect contents determination processing concerning Example EX9_1 which belongs to a 9th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which concerns on Example EX9_1 which belongs to 9th Embodiment of this invention, and is a figure which shows the table used for a premier production execution frequency determination process. It is a figure which concerns on Example EX9_1 which belongs to 9th Embodiment of this invention, and shows a mode that three premiere productions are performed in SP reach per production. It is a figure which concerns on Example EX9_1 which belongs to 9th Embodiment of this invention, and shows a mode that the premiere effect is performed twice in the normal reach per effect. It is a figure which concerns on Example EX9_2 which belongs to 9th Embodiment of this invention, and is a figure which shows the table used for a premium production execution determination process. It is a figure which concerns on Example EX9_9 which belongs to 9th Embodiment of this invention, and shows the flow of SP reach per effect. It is a figure which shows the block diagram of a frame lamp, and the positional relationship of the light emitting element which comprises a game board, an image display part, and a frame lamp part concerning 10th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which concerns on 10th Embodiment of this invention and shows the execution order of a rainbow image effect and a rainbow lamp effect. It is a rear surface block diagram of a game machine according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram of the gaming machine which paid attention to the board | substrate structure regarding Example EX10_1 which belongs to 10th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart of change effect contents determination processing concerning example EX10_1 which belongs to a 10th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which concerns on Example EX10_1 which belongs to 10th Embodiment of this invention, and shows the flow of a command and a signal in the case where a premium effect is performed. It is explanatory drawing of the double buffer system regarding the structure of VRAM concerning Example EX10_1 which belongs to 10th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which concerns on Example EX10_1 which belongs to 10th Embodiment of this invention, and is a figure which shows the flow of the command and the signal in the case where a rainbow CI effect is performed as a premier effect. It is a figure which concerns on Example EX10_1 which belongs to 10th Embodiment of this invention, and shows the flow of the command and the signal in the case where the 3rd special character production is performed as a premiere production. It is a figure which concerns on Example EX10_1 which belongs to 10th Embodiment of this invention, and is a figure which shows the flow of the command and the signal in the case where only a rainbow lamp effect is performed as a jackpot fixed effect.

  Hereinafter, an example of an embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. In each of the referenced figures, the same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and in principle overlapping description of the same parts will be omitted. In the present specification, for simplification of description, a symbol or code that refers to information, a signal, a physical quantity, a member, or the like is described, and the name of information, a signal, a physical quantity, a member, or the like corresponding to the symbol or code is described. May be omitted or abbreviated. Further, in an arbitrary flowchart to be described later, a plurality of processes in arbitrary plurality of steps can be arbitrarily changed in execution order or can be executed in parallel within a range in which processing contents do not conflict.

<< Basic Embodiment >>
A preferred embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in detail. In the present embodiment, the gaming machine according to the present invention is applied to a gaming machine belonging to the former first type (so-called digital patch). First, a basic embodiment which is the basis of the embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described.

<Basic configuration of gaming machine>
FIG. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine 100 according to this embodiment. The basic configuration of the gaming machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. The game machine 100 includes a game board 101 and also includes each component shown in FIG. The upper, lower, left, and right refer to the upper, lower, left, and right as seen by a player who faces the gaming machine 100 and the game board 101, unless otherwise specified. Both the up-down direction and the left-right direction are parallel to the board surface of the game board 101. The up-down direction is parallel to the vertical direction, and the left-right direction is parallel to the horizontal direction. Unless otherwise specified, the front refers to the side closer to the player who faces the gaming machine 100 and the game board 101, and the rear side refers to the player who faces the gaming machine 100 and the game board 101 unless otherwise stated. To point far away.

  The gaming machine 100 is a pachinko gaming machine, and has an outer frame 10 attached to an island structure arranged in a game facility, an inner frame 11 openably and closably attached to the outer frame 10, and an inner frame 11. And a door frame 12 that can be opened and closed. The door frame 12 is formed with a window portion 12a in which a transparent glass plate is fitted so that almost the entire game area 103 described later can be viewed from the front (player side). The game board 101 is detachably attached to the inner frame 11. At a lower position of the game board 101, a launching unit for launching a game ball (three-dimensional game ball in real space) is arranged (detailed structure of the launching unit is not shown).

  The game ball fired upwards by the drive of the firing unit rises between the rails 102a and 102b and reaches the upper position of the game board 101, and then falls (flows down) in the game area 103 formed on the game board 101. It is supposed to do. A plurality of nails (not shown) are provided in the game area 103, and the game balls fall by changing the moving direction in an unspecified direction by these nails. Further, in the game board 101, a windmill (not shown) that changes the direction in which the game balls fall, a first start port 105, a second start port 106, an electric tulip 107, in the game ball 103 fall path. A gate 108, a special winning opening 111 and a normal winning opening 112 are installed. An image display unit 104 including a liquid crystal display panel or the like, which is capable of displaying various effect images including a decorative pattern, is arranged in a substantially central portion of the game board 101.

  The starting openings 105 and 106 are installed below the image display unit 104, and each form a starting area through which a game ball can pass (win prize). When the predetermined first starting condition or the second starting condition is satisfied, the right to receive the special figure determination (determination as to whether or not to perform the jackpot game) is acquired. The first and second starting conditions are satisfied by the game balls winning the starting openings 105 and 106, respectively. In addition, when the gaming machine 100 detects a gaming ball that has won the starting opening 105 or 106, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of gaming balls are paid out. The game ball paid out due to the winning of the game ball with respect to the starting openings 105, 106, the big winning opening 111 or the normal winning opening 112 is also referred to as a prize ball. The prize may be read as a ball.

  An electric tulip 107 is provided near the second starting port 106. The electric tulip 107 has a closed state (closed state) in which it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second starting opening 106, and an open state (open state in which it is easier to enter the game ball into the second starting opening 106 than in the closed state). ), One of the two states can be taken. Substantially, when the electric tulip 107 is in the closed state, winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 106 is impossible, and only when the electric tulip 107 is in the opened state, the second start of the game ball is started. It is possible to win a prize in the mouth 106. The opening of the electric tulip 107 is also referred to as opening of the electric tulip 107. The electric tulip 107 is opened based on the result of the universal figure determination performed by the game ball passing through the gate 108 arranged on the right side of the image display unit 104.

  A special winning opening 111 is provided on the right side of the first starting opening 105 and the second starting opening 106. The special winning opening 111 can also be opened and closed like the electric tulip 107, and the game ball is larger than the closed state (closed state) in which it is difficult to win the game ball into the big winning opening 111. One of the open states (opened state) for facilitating winning of a prize in the winning opening 111 is set. Practically, when the special winning opening 111 is closed, it is impossible to win the game ball into the special winning opening 111, and only when the special winning opening 111 is open, the big winning of the game ball It is possible to win a prize in the mouth 111. The opening of the special winning opening 111 is also referred to as opening of the special winning opening 111. The special winning opening 111 is normally closed, and when a big hit is won, a round game which is in an open state until a predetermined condition (for example, 30 seconds has passed or 10 game balls are won) is satisfied a predetermined number of times (for example, Repeat 10 times). When the gaming machine 100 detects a gaming ball that has won the special winning opening 111, the gaming machine 100 pays out a predetermined number (for example, 14) of winning balls.

  One or more normal winning openings 112 are installed on the side or below the image display unit 104. The gaming machine 100 pays out a predetermined number (e.g., 5) of prize balls when a winning in the normal winning port 112 is detected. At the bottom of the game area 103, a recovery port 113 for recovering game balls that have not won any of the first start opening 105, the second start opening 106, the special winning opening 111 and the normal winning opening 112 is provided. There is. An information display unit 114 is provided in the lower right portion of the game board 101. In addition, the installation position of each component on the game board 101 can be arbitrarily changed.

  In the outer peripheral portion of the door frame 12, a speaker 115 (including speakers 115a, 115b, and 115c) used for an arbitrary effect, an effect light unit 116, and a frame movable accessory 117 are incorporated. The movable accessory used for the effect is also provided on the game board 101. In the present embodiment, the movable accessory 130 is provided so as to be coupled to the game board 101, and the board movable accessory 130 includes the board movable accessories 130U, 130L and 130R (see also FIG. 2). An operation handle 119 is arranged at the lower right position of the door frame 12. The operation handle 119 has a shape protruding toward the player side, and a firing instruction member 120 is provided on the outer peripheral portion thereof. The firing instruction member 120 is rotatably supported by the operation handle 119. When a player shoots a game ball, he / she rotates the shooting instruction member 120 clockwise. At this time, the player can adjust the launch intensity of the game ball by the angle at which the launch instruction member 120 is rotated. Below the game area 103 in the door frame 12, in addition to the effect button 121 and the cross key 122, an upper plate (hit ball supply plate) 123, an upper plate lever 124, and a lower plate (extra plate) used for accommodating and delivering game balls. A ball receiving plate) 125, a lower plate lever 126, and the like are provided. In addition, an effect lever 127 is provided above the game area 103 in the door frame 12. The effect button 121, the cross key 122, and the effect lever 127 constitute an operation unit that can be operated by the player and that receives a predetermined operation from the player.

  The result of the special image determination is shown by the special symbol, and the result of the general image determination is normally shown by the symbol. There are first and second special symbols as special symbols. The right of the special figure determination based on the establishment of the first start condition is reserved with a predetermined number (here, 4) as an upper limit, and the number of the reserved rights is called a reserved information number U1. The right of the special figure determination based on the establishment of the second starting condition is reserved with a predetermined number (here, 4) as an upper limit, and the number of the reserved rights is called a reserved information number U2. The right of the universal figure determination due to the game ball passing through the gate 108 is reserved with a predetermined number (here, 4) as an upper limit, and the number of the reserved rights is called a reservation information number U3.

  The information display unit 114 is a special symbol display unit that displays the first and second special symbols, a normal symbol display unit that displays normal symbols, a hold display unit that displays the number of held information U1 to U3, a round number display unit, and a right. It is provided with a striking display section, and each display section can be formed by an LED (Light Emitting Diode) display.

<Basic operation of gaming machines>
Next, the basic operation of the gaming machine 100 will be described. The gaming machine 100 acquires the special figure determination information when the first or second starting condition is satisfied, and performs the special figure determination based on the special figure determination information. The acquisition of the special-drawing determination information corresponds to the acquisition of the special-drawing determination right. The special figure determination includes determination of whether or not the jackpot is won (whether the jackpot is won or lost). In addition, the winning of the jackpot may be expressed as the occurrence of the jackpot (the same applies to the jackpot described later). In addition, the fact that a certain special figure determination information is a big hit may be expressed as that the special figure determination information is a big hit (the same applies to a small hit described below). When the special figure determination based on the special figure determination information acquired by the establishment of the first and second starting conditions is performed, the gaming machine 100 variably displays the first and second special symbols for a predetermined time, respectively. The first and second special symbols are stopped and displayed in a mode showing the result of the special symbol determination.

  When the gaming machine 100 variably displays the special symbol (first or second special symbol), the ornamental symbol is variably displayed on the image display unit 104 accordingly, and the ornamental symbol is stopped in accordance with the stop display of the special symbol. Display it. The decorative design displayed on the image display unit 104 includes the first to third decorative designs, and each decorative design is associated with a numerical value or a symbol. For example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode showing a big hit, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, the so-called double eyes such as "7,7,7"), the first to third decorative symbols Stop display. At this time, the combination of the first to third decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed may be different depending on the type of jackpot that has occurred. When the result of the special-drawing determination is a loss (that is, when the jackpot is not won), the first to third decorative symbols are stopped, for example, in a so-called "separate" pattern indicating the loss. The interlaced pattern refers to a state in which two or three of the first to third decorative symbols are non-common symbols.

  When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode showing a big hit, the gaming machine 100 is in a big hit game state. In the jackpot game state, a jackpot game is performed in which a round game for opening the jackpot 111 is executed for a round (for example, 10 rounds) according to the type of jackpot won. When a game ball wins the special winning opening 111 while the special winning opening 111 is open, the gaming machine 100 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls. The jackpot game state ends when the jackpot game ends. A game accompanied by opening the special winning opening 111 (including a big hit game, and may include a small hitting game described later) is given a chance to get a prize ball by winning a game ball into the big winning opening 111, and thus a big prize. It can be said that the game is more advantageous to the player than the game without opening the mouth 111 (for example, the game in the normal game state). The advantage here means that it is easy for the player to obtain more prize balls (the expected value of the prize balls obtained is large) as the special winning opening 111 is opened.

  The special map is not determined during the jackpot game. In the jackpot game state, the game is played by hitting the right. Right hitting means that the game ball is hit in the game area on the right side of the center line that divides the game area 103 into left and right. On the other hand, left hitting means that the game ball is hit in the game area on the left side of the center line in the game area 103. The game board 101 is formed so that the game ball can be won in the first starting port 105 but cannot be won in the second starting port 106 and the special winning port 111 by left-handed hitting. Has been done. By right-handed, the game board 101 is formed so that the game balls can be won in the second starting opening 106 and the special winning opening 111, but not in the first starting opening 105. Has been done. The gate 108 is located on the right side of the game area 103 and above the special winning opening 111. Therefore, the left-handed ball cannot pass the game ball to the gate 108, and only the right-handed game ball can pass the gate 108.

  After the jackpot game is over, the gaming machine 100 returns to the state of performing the special figure determination. At this time, the gaming state of the gaming machine 100 can be changed.

<Game state of gaming machine>
The gaming machine 100 is a low-probability non-electricity support game state (normal game state), a low-probability electric support game state, and a high-probability non-electricity except for the game state (including the jackpot game state) involving the opening of the special winning opening 111. Any of the support game state and the high-probability electric power support game state may be taken. The game state in the initial state of the gaming machine 100 is a low-probability non-electric power support game state. By initializing the game information of the gaming machine 100 using the RAM clear switch provided on the back surface of the gaming board 101, the gaming machine 100 is in the initial state.

  The low-probability non-electric support game state and the low-probability electric support game state belong to the low-probability game state. The high-probability non-electric support game state and the high-probability electric support game state belong to the high-probability game state. The probability that it is determined that the jackpot is won in the special figure determination is higher in the high-probability gaming state than in the low-probability gaming state. Therefore, the high-probability gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the low-probability gaming state with respect to the jackpot winning easiness (the jackpot playing easiness).

  The low-probability electric power support game state and the high-probability electric power support game state belong to the electric power support game state. In the electric support game state, the gaming machine 100 imparts a game support function (hereinafter referred to as “electric support”) that involves opening and closing the electric tulip 107 (that is, activating the electric support). When the electric support is given, the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, the winning probability per public figure in the general figure determination is increased (therefore, the opening frequency of the electric tulip 107 is increased), and The opening time of the electric tulip 107 is increased, and as a result, in the electric support game state, compared to the non-electric support game state in which the electric support is not provided, the game ball is more likely to enter the second starting opening 106. In the electric support game state, the game is performed by the above-described right hitting, and the trigger for the special figure determination is mainly the winning of the second starting opening 106.

  The low-probability non-electricity support game state and the high-probability non-electricity support game state belong to the non-electricity support game state to which the electric support is not given. In the non-electric support game state, the game is performed by the above-mentioned left hitting, and the trigger of the special figure determination is mainly the winning of the first starting opening 105. As will be understood from the above description, the electric support game state is relatively specific as compared to the non-electric support game state, and the specific game state in which the starting condition is easily established (more specifically, the game ball in the second starting opening 106 is It is a specific game state in which it is easy to enter. Therefore, the electric support game state is more advantageous to the player than the non-electric support game state regarding the ease of establishing the starting condition. In the non-electricity support game state, the winning probability per universal figure may be zero (that is, the electric tulip 107 may not be opened at all) or may be a positive minute value (that is, electric tulip). The opening of 107 may be rare).

<Internal structure of gaming machine>
The internal structure of the gaming machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a block diagram of a portion related to control in the gaming machine 100. As shown in FIG. 2, a control unit 400 provided in the gaming machine 100, a main control unit 401 that controls the progress of the game, a prize ball control unit 402 that controls the payout of prize balls, and an effect that controls the effect contents. And a control unit 403. In addition to the control unit 400, each component shown in FIG. 2 is provided in the gaming machine 100.

[1. Main controller]
The main control unit 401 includes a main CPU (Central Processing Unit) 411, a main ROM (Read Only Memory) 412, and a main RAM (Random Access Memory) 413. The main ROM 412 stores a table group including tables TAt, TZt, THt, and DKt, and the main RAM 413 includes a storage area group including storage areas 413a and 413b.

  Further, various switches (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as “SW”) for detecting a game ball are connected to the main control unit 401. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2, the main controller 401 has a first start for detecting a game ball that has won a first start opening 105, a second start opening 106, a special winning opening 111, and a normal winning opening 112. The mouth SW 414a, the second starting mouth SW 414b, the special winning opening SW 416, the normal winning opening SW 417, and the gate SW 415 for detecting the game ball that has passed through the gate 108 are connected, and the detection signal indicating the detection result of each SW is mainly. It is sent to the control unit 401.

  Further, various solenoids for driving the electric accessory on the game board 101 are connected to the main control unit 401. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2, an electric tulip solenoid 420 that opens and closes the electric tulip 107 and a special winning opening solenoid 421 that opens and closes the special winning opening 111 are connected to the main control unit 401. The main control unit 401 realizes the opening / closing operation of the electric tulip 107 by using the electric tulip solenoid 420 based on the result of the universal drawing determination, and uses the special winning opening solenoid 421 of the special winning opening 111 based on the result of the special drawing determination. Achieves opening / closing operation. Further, the information display unit 114 is connected to the main control unit 401. The main control unit 401 controls the display of the information display unit 114 based on the special figure determination result, the general figure determination result, and the numbers U1, U2, and U3 of the held information.

[1-1. Main processing]
The main processing performed by the main control unit 401 is listed in FIG. When power is supplied to the gaming machine 100, the main CPU 411 executes main processing. In the main processing, initialization processing of various devices in the main control unit 401, backup information generation processing, and the like are performed, and the processing results are stored in the main RAM 413.

[1-2. Timer interrupt processing]
The main CPU 411 interrupts the timer interrupt process with respect to the main process at a period set in the main process (for example, a period of several milliseconds or less) (see FIG. 3). In the timer interrupt process, the main CPU 411 sequentially executes a random number update process, a switch process, a special symbol process, a normal symbol process, an electric auditors product control process, a prize ball process, and an output process.

[1-2-1. Random number update process]
The main control unit 401 includes a special figure per random number counter C1 that counts random numbers per special figure, a special figure random number counter C2 that counts special figure random numbers, and a special figure fluctuation pattern random number counter C3 that counts special figure fluctuation pattern random numbers. A random number counter C4 for counting random numbers per universal figure and a universal symbol random number counter C5 for counting universal random numbers are provided, and in the random number updating process, the count value of each random number counter is "1". The count value of each random number counter is updated by adding. In each of the random number counters C1 to C5, when the count value of the counter exceeds a predetermined upper limit value, the count value of the counter is returned to "0", and then the same count up is performed. It should be noted that any random number in this embodiment takes only an integer value unless otherwise specified.

[1-2-2. Switch processing]
The switch process will be described (see FIG. 3). In the switch processing, the main CPU 411 sequentially executes a start opening switch processing, a gate switch processing, a special winning opening switch processing, and a normal winning opening switch processing.

  In the starting opening switch process, the main CPU 411 uses the starting openings SW414a and SW414b to counter at the timing when the winning of the game ball into the starting opening 105 or 106 is detected (that is, the timing at which the first or second starting condition is satisfied). The count value of C1 to C3 is obtained, and the special figure determination information including the obtained count value of the counters C1 to C3 as the special figure random number, the special figure random number and the special figure variation pattern random number is stored as the special figure determination information. It is stored in the area 413a. The storage area 413a can store each of the special figure determination information based on the satisfaction of the first starting condition and the special figure determination information based on the satisfaction of the second starting condition with a predetermined number of upper limits. Here, it is assumed that the predetermined number is four. Therefore, the storage area 413a can store up to eight pieces of special figure determination information. The numbers of special figure determination information in the storage area 413a triggered by the establishment of the first and second starting conditions correspond to the above-mentioned numbers of reserved information U1 and U2, respectively. In addition, a priority order for receiving special figure determination is set for each special figure determination information stored in the storage area 413a. Basically, a higher priority is set to the special figure determination information acquired earlier in time. However, it is assumed that a higher priority is set for the special figure determination information acquired by the satisfaction of the second starting condition than the special figure determination information acquired by the satisfaction of the first starting condition. The pre-determination process executed in the starting opening switch process will be described later.

  In the gate switch process, the main CPU 411 acquires the count values of the counters C4 and C5 at the timing when the passage of the game ball to the gate 108 is detected, and the acquired count values of the counters C4 and C5 are random numbers per normal figure and normal The general figure determination information included as a symbol random number is stored in the general figure determination information storage area 413b. The storage area 413b can store the general-university-drawing determination information with a predetermined number as an upper limit. Here, it is assumed that the predetermined number is four. The number of general-university figure determination information in the storage area 413b corresponds to the above-mentioned number U3 of reserved information. A priority order for receiving a general figure determination is set for each general figure determination information stored in the storage area 413b. A higher priority is set to the general-university-drawing determination information acquired earlier in time.

  In the special winning opening switch process, the main CPU 411 detects the game ball that has won the special winning opening 111 by the special winning opening SW 416. In the normal winning opening switch process, the main CPU 411 detects the game ball that has won the normal winning opening 112 by the normal winning opening SW 417.

[1-2-3. Special symbol processing]
In the special symbol processing, the main CPU 411 acquires, as the determination target TT, the special symbol determination information having the highest priority among the special symbol determination information stored in the special symbol determination information storage area 413a. The special figure determination is executed for the determination target TT. At this time, the special figure determination information that has become the determination target TT is erased from the storage area 413a. The special figure determination includes a special figure hit determination, a special figure design determination, and a special figure variation pattern determination. Then, in the special symbol processing, after performing the variable display of the special symbol for the variation time indicated by the special symbol variation pattern selected by the special symbol variation pattern determination, the mode showing the determination result of the special symbol per determination and the special symbol determination Stop the special symbol with. The result of the special drawing determination can be stored in the main RAM 413. In the special symbol process, if the special symbol determination information is not stored in the storage area 413a, the special symbol process is finished without performing the special symbol determination. Further, the special symbol determination is not performed also when the variable display of the special symbol is being performed and when the game accompanied by the opening of the special winning opening 111 is being performed.

  When starting the variable display of the special symbols, the main CPU 411 instructs the effect control unit 403 to start the execution of the variable effects by setting the variation start command including the result of the special symbol determination in the main RAM 413, and the special symbols are displayed. When stopping the fluctuation, the fluctuation control command is set in the main RAM 413 to instruct the effect control unit 403 to end the execution of the fluctuation effect. These commands set in the RAM 413 are output to the effect control unit 403 in an output process (see FIG. 3) described later.

  With reference to FIG. 4, the special figure hit determination table TAt including the low probability special figure hit determination table TAt1 and the high probability special figure hit determination table TAt2 is used to perform the special figure hit determination. Each of the tables TAt1 and TAt2 is configured to have a predetermined determination value associated with the jackpot. At the time of special figure hit determination, the main CPU 411 performs special figure hit determination using the table TAt1 when the high probability game flag is set to OFF, and when the high probability game flag is set to ON The special drawing hit determination is performed using the table TAt2. Then, the main CPU 411 determines that the jackpot is won when the random number per special figure of the determination target TT matches the determination value associated with the jackpot, and otherwise loses (that is, the jackpot is won). No)). The gaming state of the gaming machine 100 is a high-probability gaming state when the high-probability gaming flag is ON, and a low-probability gaming state when the high-probability gaming flag is OFF. Here, the special winning percentage is determined such that the jackpot winning probability (that is, the probability that the jackpot game is determined to be performed) is 1/300 and 1/35 in the low-probability gaming state and the high-probability gaming state, respectively. It is assumed that the table TAt is formed. However, the winning probabilities mentioned here are merely examples, and the winning probabilities can be variously changed.

  Further, the gaming machine 100 may be formed so that a small hit may occur, and in this case, the main CPU 411 also determines a small hit or a winning in the special figure hit determination. The small hit is not a big hit, and is a specific lose represented by a special pattern in a mode different from a normal lose (miss other than the small hit). The main CPU 411 determines that the small hit has been won when the random number per special figure of the determination target TT matches the determination value associated with the small hit. For example, the winning probability for a small hit can be set to 1/300 without depending on ON / OFF of the high probability game flag.

  In the special symbol determination, the main CPU 411 compares the special symbol determination table TZt with the random number of the special symbol of the determination target TT, and based on the comparison result, determines which symbol the special symbol is stopped. . There are a plurality of types of jackpots, and at the time of winning the jackpot, the type of jackpot is determined based on the comparison result.

  In the special figure variation pattern determination, the special figure variation pattern for the determination target TT is determined based on the special figure variation pattern table THt and the random number per special figure of the determination target TT, the special symbol random number, and the special figure variation pattern random number. The determination of the special figure variation pattern is synonymous with the selection or setting of the special figure variation pattern. The special figure fluctuation pattern table THt includes a plurality of special figure fluctuation patterns, and one special figure fluctuation pattern for the determination target TT is selected in the special figure fluctuation pattern determination. Each special figure variation pattern defines the variation mode of the special symbol, for example, the variation time of the special symbol (the length of time during which the variation of the special symbol is displayed) is defined.

[Pre-judgment process in the start opening switch process]
In addition, the main CPU 411 executes a pre-determination process in the starting opening switch process (see FIG. 3). In the pre-determination processing, the main CPU 411 sets the special figure determination information that is stored in the special figure determination information storage area 413a and is to be held as the pre-determination target, and determines the special figure hit for the pre-determination target. , The special figure symbol determination and the special figure fluctuation pattern determination are sequentially executed. The methods of the special figure hit determination, the special figure design determination, and the special figure variation pattern determination (these determinations are also collectively referred to as pre-determination) for the pre-determination target are the same as those methods for the determination target TT. The result of the preliminary determination is stored in the main RAM 413. The result of the preliminary determination is included in the hold increase command (also referred to as a preliminary determination command), the hold increase command is set in the main RAM 413, and is transmitted to the effect control unit 403 in an output process described later. The hold increase command includes, in addition to the result of the preliminary determination, information indicating which of the hold information numbers U1 and U2 has increased. The pre-determination process for certain special figure determination information is executed in the starting opening switch process before the special figure determination information is acquired and stored in the storage area 413a. Therefore, the prior determination for any special figure determination information is executed before the special figure determination is performed for the special figure determination information.

[1-2-4. Ordinary pattern processing]
The normal symbol processing (see FIG. 3) will be described. In the normal symbol processing, the main CPU 411 acquires the general figure determination information having the highest priority set in the general figure determination information storage area 413b as the general figure determination target FF, and determines the general figure in the main ROM 412. Based on the table for public figures and the figure judgment target FF, etc., a figure judgment including a figure hit judgment, a figure pattern judgment, and a figure variation pattern judgment is executed, and based on the result of the figure judgment, a variable display of the ordinary symbols and Display the stop display. The general-picture determination information that has become the general-picture determination target FF is deleted from the storage area 413b. Incidentally, in the normal symbol processing, when the general figure determination information is not stored in the storage area 413b, the normal symbol processing is ended without performing the general symbol determination. Also, when the variable display of the normal symbol is being performed and when the game (auxiliary game) for opening the electric tulip 107 is being performed, the universal symbol determination is not performed. In the universal figure winning determination, it is determined whether or not the winning figure is won per universal figure. If you win per universal figure, the type per universal figure is determined by the universal symbol determination. There are two types of hits, one for long opening and the other for short opening. The electric tulip 107 is in the open state for a longer opening period than for a short opening period. The main CPU 411 performs the variable display of the normal symbols for the variation time based on the result of the universal pattern variation pattern determination, and then stops and displays the normal symbols in a mode showing the results of the universal symbol determination and the universal symbol determination.

[1-2-5. Electric accessory control processing]
In the electric accessory control process (see FIG. 3), the special winning opening process and the electric chute process are sequentially executed. In the special winning opening process, the special winning opening 111 is opened / closed by using the special winning opening opening pattern corresponding to the type of the big hit when the result of the special figure determination indicates that the big hit is won. The special winning opening pattern table DKt stores a special winning opening opening pattern that defines an opening mode of the special winning opening 111 for each type of jackpot. When the gaming machine 100 is formed so that a small hit can occur, the special winning opening opening pattern for small hits is also stored in the big winning opening pattern table DKt, and the result of the special map determination indicates the winning of the small hit. In the meantime, the special winning opening 111 is opened and closed using the big winning opening opening pattern for small hits. The main CPU 411 realizes the special winning opening process with reference to the table DKt.

  The jackpot game accompanied by the opening of the jackpot 111 is started after the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode showing the jackpot. In the jackpot game, until the opening time of the special winning opening 111 reaches a specified maximum opening time (predetermined time; for example, 30 seconds) or until the number of winning game balls to the special winning opening 111 reaches a predetermined value (for example, 10) A round game for opening the special winning opening 111 is executed Rmax times with a predetermined interval period (in other words, interval time). Therefore, it can be considered that the jackpot game is configured to include a round game for Rmax. Rmax represents the number of rounds according to the type of jackpot. Then, when a predetermined ending period (in other words, ending time; for example, 5 seconds) elapses after the last round game is finished, the game state is returned to a state where the special figure determination can be executed.

  In addition, during or after the big hit game, a game state setting process (see FIG. 3) is executed in the special winning opening process. In the game state setting process, the main CPU 411 sets the states of various game flags stored in the main RAM 413, including the high-probability game flag and the electric support game flag. As described above, the gaming state of the gaming machine 100 is the high-probability gaming state when the high-probability gaming flag is ON, and the low-probability gaming state when the high-probability gaming flag is OFF. The gaming state of the gaming machine 100 is a power-supporting game state when the power-supporting game flag is ON, and a non-power-supporting game state when the power-supporting game flag is OFF. In the game state setting process during the special winning opening process executed in response to the occurrence of the jackpot, the high-probability game flag and the electric support game flag are turned on according to the game state at the time of the jackpot and the type of the jackpot that occurred. / OFF is set, the high-probability game remaining number X indicating the remaining number of fluctuations of the special symbol for which the high-probability game state is maintained, and the electric number indicating the remaining number of fluctuations for the special symbol for which the electric support game state is maintained The remaining number of support games J is set in the main RAM 413.

  The high-probability game remaining number X set in the game state setting process is subtracted by "1" every time the special figure determination is executed once when "X≥1", and becomes "X = 0". The high-probability game flag is set to OFF, and the gaming state of the gaming machine 100 becomes the low-probability gaming state. When the special support game remaining number J set in the game state setting process is "J ≧ 1", "1" is subtracted each time the special figure determination is executed, and "J = 0" is obtained. The electric support game flag is set to OFF, and the game state of the gaming machine 100 becomes the non-electric support game state. However, after changing from J = 1 to J = 0 by executing special figure determination, the electric support game state is maintained until the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode showing the result of the special figure determination, and the stop display is displayed. It can be put into a non-electric support game state later. In the initial state of the gaming machine 100, the high-probability game flag and the electric support game flag are OFF, and the numbers X and J are set to "0".

  Even when a small hit is won, a game accompanied by opening the special winning opening 111 (this is called a small hit game) is executed, but the main control unit 401 uses the winning of the small hit as a trigger. Does not change the game state (probability of winning the jackpot and whether or not electric support is provided). In other words, the gaming state of the gaming machine 100 (probability of winning big jackpot and presence / absence of electric support) does not change between before and after winning the small hit. In the small hit game, for example, the opening by the short opening time (for example, 0.2 seconds) of the special winning opening 111 is repeated a plurality of times.

  In the electric power processing, the main CPU 411 opens and closes the electric tulip 107 based on the result of the universal figure determination. When the winning figure is won, the electric tulip 107 is opened for a predetermined time.

[1-2-6. Prize ball processing]
In the prize ball process, the main CPU 411 causes a predetermined number of prize balls to be paid out for winning in each of the first winning opening 105, the second starting opening 106, the special winning opening 111, and the normal winning opening 112. Is set in the main RAM 413 as a prize ball command.

[1-2-7. Output processing]
In the output process, the main CPU 411 controls information (including the above-described commands) stored or set in the main RAM 413 to each control unit (prize ball control unit 402 and effect control unit 403) connected to the main control unit 401. Is included). The command related to the prize ball is output to the prize ball control unit 402, and the command related to the effect is output to the effect control unit 403. In the output process, the main CPU 411 may be able to transmit to the effect control unit 403 any information that the main CPU 411 recognizes or holds (for example, information indicating the states of the electric support game flag and the high-probability game flag). When the output processing ends, the timer interrupt processing also ends, and the processing executed by the main CPU 411 returns to the main processing when the timer interrupt processing ends (see FIG. 3).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 2, a board external information terminal board 491 is connected to the main control section 401, and the main control section 401 outputs information indicating the stored contents in the main RAM 413 to the outside (through the board 491). For example, it can be output to a hall computer of a game facility).

[2. Prize ball control section]
The prize ball control unit 402 (see FIG. 2) includes a CPU, a ROM, and a RAM, and pays out prize balls using the payout unit 429 based on a payout instruction (prize ball command) from the main control unit 401. To do. Various SWs for detecting a game ball are connected to the prize ball control unit 402. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2, the prize ball control unit 402 has a fixed position detection SW 424 for detecting a game ball at a predetermined position, a payout ball detection SW 425 for detecting a paid game ball, and an inside of the upper plate 123. There is a ball detection SW 426 for detecting whether there is a game ball and a full tank detection SW 427 for detecting that the upper plate 123 and the lower plate 125 are filled with the game balls, respectively. A detection signal indicating the result is sent to the prize ball control unit 402. The prize ball control unit 402 pays out prize balls or stops paying out prize balls based on a payout instruction output from the main control unit 401 or a detection signal input from SW424 to 427. The prize ball control unit 402 may output the detection signals from the SWs 424 to 427 to the main control unit 401.

  Further, the prize ball control unit 402 is connected to a launching unit 428. The prize ball control unit 402 detects an operation (operation by a player) of emitting a game ball to the launching unit 428 and controls the emission of the game ball. The firing unit 428 fires a game ball for a game, and includes a sensor that detects a game operation by the player, a solenoid that fires the game ball, and the like. When the game operation is detected by the sensor of the launching unit 428, the prize ball control unit 402 drives a solenoid or the like corresponding to the detected game operation to intermittently shoot the game ball, and the game area 103 of the game board 101. Launch a game ball into. Further, a frame external information terminal board 492 is connected to the prize ball control section 402, and various information handled by the prize ball control section 402 can be output to the outside through the board 492.

[3. Production control section]
The effect control unit 403 includes a sub CPU 431, a sub ROM 432, and a sub RAM 433 (see FIG. 2). The effect control unit 403 controls the display of the image display unit 104 and the sound output control of the speaker 115 by an image / audio control unit (not shown), the effect light unit 116, and the lighting control of the board lamp 135 on the game board 101. A lamp control unit (not shown) that controls the drive of the frame movable accessory 117 and the board movable accessory 130 (including 130U, 130L, and 130R) is provided. Further, the effect control unit 403 is connected to an effect button 121, a cross key 122, and an effect lever 127 that accept an operation from a player. The effect control unit 403 can perform an effect corresponding to the contents of the input operation by the player on the effect button 121, the cross key 122, and the effect lever 127.

  The effect control unit 403 realizes an arbitrary effect including a variable effect using an effect realizing element (effect means). That is, the effect control unit 403 controls the effect realizing element to cause the effect realizing element to perform a desired effect (the main body of the effect in this expression is the effect realizing element, but in the description of the present embodiment, mainly, It is assumed that the performance control unit 403 is the main body of the performance). The effect realization elements include all or a part of the image display unit 104, the speaker 115, the effect light unit 116, the frame movable accessory 117, the effect button 121, the effect lever 127, the panel lamp 135, and the panel movable accessory 130. The variation effect refers to the effect executed by the effect control unit 403 during the variable display of the special symbol, and includes the effect that suggests the determination result of the special figure determination. It is also possible to understand that the effect executed by the effect control unit 403 at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol or at the end of fluctuation of the special symbol is also included in the variable effect. It should be noted that the suggestion, notification, notice, notification, or the like by the production may be considered to be for the player unless otherwise stated. Further, unless otherwise specified, the display of arbitrary images and designs (decorative designs, etc.) under the control of the effect control unit 403 refers to those displays on the image display unit 104, and the output of sound and voice is from the speaker 115. Output of sound and voice.

  The main processing performed by the effect control unit 403 is listed in FIG. When the power is supplied to the effect control unit 403, the sub CPU 431 executes the effect main process. In the effect main process, initial settings of various devices in the effect control unit 403 are performed, and the setting result is stored in the sub RAM 433. The sub CPU 431 interrupts the effect timer interrupt process with respect to the effect main process at the cycle set in the effect main process. In the effect timer interrupt process, the sub CPU 431 sequentially executes the effect random number updating process, the command receiving process, and the operation accepting process.

  The production control unit 403 is provided with a production random number counter that counts production random numbers. In the production random number update processing, the production random number is added by adding “1” to the count value of the production random number counter. Update the count value of the counter. In the random number counter for performance, when the count value exceeds a predetermined upper limit value, the count value is returned to "0", and thereafter, the same count up is performed. The count value of the effect random number counter can be referred to as the value of the effect random number used in various effects.

  In the command receiving process, the sub CPU 431 executes a special figure effect process, a general figure effect process, and a winning effect process.

  Special figure production processing includes production start processing and production end processing. The sub CPU 431 starts the variation production by executing the production start processing in response to the reception of the variation start command from the main control unit 401, and then produces the production in response to the reception of the variation stop command from the main control unit 401. The variation effect is ended by executing the ending process. The variable effect content determination process is included in the effect start process. In the variation effect content determination process, the sub CPU 431 determines the content of the variation effect based on the random number for effect, the command received from the main control unit 401, and the like. Specifically, for example, a variation effect pattern table (special figure variation effect pattern table) including a plurality of variation effect patterns (special figure variation effect patterns) each defining the content of the variation effect is stored in advance in the sub ROM 432. In the variation effect content determination processing, the content of the variation effect is determined by selecting and determining one variation effect pattern from the variation effect pattern table based on the variation start command or the like.

  Further, when the sub CPU 431 receives the hold increase command from the main control unit 401, in the command reception process, the sub CPU 431 stores information based on the hold increase command in the sub RAM 433 and performs the hold increase process. In the hold increase process, the hold image corresponding to the pre-determination target is additionally displayed on the image display unit 104. The reserved image corresponding to the pre-determination target is later deleted from the image display unit 104 or shifted to a specific display position when the pre-determination target becomes the determination target TT and the fluctuation start command is received. . The sub CPU 431 can also perform a pre-reading notice effect for the preliminary determination target based on the hold increase command.

  The ordinary figure production process (see FIG. 5) is executed by the sub CPU 431 when a command relating to a normal symbol is received from the main control unit 401. A command related to a normal symbol is transmitted from the main control unit 401 to the effect control unit 403 at the start and end of the fluctuation of the normal symbol. In the figure effect processing, the figure effect when the normal symbol changes is executed.

  The winning effect process (see FIG. 5) is executed by the sub CPU 431 when a command relating to the winning effect is received from the main control unit 401. That is, for example, when the determination target TT wins the big hit or the small hit and the stop display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is performed in a mode showing the big hit or the small hit, the command regarding the hit effect is generated from the main control unit 401 from the effect control unit. It is transmitted to 403 and the sub CPU 431 executes the hit effect that should be performed during the big hit game or the small hit game based on the reception result of the command.

  In the operation reception process (see FIG. 5), the sub CPU 431 operates the player to the effect button 121, the cross key 122, or the effect lever 127 based on the signal from the effect button 121, the cross key 122, or the effect lever 127 ( Recognize the presence or absence of operation input and the content of the operation. The effect control unit 403 can perform an effect according to the recognized operation state.

  Here, the operation contents for the effect button 121 and the effect lever 127 will be described. Regarding the effect button 121, the player can input an operation of pressing down the effect button 121 (hereinafter referred to as a button operation). The effect button 121 is provided with a sensor for detecting the presence / absence of a button operation input, and the sub CPU 431 can recognize the presence / absence of a button operation input using the sensor.

  With reference to FIG. 6, the effect lever 127 is configured to include a rod-shaped lever main body that is directly operated by the player, and a support member that supports the lever main body so as to be vertically movable. The support member includes an elastic member that urges the lever body to an upper position that is a reference position. The operation by the player to pull down the lever main body from the predetermined reference position to the operation position is called lever operation. When the player pulls the lever body down to the operation position by hand and then releases the hand from the lever body, the lever body returns to the reference position by the urging force of the elastic member. The effect lever 127 is provided with a sensor that detects whether or not a lever operation is input, and the sub CPU 431 can recognize whether or not a lever operation is input by using the sensor.

<Type of jackpot>
FIG. 7 is a diagram showing types of jackpots envisioned in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, there are general A, general B, and special A to special D as types of jackpot. The round numbers of the special A, the general B, the special A and the special C are four, and the number of rounds of the special B and the special D is ten. "R" in the jackpot indicates a round. The larger the number of rounds, the more the number of award balls that can be obtained by winning in the special winning opening 111 in the jackpot game, which is more advantageous to the player. Therefore, the special B and special D jackpot games are more advantageous to the player than the regular A, regular B, special A and special C jackpot games. In the special symbol hit determination for the first special symbol (in the special symbol hit determination based on the establishment of the first starting condition), when the jackpot is won, the ratio of the jackpot to be the regular A, the special A, and the special B is: They are 35%, 60%, and 5%, respectively, and are not one of general B, special C, and special D. In the special figure hitting determination for the second special symbol (in the special figure hitting determination based on the establishment of the second starting condition), when the jackpot is won, the proportion of the jackpot being the communication B, the special C, and the special D is They are 35%, 30%, and 35%, respectively, and are not one of general A, special A, and special B. The special symbol determination table TZt is formed so that the types of jackpots for the first and second special symbols are determined by the above-mentioned ratio.

  In all of the round games included in the big hit game, in all the big hit games of the communication A, the communication B, and the special A to special D, the special winning opening 111 is opened for a predetermined long opening time (for example, 30 seconds). . However, in each round game, when the number of winning game balls to the special winning opening 111 reaches a predetermined value (for example, 10), the special winning opening 111 is closed and the round game is ended.

  The special jackpots A to D belong to the probability variation jackpot. The “probability change” means that the gaming state of the gaming machine 100 is a high-probability gaming state or a high-probability gaming state. After the jackpot game of any of special A to special D is finished, the main CPU 411 sets the gaming state of the gaming machine 100 to the high-probability gaming state and the electric support gaming state. After setting to the high probability game state, the next big hit (that is, the next big hit seen from the big hit that occurred immediately before) does not occur, the number of times the special symbol fluctuates (that is, the special symbol fluctuates through the variable display) When the number of times of playing) becomes equal to or higher than the number of times of giving a high probability, the gaming state of the gaming machine 100 is set to a low probability gaming state. After setting to the electric support game state, the next big hit does not occur, and when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol becomes equal to or larger than the number of electric support grants, the game state of the gaming machine 100 is set to the non-electric support game state.

The high-probability award number refers to the number of times a special symbol changes to maintain a high-probability game state. In other words, for a certain jackpot, after the jackpot game, while the special symbol changes by i _k times, the gaming state is a high probability gaming state and the special symbol changes after i _k times, a low probability gaming state Is set, the number of times of high probability assignment corresponding to the jackpot is i _k times (i _k is an integer). As the jackpot is more likely to occur in the high-probability gaming state than in the low-probability gaming state, the higher the high-probability awarding number is, the more advantageous the player is.
The number of times the electric support is provided refers to the number of times of changing the special symbol in which the electric support game state is maintained. That relates to certain jackpot, after completion of the jackpot gaming, non conductive support game after while, the and special symbol is gaming state and conductive support gaming state fluctuates by i _d times the special symbol is varied by i _d times When the state is set, the number of times of supplying electric power corresponding to the jackpot is i _d times ( _id is an integer). Since the starting condition is more easily established in the electric support game state than in the non-electric support game state, the greater the number of electric support provisions, the more advantageous for the player.

  The number of times of high probability application and the number of times of electrical support application to the jackpots of special A to special D are 10,000 and 10,000, respectively (see FIG. 7). Therefore, after the jackpot game of any one of special A ~ special D, when the number of times the special symbol changes reaches 10,000 times without causing another big hit (in other words, if the special figure determination is performed 10,000 times) ), The gaming state of the gaming machine 100 is changed from the high-probability electric support game state to the low-probability non-electric support game state. However, since the winning probability of the jackpot in the high-probability game state is "1/35", after the jackpot game of any of special A ~ special D is substantially high probability probability until the next big jackpot win It can be said that the support game state is maintained.

  The jackpots of communication A and communication B usually belong to the jackpot. After the jackpot game of either A or B is over, the main CPU 411 sets the gaming state of the gaming machine 100 to the low-probability electric supporting game state until the special symbol changes by the predetermined number of electric supporting grants. , After the special symbol is changed by a predetermined number of electric support provided, the gaming state of the gaming machine 100 is set to a low-probability non-electrical support gaming state (that is, a normal gaming state). The number of times of supplying electric support to the jackpots of the communication A and the communication B is 50 times. In addition, after the jackpot game of the communication A or the communication B, the probability of the communication A and the communication B is set to 0 because the probability of the communication A and the communication B is changed to the low probability electric support game state. .

  In the game state setting process associated with any of the special A ~ special D jackpot, the high-probability game flag and the electric support game flag are both turned ON, and the high-probability game remaining number X and the electric support game remaining number J, "10000" and "10000" are set respectively. In the game state setting process associated with the big hit of either A or B, the high-probability game flag is turned off while the electric support game flag is turned on and the high-probability game remaining count X is set to "0". Meanwhile, "50" is set to the remaining number J of electric support games. That is, the high-probability game remaining number X and the electric support game remaining number J set in the game state setting process executed with a certain jackpot are respectively the high-probability provision number and the electric support provision corresponding to the jackpot. It matches the number of times (see FIG. 7).

  As can be seen from FIG. 7, the special symbol determination by the establishment of the second starting condition is relatively advantageous to the player than the special symbol determination by the establishment of the first starting condition (that is, more. Easy to get many prize balls). The relative advantage here is that the expected value of the number of prize balls obtained by winning the big winning hole 111 in the jackpot game executed based on the establishment of the second starting condition is executed based on the establishment of the first starting condition. It means that the number of prize balls obtained by winning the big winning opening 111 in the jackpot game is larger than the expected value. "Expected value of the number of prize balls obtained by winning the jackpot game 111 in the jackpot game", the expected value of the number of rounds in the jackpot game, or the maximum value of the total opening time of the jackpot game 111 in the jackpot game You may read it as a value.

  With reference to FIG. 8, the flow of the operation relating to the setting of the game state and the change of the special symbol by the main control unit 401 will be described. Of the operations shown in FIG. 8, the operations of steps S112 to S129 are realized by repeating the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 3).

  First, in step S111, the gaming machine 100 is initialized, and in the initial state, the high-probability game flag and the electric support game flag are set to OFF, and the high-probability game remaining count X and the electric support game remaining count J are set to zero. Is set.

  Then, in step S112, it is confirmed whether or not the special figure determination information is stored in the storage area 413a. When the special figure determination information is not stored in the storage area 413a, the process of step S112 is repeated, but when one or more special figure determination information is stored in the storage area 413a, the highest priority is given. One piece of special figure determination information in which the order is set is acquired as the determination target TT, and the special figure determination is performed on the determination target TT in step S113.

  After the special figure determination in step S113, if the high-probability game remaining number X is 1 or more, a process of subtracting 1 from the number X is performed (Y in step S114, S115), and "X = 0" is obtained by the subtraction. If so, set the high-probability game flag to OFF (Y in step S116, S117) and proceed to step S118. If “X ≧ 1” after subtraction (N in step S116), change the high-probability game flag Without it, it progresses to step S118. After performing the special drawing determination in step S113, if the number of times X is not 1 or more (N in step S114), the process proceeds to step S118 without changing the number of times X and the high probability game flag.

  In step S118, if the number of remaining electric support game J is 1 or more, a process of subtracting 1 from the number J is performed (Y of step S118, S119), and if "J = 0" by subtraction, the electric support game flag is set. After setting to OFF (Y in step S120, S121), the process proceeds to step S122, and if “J ≧ 1” after subtraction (N in step S120), the process proceeds to step S122 without changing the electric support game flag. If the number J is not 1 or more in step S118 (N in step S118), the process proceeds to step S122 without changing the number J and the electric support game flag.

  When the process proceeds to step S122, the variable display of the special symbol is started, and after the variable display of the special symbol is started, when the variation time according to the result of the special symbol variation pattern determination included in the special symbol determination elapses (Y in step S123). ), The special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode according to the result of the special symbol hit determination and the special symbol determination included in the special symbol determination (step S124). Then, if the determination target TT of this time is a big hit (Y in step S125), the process proceeds to step S126, the big hit game according to the type of the big hit is executed, and if the determination target TT of this time is a loss. (N in step S125), and the process returns to step S112.

  After the jackpot game in step S126, it is confirmed whether or not the jackpot that has occurred this time is a probability variation jackpot. If it is a probability big jackpot (Y in step S127), the game state setting process in step S128 is performed and then the process returns to step S112. On the other hand, if it is a normal jackpot (N in step S127), the game state setting process in step S129. After that, the process returns to step S112.

  In the game state setting process of step S128, the high-probability game flag and the electric support game flag are set to ON, and the high-probability game remaining number X and the electric support game remaining number J are set to "10000" and "10000", respectively. To be done. In the game state setting process of step S129, the high probability game flag is set to OFF while the electric support game flag is set to ON, and the high probability game remaining number X and the electric support game remaining number J are respectively set. “0” and “50” are set.

<Explanation of contents and flow of various performances>
Next, some effects that the effect control unit 403 can perform will be described. The production control unit 403 starts the variable display of the first to nth decorative symbols in synchronization with the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the variable production, and then the determination target TT in synchronization with the stop of the variable display of the special symbol. The variable display of the first to nth decorative symbols is stopped in a mode according to the result of the special symbol determination. Here, n is an arbitrary integer of 2 or more, but may be “n = 1”. In the following, it is assumed that n = 3 unless otherwise specified.

  In FIG. 9A, SZL, SZR, and SZC represent the first decorative design, the second decorative design, and the third decorative design, respectively. The first to third decorative symbols are also referred to as left symbol, right symbol and middle symbol, respectively. In the image display unit 104, a left symbol display area in which a left symbol is displayed, a right symbol display area in which a right symbol is displayed, and a middle symbol display area in which a middle symbol is displayed are set. Of the left, right, and middle symbol display areas, the left symbol display area is located on the leftmost, and the right symbol display area is located on the rightmost, as seen from the player facing the image display unit 104.

  With reference to FIG. 9B, the effect control unit 403 assigns each of the first to third decorative symbols to the numbers “1”, “2”, “3”, “in accordance with the result of the special figure determination and the like. It is possible to stop and display any of seven types of numerical symbols with 4 ”,“ 5 ”,“ 6 ”, and“ 7 ”and special symbols different from the numerical symbols. Instead of the numerical design, a character design to which an alphabet or the like is added may be used. As the special symbol, there are a symbol that suggests execution of a so-called pseudo continuous effect, a symbol that suggests transition to a certain effect mode, and the like. In the following, the numerical symbols with the numbers “1”, “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, “6”, “7” are respectively assigned to 1 symbol, 2 symbols, 3 symbols, Sometimes referred to as 4 symbols, 5 symbols, 6 symbols, 7 symbols.

  In the present embodiment, stopping the i-th decorative pattern in a certain mode means stopping the i-th decorative pattern in a predetermined pattern corresponding to the mode. Further, to stop and display the i-th decorative pattern and the j-th decorative pattern in a common manner means to stop and display the i-th decorative pattern and the j-th decorative pattern with a common numeral pattern or a common special pattern. (I and j are mutually different integers).

  The effect control unit 403 can stop and display the first to third decorative symbols in a doublet or non-doublet pattern in accordance with the result of the special drawing determination. The doublet indicates a state in which the first to third decorative symbols are arranged in a common numerical pattern on a predetermined effective line. The stop display of the first to third decorative patterns by the doublet corresponds to notification of an arbitrary jackpot or a specific jackpot (a definite suggestion that a jackpot game is played). The non-doublet indicates a state in which the first to third decorative designs are not aligned with a common numerical design on a predetermined effective line. In principle, the stop display of the first to third decorative symbols by the non-doublet is equivalent to a notification of loss (a definite suggestion that the jackpot game is not played).

  The effect control unit 403 selects and sets one effect mode from among a plurality of predetermined effect modes based on the command or the like received from the main control unit 401. The effect mode set here may be hereinafter referred to as a target effect mode. The effect control unit 403 performs various effects including the variable effect in the target effect mode (that is, the set effect mode).

  As shown in FIG. 10, the plurality of effect modes include a normal mode, a rush mode, and a chance mode, which are mutually different first to third effect modes. When the i-th effect mode is set to the target effect mode, the effect control unit 403 can perform the mode effect according to the i-th effect mode (i is an integer). In addition to including the variable effect, the mode effect may include any effect that does not belong to the variable effect when the variable effect is being performed and when the variable effect is not being performed. The content of the mode effect executed when a certain arbitrary effect mode is set as the target effect mode (that is, the content of the mode effect according to the certain effect mode) is targeted for another arbitrary effect mode. The contents of the mode effect executed when the effect mode is set (that is, the contents of the mode effect corresponding to the other effect mode) are partially or totally different from each other. For example, in each mode effect, a predetermined background image is displayed on the image display unit 104 and a predetermined music is output from the speaker 115. However, the background image displayed and the output music are usually in the target effect mode. The mode is different from the target effect mode being the rush mode and the target effect mode being the chance mode.

The normal mode is an effect mode that is set to the target effect mode in the low-probability non-electricity support game state and suggests to the player that the current game state is the low-probability non-electricity support game state.
The rush mode is an effect mode which is set to the target effect mode in the high-probability electric power support game state and suggests to the player that the current game state is the high-probability electric power support game state.
The chance mode is an effect mode that is set to the target effect mode in the low-probability electric power assisting game state and suggests to the player that the current game state is the low-probability electric power assisting game state.
Therefore, the player who saw the production (including the mode production) in the normal mode, the rush mode, and the chance mode has a low probability non-electric sapo game state, a high probability electric sapo game state, and a low probability, respectively. You can easily understand that you are in the electric support gaming state.

  With reference to FIG. 11, attention is paid to one piece of special figure determination information 1000 acquired as the determination target TT in an arbitrary situation. When the result of the special figure determination with respect to the special figure determination information 1000 as the determination target TT indicates a big hit, the effect control unit 403 responds to the reception of the variation start command for the special figure determination information 1000. After starting the variable display of the first to third decorative symbols and temporarily stopping the first to third decorative symbols in a doublet pattern through a predetermined effect, etc., a variation stop command for the special symbol determination information 1000 In response to the reception of, the first to third decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a doublet pattern. After that, the jackpot game based on the result of the special map determination for the special figure determination information 1000 is executed, after the jackpot game is finished, the effect control unit 403, depending on the gaming state after the jackpot game is finished, rush mode or Set the chance mode to the target performance mode.

  Strictly speaking, the temporary stop of the decorative pattern does not mean that the decorative pattern is stopped, but the decorative pattern is displayed on the image display unit 104 in a manner that allows the player to recognize that the decorative pattern has stopped. It is a variable display mode of a decorative pattern to be slightly changed. Specifically, for example, the player recognizes that the i-th decorative pattern is temporarily stopped at the symbol with the number "2", and the i-th decorative symbol is the symbol with the number "2". As possible, it means that the symbol with the number "2" is continuously displayed for a predetermined time or more while vibrating in the predetermined display area of the image display unit 104 as the i-th decorative symbol (i is an integer). In order to avoid confusion with the temporary stop, the stop display of the decorative pattern in response to the reception of the variation stop command (a complete stop display without a slight change) may be referred to as a main stop. It is understood that the stop display of the decorative symbol during the variable display of the special symbol (hence, during the execution of the variable effect) refers to a temporary stop.

[Reach production]
The production control unit 403, in the variation production, based on the result of the special diagram determination with respect to the determination target TT, among the first to third decorative symbols, the variable display of the first and second decorative symbols is a common symbol (common aspect ), The reach effect can be performed after performing the effect of temporarily stopping (tempai success effect). Here, for the sake of concrete description, it is considered that the first and second decorative symbols are the left symbol and the right symbol. Then, the effect control unit 403 can perform the reach effect after the variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped in the common symbol (common mode).

The reach effect is an effect based on the result of the special figure determination with respect to the determination target TT, and is an effect that suggests that the expectation of executing the jackpot game with respect to the determination target TT is higher than the predetermined expected degree KT _REF . The expectation of the jackpot game execution (hereinafter also referred to as the jackpot expectation) is the probability (statistical probability) that one noticed special figure determination information (here, the determination target TT) wins the jackpot. Represents If a particular effect is performed on one of the noticed special figure determination information, the expectation of the jackpot for the special figure determination information is the expectation of the jackpot for the particular effect (that particular effect is It can be said that the assigned special map determination information is the probability of winning the jackpot). The predetermined expected degree KT _REF may be a predetermined expected degree of 0 or more and less than 1, and indicates, for example, a predetermined probability OTK as a jackpot winning probability, or a predetermined value larger than the probability OTK. (For example, 5 times the probability OTK) is shown. The probability OTK is "1/300" if the special map determination is made in the low-probability game state, and "1/35" if the special map determination is made in the high-probability game state (FIG. 4). reference). In the fluctuating effect, the execution of the reach effect is higher than the non-execution of the reach effect (in other words, the fluctuating effect that includes the reach effect is higher than the fluctuating effect that does not include the reach effect). You may think that it suggests.

The effect Q ₂ executed for a certain piece of special figure determination information Q ₁ can suggest a jackpot expectation. For any one of JP diagram determination information Q _1, the probability effect Q ₂ is performed on the special symbol determination information Q ₁ and result is a "loss" of the hit determination special symbol in "r" The probability that the special figure hit determination is “big hit” and the effect Q ₂ is executed on the special figure decision information Q ₁ is represented by “v”. Then, the expectation degree of the big hit of the special figure determination information Q ₁ and the expectation degree of the big hit suggested by the performance Q ₂ are expressed by the expectation degree calculation formula “(100 × v / (r + v)) [%]”. .

  With reference to FIG. 12, in the variation effect including the reach effect, after the variation display of the first to third decorative symbols (corresponding to SZL, SZR, and SZC in FIG. 12) is started, the first and the first through the arbitrary effects. The two decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in a state where they are aligned with a common symbol (the symbol “2” in FIG. 12), and then a predetermined reach effect is performed. In the reach effect, for example, a game problem (a problem in which the main character defeats the enemy character in the game, etc.) occurs, and a game effect indicating whether or not the problem is achieved is executed. Before the reach effect is performed, when the first and second decorative symbols are provisionally stopped with the common symbol, the first and second decorative symbols are easy for the player to visually recognize the first and second decorative symbols. It is temporarily stopped at a predetermined large size. During the execution of the reach effect, for example, the small-sized first and second decorative symbols arranged in a common pattern for observing the reach effect are displayed at the corners of the image display unit 104 (in FIG. 12, It is temporarily stopped at the upper left corner (small size is smaller than the large size above). During execution of the reach effect, the third decorative symbol may be variably displayed in a small size in an arbitrary display area in the image display unit 104 (variable display faster than the first and second decorative symbols). The small-sized first to third decorative symbols may be continuously displayed regardless of whether the reach effect is being executed.

  When the determination target TT wins any kind of jackpot, an effect (for example, display of a moving image showing that the main character wins over the enemy character) is performed to show how the game task is achieved. Together with the large-sized first to third decorative patterns are temporarily stopped and displayed in the vicinity of the center of the image display unit 104 in the form of a doublet, and when the variable stop command is received, the large-sized first to third decorative patterns are double-sided. Is displayed in a stopped manner. On the other hand, when the determination target TT is a loss, an effect (for example, display of a moving image showing that the hero character is defeated by the enemy character) is performed and a large size game is performed. The first to third decorative patterns are temporarily stopped and displayed in the vicinity of the center of the image display unit 104 in the non-flat pattern, and when the variable stop command is received, the large-sized first to third decorative patterns are changed to the non-flat pattern. Will be stopped and displayed. The reach effect shown in FIG. 12 is merely an example of the reach effect. In the gaming machine 100, a plurality of reach effects having different contents can be executed.

[Upper gimmick production / Left and right gimmick production]
The movable board accessories 130U, 130L, and 130R (see FIGS. 1 and 2) are provided on the upper side, the left side, and the right side, respectively, when viewed from the player facing the image display unit 104. The movable accessories 130U, 130L, and 130R may be referred to as an upper gimmick, a left gimmick, and a right gimmick, respectively. Further, the left gimmick and the right gimmick may be collectively referred to as left and right gimmicks.

  With reference to FIGS. 13A to 13C, the position of the upper gimmick 130U can be either the standby position 1011 or the operating position 1012 below the standby position 1011. The position of the upper gimmick 130U refers to the center position or the center of gravity of the upper gimmick 130U. Regarding the upper gimmick 130U, the states in which the upper gimmick 130U is arranged at the standby position 1011 and the operating position 1012 are referred to as a standby state and an operating state, respectively. In the front-rear direction, the standby position 1011 is a position that does not overlap the image display unit 104, while the operating position 1012 is a position that overlaps the image display unit 104.

  In the game board 101, a hole 150 is formed in a portion located substantially in the center of the game board 101 and in which the game area 103 is not formed, and the image display unit 104 is provided behind the hole 150. Are placed. The player can visually recognize the image display unit 104 through the hole 150. A gap exists in the front-rear direction between the surface of the game board 101 on which the game area 103 is formed and the image display unit 104, and the upper gimmick 130U is arranged in the gap (the same applies to the left and right gimmicks).

  In the standby state of the upper gimmick 130U, the upper gimmick 130U is located above the image display unit 104, and most or all of the upper gimmick 130U is hidden behind the game board 101 and invisible to the player. When the upper gimmick 130U moves downward from the standby state as a starting point, the upper gimmick 130U enters the operating state and advances to the front of the image display unit 104, and the player can visually recognize the entire upper gimmick 130U. As shown in FIG. 13C, the effect of shifting the upper gimmick 130U from the standby state to the operating state is called an upper gimmick effect. The upper gimmick 130U that has reached the operating state in the upper gimmick effect is maintained in the operating state for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), and then returned to the standby state.

  With reference to FIGS. 14A to 14C, the position of the left gimmick 130L can be either the standby position 1021L or the operating position 1022L on the right side of the standby position 1021L. The position of the left gimmick 130L refers to the center position or the center of gravity of the left gimmick 130L. Regarding the left gimmick 130L, the states in which the left gimmick 130L is arranged at the standby position 1021L and the operating position 1022L are referred to as a standby state and an operating state, respectively. The position of the right gimmick 130R can be either the standby position 1021R or the operating position 1022R on the left side of the standby position 1021R. The position of the right gimmick 130R refers to the center position or the center of gravity of the right gimmick 130R. Regarding the right gimmick 130R, the states in which the right gimmick 130R is arranged at the standby position 1021R and the operating position 1022R are referred to as a standby state and an operating state, respectively. In the front-rear direction, the standby positions 1021L and 1021R are positions that do not overlap the image display unit 104, while the operating positions 1022L and 1022R are positions that overlap the image display unit 104. In the example of FIGS. 14A and 14B, the standby position 1021L, the operating position 1022L, the operating position 1022R, and the standby position 1021R are arranged in this order from left to right.

  In the standby state of the left and right gimmicks 130L and 130R, the left and right gimmicks 130L and 130R are located on the left and right sides of the image display unit 104, respectively, and most or all of the left and right gimmicks 130L and 130R are hidden behind the game board 101. It becomes invisible to the player. The left and right gimmicks 130L and 130R move to the right and left, respectively, starting from the standby state, so that the left and right gimmicks 130L and 130R are in an operating state and advance to the front of the image display unit 104, and the player is left and right gimmicks. The entire 130L and 130R can be visually recognized. As shown in FIG. 14C, the effect of shifting the left and right gimmicks 130L and 130R from the standby state to the operating state is referred to as the left and right gimmick effect. The left and right gimmicks 130L and 130R that have reached the operating state due to the left and right gimmick production are maintained in the operating state for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) and then returned to the standby state.

  The effect control unit 403 can perform the upper gimmick effect or the left and right gimmick effect during the variation effect or during the jackpot game, based on the result of the special drawing determination or the preliminary determination.

[Operation effect (button effect / lever effect)]
With reference to FIG. 15, the effect control unit 403 can execute the operation effect at an arbitrary timing when the variable effect or the jackpot game is being performed, based on the result of the special figure determination or the preliminary determination. The operation effect is an effect that is performed by using an operation means (input means) that can be operated by the player. Here, the operation means in the operation effect includes the effect button 121 and the effect lever 127. The effect control unit 403 sets an operation valid period having a predetermined time length in the operation effect. The operation valid period refers to a period during which the operation on the operation means is valid. Then, in response to the operation input to the operation means by the player during the operation valid period, a predetermined operation corresponding effect is performed. In FIG. 15 and FIGS. 16A and 16B described later, it is assumed that the operation effect based on the result of the special figure determination is performed in the variation effect, and in this case, the operation is effective during the execution period of the variation effect. The period is set.

  FIG. 16A shows an outline of a button effect which is an operation effect using the effect button 121. In the button effect, the effect control unit 403 sets an operation effective period during which the operation (button operation) by pressing the effect button 121 is effective, and when no button operation is input during the operation effective period, the player is given a button. An image for prompting the user to input an operation (operation on the effect button 121) is displayed on the image display unit 104.

  As an image for prompting the player to input a button operation (operation for the effect button 121), for example, as shown in FIG. 16A, a message image 1211 showing a word for prompting the button operation input and the effect button 121 It includes an imitated button image 1212 and an effective period image 1213 showing an operation effective period (remaining of the operation effective period) of the effect button 121. Then, the effect control unit 403 monitors whether or not a button operation has been input during the operation valid period, and when the button operation is input during the operation valid period, performs a predetermined operation corresponding effect in response to the input. . Usually, the operation corresponding effect is executed immediately after the input of the button operation is detected. The button effect includes at least a button operation prompting effect by displaying the images 1211 to 1213 and an operation corresponding effect corresponding to the input of the button operation. In the button effect, when the button operation is not input within the operation valid period, the effect control unit 403 may perform the operation corresponding effect after the expiration of the operation effective period, or the operation corresponding effect is not executed. Also good.

  FIG. 16B shows an outline of a lever effect that is an operation effect using the effect lever 127. In the lever effect, the effect control unit 403 sets an operation effective period during which the operation (lever operation) by pulling down the effect lever 127 is effective, and when the lever operation has not been input during the operation effective period, the lever is given to the player. An image for prompting the user to input an operation (operation on the effect lever 127) is displayed on the image display unit 104.

  An image for prompting the player to input a lever operation (operation for the effect lever 127) is, for example, as shown in FIG. 16B, a message image 1221 showing a word for prompting the input of the lever operation and the effect lever 127. It includes a simulated lever image 1222 and an effective period image 1223 showing the operation effective period (remaining operation effective period) of the effect lever 127. Since the effect button 121 and the effect lever 127 are operation means having shapes greatly different from each other, the lever image 1222 is different from the button image 1212. Then, the effect control unit 403 monitors whether or not the lever operation is input during the operation valid period, and when the lever operation is input during the operation valid period, performs a predetermined operation corresponding effect in response to the input. . Usually, the operation corresponding effect is executed immediately after the input of the lever operation is detected. The lever effect includes at least a lever operation prompting effect by displaying the images 1221 to 1223 and an operation corresponding effect corresponding to the input of the lever operation. In the lever effect, if the lever operation is not input within the operation valid period, the effect control unit 403 may perform the operation corresponding effect after the expiration of the operation effective period, or the operation corresponding effect is not executed. Also good.

  The operation corresponding effect may be an effect based on the result of the special figure determination on the determination target TT. That is, for example, the operation corresponding effect may be a notice effect that suggests the expectation of a big hit of the determination target TT. The notice effect may take various forms such as displaying a cut-in image and operating effect of the movable accessory. The operation corresponding effect may be a winning effect that finally announces (clears) whether or not the determination target TT has won the jackpot.

  In the period during which the button effect is performed in the variable effect (including the period during which the button prompting effect is performed and the period during which the operation corresponding effect is performed), small-sized first to third decorative patterns (FIG. 16). A variable display (corresponding to KZ in (a)) may be performed. That is, for example, during the period in which the button effect is being performed, the first to third decorative symbols are small in size so that the player's attention can be easily directed to the button effect, and a position that is not very noticeable to the player (for example, The variable display may be performed at positions near any of the four corners of the image display unit 104. The same applies to the period during which the lever effect is performed. The small-sized first to third decorative symbols may be continuously displayed regardless of whether or not the operation effect is being executed.

  Further, the operation-based effect may be an effect based on the result of the preliminary determination for the preliminary determination target. In this case, for example, in response to the operation input to the operation means, it is possible to change the display mode of the hold image or execute a predetermined zone effect as the operation corresponding effect.

  In the following, some embodiments of the gaming machine 100 based on the above-described basic embodiments are listed below. Unless otherwise specified, the contents described in the basic embodiment are applied to each of the following embodiments, and the matters inconsistent with the contents described in the basic embodiment in each of the following embodiments will be described in each of the following embodiments. Description has priority. It is also possible to combine any two or more embodiments described below.

<< First Embodiment >>
A first embodiment of the gaming machine 100 will be described.

  With reference to FIGS. 17A and 17B, attention is paid to one piece of special figure determination information JJ. The main control unit 401 acquires the special figure determination information JJ from the storage area 413a as the determination target TT, and performs the special figure determination on the special figure determination information JJ. When the effect control unit 403 receives the variation start command including the result of the special figure determination for the special figure determination information JJ from the main control unit 401, the variation production for the special figure determination information JJ is performed based on the result of the special figure determination. The content of the HE is determined, and the variable effect HE including the variable display of the first to third decorative symbols is started. Further, when the main control unit 401 performs the special figure determination on the special figure determination information JJ, the special symbols are variably displayed for a time corresponding to the result of the special figure variation pattern determination included in the special figure determination. After that, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode showing the result of the special symbol determination. The production control unit 403 starts the variable display of the first to third decorative symbols in synchronization with the start of the variable display of the special symbol for the special symbol determination information JJ, and the variable display of the special symbol for the special symbol determination information JJ. In synchronism with the stop of, the variation effect HE is ended and the first to third decorative symbols are stopped and displayed (main stop display) in a mode showing the result of the special figure determination.

  When the special figure determination information JJ is a big hit, after the special symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner showing a big hit and the first to third decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner showing a big hit (accordingly, variation) After the end of the production HE), the jackpot game OU is played.

  The first embodiment includes Examples EX1_1 to EX1_7 shown below. The matters described in any one of the embodiments EX1_1 to EX1_7 can be applied to any other embodiment as long as there is no contradiction.

[Example EX1_1]
Example EX1_1 will be described.

  With reference to FIG. 18, in Example EX1_1, the reach effect is executed in the variation effect HE for the special figure determination information JJ, and there is a suggestion and loss that the reach effect is being executed and the reach effect is a big hit. It is assumed that the operation effect is performed before any of the suggestions that there is, and the operation corresponding effect X1 is performed in the operation effect.

For example, as described above, in the reach effect, a game problem (a problem in which the main character defeats an enemy character in the game, etc.) occurs, and an effect indicating whether or not the problem is achieved is executed.
When the determination target TT (here, the special figure determination information JJ) is a big hit, the success effect indicating that the task in the game is achieved is executed and the first to third decorative patterns are in the doublet pattern. Is temporarily stopped and displayed, and in response to the reception of the variation stop command, the first to third decorative symbols are permanently stopped and displayed in the form of a doublet. The suggestion that it is a big hit in the reach effect is realized in the above-described successful effect, or in the effect of temporarily stopping and displaying the first to third decorative symbols in the form of double eyes.
When the determination target TT (here, the special figure determination information JJ) is a loss, a failure effect indicating that the task in the game is not achieved is executed and the first to third decorative symbols are in a non-sloping pattern. Is temporarily stopped and displayed, and in response to the reception of the variation stop command, the first to third decorative symbols are permanently stopped and displayed in a non-flat pattern. The suggestion that it is a loss in the reach effect is realized by the above-described failure effect or by the effect of temporarily displaying the first to third decorative symbols in the non-smooth pattern.

FIG. 19 shows a table TBL _A for determining the effect mode (contents) of the operation corresponding effect X1. The table TBL _A includes tables TBL _{A1 to} TBL _A4 . Effect control unit 403, when the special symbol determination information JJ is lost game using the table TBL _A1, by the use of a table TBL _A2 when special symbol determination information JJ is jackpot through A or through B, special symbol When the determination information JJ is a special A or special C jackpot, the table TBL _A3 is used, and when the special drawing determination information JJ is a special B or special D jackpot, the table TBL _A4 is used, and the operation corresponding effect X1 is used. The effect mode (contents) is determined, and the operation corresponding effect X1 according to the determined effect mode is executed.

Specifically, the effect control unit 403,
When the special figure determination information JJ is lost, the table TBL _A1 is used to execute the green CI effect and the red CI effect as the operation corresponding effect X1 with a probability of 70% and 30%, respectively.
When the special figure determination information JJ is a jackpot of A or B, the table TBL _A2 is used to operate the green CI effect, the red CI effect, and the rainbow effect with a probability of 15%, 60%, or 25%, respectively. Executed as corresponding effect X1,
When the special drawing determination information JJ is a special A or special C jackpot, the table TBL _A3 is used to operate the green CI effect, the red CI effect, and the rainbow effect with a probability of 15%, 60%, or 25%, respectively. Executed as corresponding effect X1,
When the special figure determination information JJ is a special B or special D jackpot, using the table TBL _A4 , the green CI effect, the red CI effect, the rainbow effect, the upper gimmick effect, and the premier character effect are respectively 15% and 60%. %, 15%, 5%, and 5% with a probability of being executed as the operation corresponding effect X1.

  The effect control unit 403 determines the effect mode of the operation corresponding effect X1 with the above-mentioned probability, using the result of the special figure determination with respect to the special figure determination information JJ, the random number for the effect generated by itself, and the like. When the special image determination information JJ is lost, the rainbow effect, the upper gimmick effect or the premier character effect is not executed as the operation corresponding effect X1. When the special drawing determination information JJ is a jackpot of the communication A, the communication B, the special A, or the special C, the upper gimmick effect or the premier character effect is not executed as the operation corresponding effect X1.

  20A to 20E show an outline of a green CI effect, a red CI effect, a rainbow effect, an upper gimmick effect, and a premier character effect. The green CI effect, the red CI effect, the rainbow effect, the upper gimmick effect, and the premier character effect are effects having different effect modes (contents of effect) from each other. The green CI effect is an effect of displaying a green cut-in image based on green on the image display unit 104, and the red CI effect is an effect of displaying a red cut-in image based on red on the image display unit 104. is there. Although not clear from FIG. 20C, the rainbow effect is an effect of displaying a rainbow cut-in image including seven colors forming a rainbow on the image display unit 104, or an effect light unit 116 and a panel lamp 135. Is the effect of causing the above seven colors to emit light. The upper gimmick effect is as described above (see FIG. 13C). The premier character effect is an effect of displaying a premier character image (image 1410 in FIG. 20E) showing a predetermined premier character on the image display unit 104.

  The rainbow effect, the upper gimmick effect, and the premier character effect are executed only when the determination target TT (here, special figure determination information JJ) is a big hit. Therefore, the rainbow effect, the upper gimmick effect, and the premier character effect belong to the jackpot confirmation effect that suggests that one of the types of jackpots has been won. In other words, the jackpot expectation degree suggested by the jackpot finalization effect is 100%. The suggestion that you have won a jackpot of any type is also a suggestion that you will be in a jackpot game state where a jackpot game of any kind is performed, and a low probability non-electric sapo game state after a jackpot game. It is also a suggestion that a high-probability electric support game state or a low-probability electric support game state that is advantageous to the player is entered. The jackpot confirmation effect described in the present embodiment is an effect that is executed before the stop display of the special symbol and the temporary stop or the final stop display of the first to third decorative symbols, and a mode showing the jackpot. Therefore, it is an effect different from the effect of temporarily or permanently displaying the first to third decorative symbols.

  Of the rainbow effect, the upper gimmick effect and the premier character effect, only the upper gimmick effect and the premier character effect are executed only when the special B or the special D is a big hit. Therefore, the upper gimmick effect and the premier character effect belong to the first special jackpot finalized effect which suggests that the special B or special D jackpot is won. The suggestion that the special B or special D jackpot is won is also a suggestion that the jackpot game state where the special B or special D jackpot game (here, the 10R jackpot game) is performed, and the jackpot game It is also a suggestion that a high probability electric sapo game state, which is more advantageous to the player than a low probability non-electric sapo game state, is obtained.

The green CI effect and the red CI effect are executed both when the jackpot is a big hit and when it is lost, and thus do not belong to the jackpot finalized effect. Both the green CI effect and the red CI effect suggest a jackpot expectation degree for the determination target TT, but the jackpot expectation degree suggested by them is less than 100%. As can be understood from the above-mentioned expectation calculation formula and the table TBL _A , it is suggested that the red CI effect has a higher expectation degree for a jackpot of any kind than the green CI effect.

In the jackpot game state, a jackpot game state of 4R by a jackpot of A, B, special A or special C and a jackpot game of 10R by a jackpot of special B or D which is more advantageous to the player. There is a state. Based on the result of the special figure determination, the effect control unit 403 may execute the jackpot confirmation effect in the variable effect HE before the jackpot gaming state. If the table TBL _A is used, when the special B or the special D is hit, the first special jackpot finalizing effect may be executed among the plurality of types of jackpot finalizing effects, while the communication A, the communication B, the special In the case of the A or special C jackpot, the first special jackpot final effect is not executed. By allowing such a first special jackpot final effect to be executed, the player strongly desires the occurrence of the first special jackpot final effect, and when the first special jackpot final effect occurs, a great pleasure is given. It is possible to obtain a sense of security (a sense of security that a 10R jackpot game is played).

Also, it can be considered as follows.
Under the condition that the special image determination information JJ is a big hit of the common A, the common B, the special A, or the special C, the effect control unit 403 determines a plurality of types under the determination conditions based on the table TBL _A2 or TBL _A3. Of the jackpot final effects, it is possible to determine the jackpot final effects to be executed, and under the condition that the special figure determination information JJ is a special B or special D jackpot, the table TBL _A4 determines the conditions. Of the plurality of types of jackpot final effects, the jackpot final effects to be executed can be determined.
While the determination condition based on the table TBL _A2 or TBL _A3 cannot determine the first special jackpot final effect, the determination condition based on the table TBL _A4 can determine the first special jackpot final effect.
When the big hitting game state of 4R due to the big hit of the communication A, the communication B, the special A or the special C, the effect control unit 403 determines the jackpot finalizing effect to be executed under the determination condition by the table TBL _A2 or TBL _A3. It is possible, and in the case of a jackpot gaming state for 10R due to the jackpot of special B or special D, the jackpot finalizing effect to be executed can be determined under the determination condition of the table TBL _A4 .

In the example EX1_1, it is assumed that the special figure determination for the special figure determination information JJ is performed in the low-probability non-electricity support game state. However, even when the special figure determination for the special figure determination information JJ is performed in the low-probability electric power support game state, the high-probability electric power support game state, or the high-probability non-electric power support game state, the table TBL _{A of} FIG. The effect mode of the operation corresponding effect X1 may be determined using. The method of determining the effect mode of the operation corresponding effect X1 does not depend on the game state at the time of the special figure determination with respect to the special figure determination information JJ, and may be constant.

In addition, when the special B or the special D is a big hit, the appearance rate of the upper gimmick effect and the appearance rate of the premier character effect may be different from each other. That is, for example, when the special image determination information JJ is a special B or special D jackpot, the green CI effect, the red CI effect, the rainbow effect, the upper gimmick effect, and the premier character effect are 15%, 60%, 15 respectively. The table TBL _A4 may be modified so that the operation corresponding effect X1 is executed with a probability of%, 8%, or 2%.

Moreover, when the special figure determination information JJ has won any of the special jackpots A to D, the upper gimmick effect may be executed as the operation corresponding effect X1, and for the special figure determination. The table TBL _A may be modified so that the premiere character effect may be executed as the operation-corresponding effect X1 only when the information JJ has been won in the special B or special D jackpot.

[Example EX1_2]
Example EX1_2 will be described. In Example EX1_2, the effect during the jackpot game based on Example EX1_1 will be described.

FIG. 21 shows a jackpot effect pattern representing a jackpot effect pattern executed in the jackpot game OU. The jackpot effect patterns include jackpot effect patterns PTN _{A1 to} PTN _A3 . The effect control unit 403 can determine the content of the jackpot effect executed in the jackpot game OU, based on the result of the special figure determination for the special figure determination information JJ and the content of the variable effect HE. This determination is performed by selecting one of the jackpot effect patterns PTN _{A1 to} PTN _A3 , and the jackpot effect according to the selected jackpot effect pattern is performed.

In the jackpot effect pattern PTN _A1 , a predetermined effect (4R effect) E _A1 is executed in the entire execution period of the jackpot game OU. In the big hit production pattern PTN _A2 , execution of the production E _A1 is started with the start of the big hit game OU, and at a predetermined timing (for example, the end timing of the fourth round) during the big hit game OU, a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). After executing a predetermined effect (round promotion effect) E _A2 which is a minute effect, a predetermined effect (10R effect) E _A3 is executed until the jackpot game OU ends. In the jackpot effect pattern PTN _A3 , a predetermined effect E _A3 is executed in the entire execution period of the jackpot game OU. The effects E _{A1 to} E _A3 are effects different from each other.

Reference is made to FIGS. 22 (a) and 22 (b). In Example EX1_2, the jackpot effect pattern in the jackpot game OU is selected and determined according to the tables shown in FIGS. 22 (a) and 22 (b). That is,
In the case where the first special jackpot finalization effect is not executed in the variable rendering HE, the jackpot game OU of the communication A, the communication B, the distribution A or the distribution C is performed based on the result of the distribution map determination with respect to the information for special map determination JJ. At that time, when the jackpot effect pattern PTN _A1 is selected with a probability of 100%, and when the jackpot game OU of the special B or the special D is performed based on the result of the special figure determination with respect to the special figure determination information JJ, 20%, 80 The jackpot effect patterns PTN _A2 and PTN _A3 are respectively selected with a probability of%.
The first special jackpot confirmation effect is executed in the variable effect HE only when the special B or special D jackpot is won, and the special figure determination information JJ is won the special B or special D jackpot and In the case where the first special jackpot finalization effect is executed in the variable effect HE, the jackpot effect pattern PTN _A3 is selected with a probability of 100% for the jackpot game OU.
In addition, when the big hit production pattern PTN _A3 is selected, in response to the reception of the variation stop command for the special image determination information JJ, the first to third decorative symbols are stopped and displayed on the double stitches of the seven symbols. , When the big hit production pattern PTN _A1 or PTN _A2 is selected, in response to the reception of the variation stop command for the special figure determination information JJ, the first to the first in the ditto of any one of the symbols 1 to 6 The stop mode and the jackpot effect pattern of the first to third decorative symbols are determined in conjunction with each other so that the three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed.

Then, the effect E _A1 may be executed when the jackpot game being executed is the jackpot game of the communication A, the communication B, and the special A to the special D, so the jackpot game being executed is 4R. It also functions as an effect that suggests that it may be a jackpot game for a minute, and also as an effect that suggests that the jackpot game being executed is either a jackpot game for 4R or a jackpot game for 10R. Function. Since the effects E _A2 and E _A3 are executed only when the special B or special D jackpot game is executed, the effects E _A2 and E _A3 function as an indication that the jackpot game being executed is a jackpot game for 10R. Of these, the effect E _A2 is an effect performed after the effect E _A1 , and functions as a round promotion effect that suggests that the jackpot game OU exceeds 4R and continues to 10R. The effects E _A1 , E _A2 , and E _A3 are, for example, in the image display unit 104, effects for displaying an image including the characters “SMALL per”, effects for displaying an image including the characters “MAX UP”, and characters “MAX”, respectively. It includes an effect of displaying an image including “win” (see FIG. 22C).

According to the method shown in FIGS. 22 (a) and (b), the effect control unit 403 can execute the effect E _A1 in the jackpot gaming state in which the jackpot game for 4R is performed, and the jackpot game for 10R is performed. There are times when the effect E _A2 is executed after the effect E _A1 is executed in the jackpot gaming state. However, when the first special jackpot finalized effect is performed in the variable effect HE, selection of the jackpot effect pattern PTN _A2 as a jackpot effect pattern in the subsequent jackpot game OU is restricted. In other words, in the case of executing an effect E _A2 and E _A3 from running effect E _A1 in jackpot gaming state jackpot game of 10R fraction is carried out, in the previous variation effect HE, first special jackpot deterministic The effect is not executed (see FIG. 22 (c)).

When the first special jackpot finalized effect that suggests that the jackpot for 10R is won is performed in the variable effect HE, the player recognizes that the jackpot game for 10R is performed at that stage. . In such a case, the player may feel uncomfortable when executing the effect E _A1 that suggests that the jackpot game being executed may be the jackpot game for 4R during the jackpot game. The effect E _A2 executed thereafter may be a useless effect (redundant effect) that does not suggest any new information to the player. Moreover, there is a possibility that the function of the effect E _A1 (the function of agitating anxiety about the 4R jackpot gaming state or the like) may be destroyed. According to the above method, such concerns are eliminated.

However, even when the first special jackpot confirmation effect is performed in the variable effect HE, the jackpot effect pattern PTN _A2 may be rarely selected (see FIG. 23 (b)). That is, for example, as shown in FIG. 23 (a), in the case where the special figure determination information JJ wins the big hit of the special B or the special D and the first special big jackpot final effect is executed in the variable effect HE, the big hit game OU is executed. The jackpot effect patterns PTN _A2 and PTN _A3 may be selected with a probability of 2% and 98%, respectively.

In this case, when the special figure determination information JJ is a special B or special D jackpot, the jackpot effect pattern PTN _A2 may be selected, but the first special jackpot confirmation effect during the variable effect HE. When performing, the jackpot effect pattern PTN _A2 is more difficult to be selected than in the case where the first special jackpot final effect is not performed during the variable effect HE (comparison between FIG. 22A and FIG. 23A).
From a different point of view, when the special figure determination information JJ is a special B or special D jackpot, in the case of performing the effect E _A1 and then the effect E _A2 in the jackpot gaming state, the jackpot is a big hit. Compared with the case where the effect E _A3 is executed without executing the effects E _A1 and E _A2 in the game state, the first special jackpot finalizing effect is less likely to be executed in the preceding variable effect HE.
It can also be said as follows. When the special figure determination information JJ is a special B or special D jackpot, the jackpot production by the jackpot production pattern PTN _A2 during the jackpot game in the state where the first special jackpot finalized production is executed in the variable production HE. The probability of performing (2%: FIG. 23 (a)) is the probability of performing the jackpot effect by the jackpot effect pattern PTN _A2 during the jackpot game in the state where the first special jackpot finalized effect is not executed in the variable effect HE (20 %: Lower than that of FIG.

[Example EX1_3]
Example EX1_3 will be described. In the example EX1_3, the table for determining the effect mode of the operation corresponding effect X1 is different from that in the example EX1_1, based on the example EX1_1. Hereinafter, this will be described.

FIG. 24 shows a table TBL _B used in the embodiment EX1_3 for determining the effect mode (contents) of the operation corresponding effect X1. The table TBL _B includes tables TBL _{B1 to} TBL _B4 . Effect control unit 403, when the special symbol determination information JJ is lost game using the table TBL _B1, by the use of a table TBL _B2 when special symbol determination information JJ is jackpot through A or through B, special symbol When the determination information JJ is a special A or special C big hit, the table TBL _B3 is used, and when the special drawing determination information JJ is a special B or special D big hit, the table TBL _B4 is used, and the operation corresponding effect X1 The effect mode (contents) is determined, and the operation corresponding effect X1 according to the determined effect mode is executed.

Specifically, the effect control unit 403,
When the special figure determination information JJ is lost, the table TBL _B1 is used to execute the green CI effect and the red CI effect as the operation corresponding effects X1 with a probability of 70% and 30%, respectively.
When the special figure determination information JJ is a big hit of A or B, the table TBL _B2 is used to operate the green CI effect, the red CI effect, and the rainbow effect with a probability of 15%, 60%, or 25%, respectively. Executed as corresponding effect X1,
When the special drawing determination information JJ is a special A or special C jackpot, using the table TBL _B3 , the green CI effect, the red CI effect, the rainbow effect, the upper gimmick effect, and the premier character effect are respectively 15% and 60%. %, 15%, 5%, 5% with a probability of execution as the operation corresponding effect X1,
When the special drawing determination information JJ is a special B or special D jackpot, using the table TBL _B4 , the green CI effect, the red CI effect, the rainbow effect, the upper gimmick effect, and the premier character effect are respectively 15% and 60%. %, 15%, 5%, and 5% with a probability of being executed as the operation corresponding effect X1.

  The effect control unit 403 determines the effect mode of the operation corresponding effect X1 with the above-mentioned probability, using the result of the special figure determination with respect to the special figure determination information JJ, the random number for the effect generated by itself, and the like. When the special image determination information JJ is lost, the rainbow effect, the upper gimmick effect or the premier character effect is not executed as the operation corresponding effect X1. When the special figure determination information JJ is a hit of A or B, the upper gimmick effect or the premier character effect is not executed as the operation corresponding effect X1.

  The rainbow effect, the upper gimmick effect, and the premier character effect are executed only when the determination target TT (here, special figure determination information JJ) is a big hit. Therefore, the rainbow effect, the upper gimmick effect, and the premier character effect belong to the jackpot confirmation effect that suggests that one of the types of jackpots has been won. In other words, the jackpot expectation degree suggested by the jackpot finalization effect is 100%. The suggestion that you have won a jackpot of any type is also a suggestion that you will be in a jackpot game state where a jackpot game of any kind is performed, and a low probability non-electric sapo game state after a jackpot game. It is also a suggestion that a high-probability electric support game state or a low-probability electric support game state that is advantageous to the player is entered.

  Of the rainbow effect, the upper gimmick effect and the premier character effect, only the upper gimmick effect and the premier character effect are executed only when one of the special jackpots A to D is a big hit. Therefore, the upper gimmick effect and the premier character effect belong to the second special jackpot finalized effect that suggests that one of the special jackpots A to D has been won. The suggestion that you have won the jackpot of any of special A ~ special D is that the jackpot game state where the jackpot game (here, 4R or 10R jackpot game) by any of special A ~ special D is played It is also a suggestion that, after a jackpot game, a high-probability electric sapo game state that is more advantageous to the player than a low-probability non-electric sapo game state is suggested.

The green CI effect and the red CI effect are executed both when the jackpot is a big hit and when it is lost, and thus do not belong to the jackpot finalized effect. Both the green CI effect and the red CI effect suggest a jackpot expectation degree for the determination target TT, but the jackpot expectation degree suggested by them is less than 100%. As can be understood from the above-described expectation degree calculation formula and the table TBL _B , it is suggested that the red CI effect has a higher expectation degree for any kind of jackpot than the green CI effect.

The gaming state after the jackpot game is a low-probability electric sapo game state that shifts after the jackpot game of A or B, and a high-probability electric sapo game state that shifts after the jackpot game of special A to D. There is. As described above, the low-probability electric sapo game state and the high-probability electric sapo game state are easier for the player to satisfy the starting condition than the non-electric sapo game state (for example, the low-probability non-electric sapo game state). It is advantageous, and the high-probability electric support game state is more advantageous than the low-probability electric support game state in that it is easy to win the jackpot. When the special figure hit determination indicates a big hit, the game state after the big hit game is determined based on the result of the special figure symbol judgment, so the special figure judgment including the special figure hit judgment and the special figure symbol judgment is a big hit game. It can be said that it includes the determination of whether or not to execute and the determination of whether the gaming state of the gaming machine 100 is changed to the low-probability electric support game state or the high-probability electric support game state after the jackpot game. Based on the result of the special map determination, the production control unit 403, before the jackpot gaming state (therefore, before the jackpot game goes to the low-probability electric support game state or the high-probability electric support game state), to the variable production HE There are times when a jackpot final production is executed. If the table TBL _B is used, the special special jackpot finalization effect may be executed among the plurality of types of special jackpot finalization effects at the time of the special jackpot A-special D. At the time of a jackpot of B, the second special jackpot final effect is not executed. By making it possible to execute such a second special jackpot final effect, the player strongly desires the occurrence of the second special jackpot final effect, and when the second special jackpot final effect occurs, it is a great pleasure. And a sense of security (a sense of security in transitioning to a high-probability electric power support game state after a jackpot game) can be obtained.

Also, it can be considered as follows.
Under the condition that the special figure determination information JJ is a big hit of the communication A or the communication B, the effect control unit 403 executes, out of a plurality of kinds of jackpot final effects, under the determination condition based on the table TBL _B2. Under the condition that the jackpot final effect can be determined and the special figure determination information JJ has won any of the special jackpots A to D, a plurality of types are determined by the table TBL _B3 or TBL _B4. Of the jackpot final effects, the jackpot final effects to be executed can be determined.
The second special jackpot finalized effect cannot be determined under the determination condition based on the table TBL _B2 , while the second special jackpot finalized effect can be determined under the determination condition based on the table TBL _B3 or TBL _B4 .
The production control unit 403 can determine the jackpot finalized production to be executed under the determination condition according to the table TBL _B2 when the low probability electric support game state is achieved after the big hit game by the big hit of the communication A or the communication B. When the high-probability electric power support game state is achieved after the big hit game by any of the big hits of A to special D, the big hit finalized effect to be executed can be determined under the determination condition by the table TBL _B3 or TBL _B4 .

In the example EX1_3, it is assumed that the special figure determination for the special figure determination information JJ is performed in the low-probability non-electricity support game state. However, even when the special figure judgment for the special figure judgment information JJ is performed in the low-probability electric power support game state, the high-probability electric power support game state, or the high-probability non-electric power support game state, the table TBL _{B of} FIG. The effect mode of the operation corresponding effect X1 may be determined using. The method of determining the effect mode of the operation corresponding effect X1 does not depend on the game state at the time of the special figure determination with respect to the special figure determination information JJ, and may be constant.

Further, in the special jackpots A to D, the appearance rate of the upper gimmick effect and the appearance rate of the premier character effect may be different from each other. That is, for example, when the special image determination information JJ is a special A or special C jackpot, the green CI effect, the red CI effect, the rainbow effect, the upper gimmick effect, and the premier character effect are 15%, 60%, 15 respectively. %, 8%, 2%, the table TBL _B3 may be modified so as to be executed as the operation corresponding effect X1, or instead of or in addition to this, the special figure determination information JJ is special B. Or when it is a jackpot of special D, the green CI effect, the red CI effect, the rainbow effect, the upper gimmick effect, and the premier character effect are operated with a probability of 15%, 60%, 15%, 2%, 8%, respectively. The table TBL _B4 may be modified so as to be executed as the presentation X1. According to this, when the premiere character effect is executed, it is more likely that the special B or special D jackpot is won than when the upper gimmick effect is executed. I want to see the appearance of the premier character production rather than the production, and when the appearance of the premier character production comes, I can get more joy.

[Example EX1_4]
Example EX1_4 will be described. In Example EX1_4, the effect during the jackpot game based on Example EX1_3 will be described.

FIG. 25 shows a jackpot effect pattern that represents a jackpot effect pattern executed in the jackpot game OU. The jackpot effect patterns include jackpot effect patterns PTN _{B1 to} PTN _B3 . The effect control unit 403 can determine the content of the jackpot effect executed in the jackpot game OU, based on the result of the special figure determination for the special figure determination information JJ and the content of the variable effect HE. This determination is made by selecting one of the jackpot effect patterns PTN _{B1 to} PTN _B3 , and the jackpot effect according to the selected jackpot effect pattern is performed.

In the jackpot effect pattern PTN _B1 , a predetermined effect (normal jackpot effect) E _B1 is executed in the entire execution period of the jackpot game OU. In the big hit production pattern PTN _B2 , execution of the production E _B1 is started along with the start of the big hit game OU, and at a predetermined timing (for example, the end timing of the third round) during the big hit game OU, a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). After executing a predetermined effect (probability variation promotion effect) E _B2 which is a minute effect, a predetermined effect (probability variation jackpot effect) E _B3 is executed until the end of the jackpot game OU. In the jackpot effect pattern PTN _B3 , a predetermined effect E _B3 is executed in the entire execution period of the jackpot game OU. The effects E _{B1 to} E _B3 are effects different from each other.

Reference is made to FIGS. 26 (a) and 26 (b). In Example EX1_4, the jackpot effect pattern in the jackpot game OU is selected and determined according to the tables shown in FIGS. 26 (a) and (b). That is,
In the case where the second special jackpot finalizing effect is not executed in the variation effect HE, when the jackpot game OU of the communication A or the communication B is performed based on the result of the special figure determination with respect to the special figure determination information JJ, the probability of 100%. When the big hit production pattern PTN _B1 is selected, and when the special A or special C big hit game OU is performed based on the result of the special drawing determination with respect to the special drawing determination information JJ, there is a probability of 20% and 80% respectively. When the production patterns PTN _B2 and PTN _B3 are selected and the special B or special D jackpot game OU is performed based on the special figure determination result for the special figure determination information JJ, there is a probability of 10% or 90%, respectively. The jackpot effect patterns PTN _B2 and PTN _B3 are selected.
The second special jackpot finalized effect is executed in the variable effect HE only when one of the special jackpots A to D has been won, and the special figure determination information JJ is one of the special jackpots A to D. In the case of winning the jackpot and performing the second special jackpot finalizing effect in the variable effect HE, the jackpot effect pattern PTN _B3 is selected with a probability of 100% for the jackpot game OU.
In addition, when the big hit production pattern PTN _B3 is selected, in response to the reception of the variation stop command for the special image determination information JJ, the first to third decorative patterns are displayed on the double stitches of the three symbols or the seven symbols. When stopped and displayed, when the jackpot effect pattern PTN _B1 or PTN _B2 is selected, in response to the reception of the variation stop command for the special figure determination information JJ, by any of the numerical symbols other than the 3 symbol and the 7 symbol The stop mode of the first to third decorative symbols and the jackpot effect pattern are determined in conjunction with each other so that the first to third decorative symbols are stopped and displayed on the doublet.

Then, the effect E _B1 may be executed when the jackpot game being executed is the jackpot game of the communication A, the passage B, and the special A to the special D. Therefore, the jackpot game being executed is normally. It functions as a production that suggests that there is a possibility that it is a jackpot game due to a jackpot and that there is a possibility that it may shift to a low probability electric support game state after a jackpot game, or the jackpot game that is being executed is It suggests that it is a jackpot game with either a regular jackpot or a probability variation jackpot, and also functions as an effect that suggests that the jackpot game goes to either a low-probability electric sapo game state or a high-probability electric sapo game state. Since the effects E _B2 and E _B3 are executed only when the jackpot game of any of special A to D is executed, it is suggested that the jackpot game being executed is a jackpot game due to the probability variation jackpot and the jackpot game. After that, it functions as a production that suggests a transition to a high probability electric support game state. Of these, the effect E _B2 is an effect performed after the effect E _B1 and functions as a so-called probability variation promotion effect. The effects E _B1 , E _B2 , and E _B3 are, for example, in the image display unit 104, an effect that displays an image including the character “normal hit”, an effect that displays an image that includes the character “probable change promotion”, and the character “probable change”, respectively. The effect including an image including "is included (see FIG. 26C).

According to the method shown in FIG. 26 (a) and (b), the performance control unit 403 can execute a presentation E _B1 in jackpot gaming state by conventional jackpot, perform the effect E _B1 in jackpot gaming state by probability variation jackpot After that, the effect E _B2 may be executed. However, when the second special jackpot finalized effect is performed in the variable effect HE, selection of the jackpot effect pattern PTN _B2 as a jackpot effect pattern in the subsequent jackpot game OU is restricted. In other words, in the case of performing the effects E _B1 and then the effects E _B2 and E _B3 in the jackpot gaming state due to the probability variation jackpot, the second special jackpot final effect is not executed in the preceding variable effect HE ( FIG. 26C).

When the second special jackpot final production that suggests that the odds jackpot is won is performed in the variable rendering HE, at that stage, the player performs the jackpot game with the odds jackpot and the jackpot game. Recognize that it will shift to a high probability electric support game state after that. In such a case, the player may feel uncomfortable when performing the effect E _B1 that suggests that the jackpot game being executed may be a jackpot game due to a normal jackpot during the jackpot game. The effect _EB2 executed thereafter may be a useless effect (redundant effect) that does not suggest any new information to the player. In addition, there is a possibility that the function of the effect E _B1 (function of inducing anxiety about being a normal big hit etc.) may be destroyed. According to the above method, such concerns are eliminated.

However, even when the second special jackpot finalizing effect is performed in the variable effect HE, the jackpot effect pattern PTN _B2 may be rarely selected (see FIG. 27 (b)). That is, for example, as shown in FIG. 27A, in the case where the special figure determination information JJ is a special A or special C jackpot and the second special jackpot finalized production is executed in the variable production HE, the jackpot game OU is displayed. The jackpot effect patterns PTN _B2 and PTN _B3 are respectively selected with a probability of 2% and 98%, and the special figure determination information JJ is selected as a special B or special D jackpot and the variable effect HE is selected. In the case where the 2 special jackpot final production is executed, the jackpot production patterns PTN _B2 and PTN _B3 may be selected with a probability of 1% and 99%, respectively, for the jackpot game OU.

In this case, when the special figure determination information JJ is a big hit in any of the special A to special D, the big hit production pattern PTN _B2 may be selected, but the second special is produced during the variation production HE. When the jackpot finalization effect is performed, the jackpot effect pattern PTN _B2 is less likely to be selected than when the second special jackpot finalization effect is not performed during the variable effect HE (see FIG. 26A and FIG. 27A). Contrast).
A different perspective, to execute when the special symbol determination information JJ is elected to any jackpot JP A~ JP D, and directing E _B2 from running effect E _B1 at jackpot gaming state case Then, in the variation effect HE before that, it is more difficult to execute the second special jackpot finalizing effect than in the case of executing the effect E _B3 without executing the effects E _B1 and E _B2 in the jackpot gaming state. There is.
It can also be said as follows. When the special figure determination information JJ has been hit in any of the special A to special D jackpot, the jackpot effect pattern PTN _B2 during the jackpot game in the state where the second special jackpot finalized effect is executed in the variable effect HE. The probability (2% or 1%: FIG. 27 (a)) of performing the jackpot production by the jackpot production pattern PTN _B2 during the jackpot game in the state where the second special jackpot finalized production is not executed in the variable production HE. It is lower than the probability (20% or 10%: FIG. 26A) of performing the effect.

The specific contents of the effect E _B3 executed during the special jackpot game of special A or special C and the specific contents of the effect E _B3 executed during the special jackpot game of special B or D are different from each other. It may be. Further, when the jackpot effect pattern PTN _B2 is selected when the special B or special D jackpot is won, the effect E _B2 may also have a function as a round promotion effect.

[Example EX1_5]
Example EX1_5 will be described. In Example EX1_5, the effect after the jackpot game based on Example EX1_3 will be described.

Referring to FIG. 28, in the embodiment EX1_5, it is assumed that the target effect mode may be set to the chance mode not only in the low-probability electric power support game state but also in the high-probability electric power support game state. Therefore, in Example EX1_5,
The normal mode is a production mode that is set to the target production mode in the low-probability non-electric support game state and suggests to the player that the current game state is the low-probability non-electric support game state,
Rush mode is a production mode that is set to the target production mode in the high-probability electricity support game state and suggests to the player that the current game state is the high-probability electricity support game state,
The chance mode is set to the target effect mode in the low-probability electric sapo game state or the high-probability electric sapo game state, and the current game state is either the low-probability electric sapo game state or the high-probability electric sapo game state. This is a production mode suggested to the player.

FIG. 29 shows a jackpot effect pattern representing a jackpot effect pattern executed in the jackpot game OU and a mode effect executed after the jackpot game OU, according to the embodiment EX1_5. The jackpot effect patterns include jackpot effect patterns PTN _{B1 to} PTN _B3 . The big hit production patterns PTN _{B1 to} PTN _B3 are the same as those described above. The effect control unit 403 can determine the content of the jackpot effect executed in the jackpot game OU, based on the result of the special figure determination for the special figure determination information JJ and the content of the variable effect HE. This determination is made by selecting one of the jackpot effect patterns PTN _{B1 to} PTN _B3 , and the jackpot effect according to the selected jackpot effect pattern is performed.

Production control unit 403, when the special figure determination information JJ has been selected for the probability variation jackpot, and when the jackpot production pattern PTN _B2 or PTN _B3 is used for jackpot production during execution of the jackpot game OU, the jackpot game OU Immediately after the end, the rush mode is set to the target effect mode, and the rush mode effect E _C3 which is the mode effect in the rush mode is started to be executed (in this case, the chance mode effect E _C1 described later is not executed). ). The rush mode effect E _C3 that has started to be executed can be continuously executed until the next big hit game is started.

The production control unit 403, if the special figure determination information JJ is normally won in the jackpot, and therefore, when the jackpot production pattern PTN _B1 is carried out during the jackpot game OU, the jackpot production OU is ended. Immediately, the chance mode is set to the target effect mode, and the chance mode effect E _C1 which is the mode effect in the chance mode is started. At this time, after the jackpot game OU ends, the gaming state of the gaming machine 100 is a low-probability electric power support gaming state, and the chance mode effect E _C1 that has been started is executed until the next jackpot game is started or the game is played. It can be continuously executed until the game state of the machine 100 shifts to the low-probability non-electric support game state and the target effect mode is set to the normal mode.

Production control unit 403, if the special figure determination information JJ has been won in the probability variation jackpot and when the jackpot production pattern PTN _B1 is carried out during the jackpot game OU, and the jackpot production OU ends, after the jackpot game OU ends, Immediately, the chance mode is set to the target effect mode, and the chance mode effect E _C1 which is the mode effect in the chance mode is started. At this time, after the jackpot game OU ends, the gaming state of the gaming machine 100 is a high-probability electric power support gaming state, and the started chance mode effect E _C1 is continuously executed until a predetermined rush rush time, After the predetermined rush rush effect E _C2 is executed at the rush time, the target effect mode is switched from the chance mode to the rush mode, that is, the mode effect to be executed is changed from the chance mode effect E _C1 to the rush mode effect E _C3 . It is switched and the rush mode effect E _C3 is started to be executed. The rush mode effect E _C3 which has been started can be continuously executed until the next big hit game is started.

  The rush rush time may be any time after the end of the jackpot game OU. For example, the rush rush time is calculated from the end of the jackpot game OU, and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (the number of times the special symbol is stopped and displayed through the variable display of the special symbol, and the number of executions of the special symbol determination) (Matching) may reach a predetermined number of times. This predetermined number of times may be the same as the number of times of electrical support application (that is, 50 times) to the big hit of the communication A or the communication B, or may be smaller or larger than the number of times of electrical support application.

_30A to 30C show examples of the chance mode effect E _C1 , the rush rush effect E _C2 , and the rush mode effect E _C3 . The effects E _{C1 to} E _C3 are effects different from each other, including a right-handing instruction effect that urges the player to right-hand. The effects E _C1 , E _C2 , and E _C3 are, for example, in the image display unit 104, an effect that displays an image including the character “chance mode”, an effect that displays an image that includes the character “rush inrush”, and the character “rush”. An effect including displaying an image including "mode" is included. Since only the game ball hit by right-handing can win the big winning opening 111 and the second starting opening 106, a right-handing instruction effect is performed even during the big hitting game, and at the same time in the electric support game state. Right-handed instruction production is performed.

The chance mode effect E _C1 may be executed regardless of whether the current game state is the low-probability-electricity support game state or the high-probability-electricity support game state, so that the current game state is the low-probability-electricity support game state. It also functions as an effect that suggests that there is a possibility that the current game state is either a low-probability electric sapo game state or a high-probability electric sapo game state.

The rush rush effect E _C2 and the rush mode effect E _C3 are executed only when the current game state is the high-probability electric sapo game state, so it is suggested that the current game state is the high-probability electric sapo game state. Functions as a production. Of these, the rush rush effect E _C2 is an effect that suggests that the mode effect to be executed is switched from the chance mode effect E _C1 to the rush mode effect E _C3 (in other words, the target effect mode is switched from the chance mode to the rush mode. It also functions as a production that suggests that.

Refer to FIGS. 31 (a) and 31 (b). In Example EX1_5, the jackpot effect pattern in the jackpot game OU is selected and determined according to the tables shown in FIGS. 31 (a) and 31 (b). That is,
In the case where the second special jackpot finalizing effect is not executed in the variation effect HE, when the jackpot game OU of the communication A or the communication B is performed based on the result of the special figure determination with respect to the special figure determination information JJ, the probability of 100%. When the big hit production pattern PTN _B1 is selected, and when the big hit game OU of special A or special C is performed based on the result of the special figure determination with respect to the special figure determination information JJ, the probability of 10%, 10%, 80%. When the jackpot effect patterns PTN _B1 , PTN _B2 , and PTN _B3 are selected respectively, and when the jackpot game OU of special B or special D is performed based on the result of the special figure determination with respect to the special figure determination information JJ, 10%, The jackpot effect patterns PTN _B2 and PTN _B3 are selected with a probability of 90%, respectively.
The second special jackpot finalized effect is executed in the variable effect HE only when one of the special jackpots A to D has been won, and the special figure determination information JJ is one of the special jackpots A to D. In the case of winning the jackpot and performing the second special jackpot finalizing effect in the variable effect HE, the jackpot effect pattern PTN _B3 is selected with a probability of 100% for the jackpot game OU.

Then, the effect E _B1 may be executed when the jackpot game being executed is the jackpot game of the communication A, the passage B, and the special A to the special D. Therefore, the jackpot game being executed is normally. It functions as a production that suggests that there is a possibility that it is a jackpot game due to a jackpot and that there is a possibility that it may shift to a low probability electric support game state after a jackpot game, or the jackpot game that is being executed is It suggests that it is a jackpot game with either a regular jackpot or a probability variation jackpot, and also functions as an effect that suggests that the jackpot game goes to either a low-probability electric sapo game state or a high-probability electric sapo game state. Since the effects E _B2 and E _B3 are executed only when the jackpot game of any of special A to D is executed, it is suggested that the jackpot game being executed is a jackpot game due to the probability variation jackpot and the jackpot game. After that, it functions as a production that suggests a transition to a high probability electric support game state. Of these, the effect E _B2 is an effect performed after the effect E _B1 and functions as a so-called probability variation promotion effect.

According to the method shown in FIGS. 29 and 31 (a) and (b), the effect control unit 403 can execute the chance mode effect E _C1 in the low-probability electric support game state after the normal big hit big hit game, There is a case where the chance mode effect E _C1 is executed and then the rush rush effect E _C2 and the rush mode effect E _C3 are executed in the high-probability electric power support game state after the big hit game of the probability variation big hit. However, when the special figure determination information JJ has been won in the probability variation jackpot and the second special jackpot finalization effect has been performed in the variable effect HE, the jackpot effect pattern PTN _B1 is not selected, and therefore the jackpot. After the game OU, it immediately shifts to the rush mode. In other words, in the case where the chance mode effect E _C1 is executed in the high-probability electric power support game state after the big hit game OU by the probability variation big hit, and then the rush rush effect E _C2 and the rush mode effect E _C3 are executed, the big hit game OU In the variation effect HE before, the second special jackpot final effect is not executed (see FIG. 31 (c)).

When the second special jackpot final production that suggests that the odds jackpot is won is performed in the variable rendering HE, at that stage, the player performs the jackpot game with the odds jackpot and the jackpot game. Recognize that it will shift to a high probability electric support game state after that. In such a case, after the jackpot game, if the chance mode effect E _C1 indicating that there is a possibility of a low probability electric support game state is executed, the player may feel a sense of incongruity, and a rush to be executed thereafter. The rush effect E _C2 may be a useless effect (redundant effect) that does not suggest any new information to the player. In addition, there is a possibility that the function of the effect E _C1 (the function of causing anxiety about being in a low-probability game state or the like) may be destroyed. According to the above method, such concerns are eliminated.

However, even when the second special jackpot finalized effect is performed in the variable effect HE, a high-probability electric power sapo game state in which the jackpot effect pattern PTN _B1 (or PTN _B2 ) is rarely selected and the game is transferred after the jackpot game OU. It is also possible to allow the rush entry effect E _C2 and the rush mode effect E _C3 to be executed after the chance mode effect E _C1 is executed (see FIG. 32 (b)). For the sake of convenience, the rush entry effect E _C2 that is executed after executing the chance mode effect E _C1 after the jackpot game OU is referred to as a post-promotion effect.

That is, for example, as shown in FIG. 32 (a), in the case where the special figure determination information JJ wins the big hit of the special A or the special C and the second special big jackpot final effect is executed in the variable effect HE, the big hit game OU is executed. The jackpot effect patterns PTN _B1 , PTN _B2 , and PTN _B3 are selected with a probability of 1%, 1%, and 98%, respectively, and the special figure determination information JJ is won as a special B or special D jackpot. In addition, in the case where the second special jackpot finalization effect is executed in the variable effect HE, the jackpot effect pattern PTN _B3 may be selected with a probability of 100% for the jackpot game OU.

In this case, when the special figure determination information JJ has been won for the probability variation jackpot, the jackpot effect pattern PTN _B1 is selected, and as a result, there is a case in which the posterior promotion effect is executed after the jackpot game OU, When the second special jackpot finalization effect is performed during the variable effect HE, the jackpot effect pattern PTN _B1 is less likely to be selected than when the second special jackpot final effect is not performed during the variable effect HE (FIG. 31 (a)). As a result, it is difficult to execute the post-promotion effect.
From a different point of view, in the case of executing the chance mode effect E _C1 and then the rush rush effect E _C2 and the rush mode effect E _C3 in the high-probability electric power support game state that has passed the jackpot game OU due to the probability variation jackpot, the chance mode is used. _Compared to the case of executing the rush mode effect E _C3 without executing the effect E _C1 and the rush rush effect E _C2 , the second special jackpot final effect is less likely to be executed in the variable effect HE before the jackpot game OU. There is.
It can also be said as follows. When the special figure determination information JJ has been won for the probability variation jackpot, by selecting the jackpot performance pattern PTN _B1 in the state where the second special jackpot finalization effect is executed in the variable effect HE, post-promotion after the jackpot game OU Probability of performing the effect (see FIG. 32 (a)) is a post-promotion effect after the jackpot game OU by selecting the jackpot effect pattern PTN _B1 in a state where the second special jackpot confirmation effect is not executed in the variable effect HE. Is lower than the probability (FIG. 31 (a)).

[Example EX1_6]
Example EX1_6 will be described. The example EX1_6 can be combined with any other example belonging to the first embodiment as long as there is no contradiction. In the example EX1_6, the table for determining the effect mode of the operation corresponding effect X1 is different from that of the example EX1_1 while the example EX1_1 is the basis. Hereinafter, this will be described.

FIG. 33 shows tables TBL _A and TBL _C that are used in the embodiment EX1_6 and are used to determine the presentation mode (contents) of the operation-based presentation X1. In the embodiment EX1_6, the table TBL _A or TBL _C is selectively used according to the gaming state of the gaming machine 100. That is, the table TBL _A is used in the first gaming state, and the table TBL _C is used in the second gaming state different from the first gaming state. Here, it is assumed that the first game state is a low-probability non-electric support game state, and the second game state is a low-probability electric support game state or a high-probability electric support game state.

The table TBL _A is similar to that shown in FIG. 19, and is configured to include tables TBL _{A1 to} TBL _A4 . The production control unit 403, in the first game state (that is, when the special figure determination for the special figure determination information JJ is performed in the first game state), when the special figure determination information JJ is a loss, the table TBL. with _A1, by the use of a table TBL _A2 when special symbol determination information JJ is jackpot through a or through B, and a table TBL _A3 when special symbol determination information JJ is jackpot Special a or JP C When the special drawing determination information JJ is a special B or special D jackpot, the table TBL _A4 is used to determine the effect mode (contents) of the operation effect X1 and the operation effect effect X1 according to the determined effect mode. To execute.

Specifically, the effect control unit 403, in the first game state (that is, when the special figure determination for the special figure determination information JJ is performed in the first game state),
When the special figure determination information JJ is lost, the table TBL _A1 is used to execute the green CI effect and the red CI effect as the operation corresponding effect X1 with a probability of 70% and 30%, respectively.
When the special figure determination information JJ is a jackpot of A or B, the table TBL _A2 is used to operate the green CI effect, the red CI effect, and the rainbow effect with a probability of 15%, 60%, or 25%, respectively. Executed as corresponding effect X1,
When the special drawing determination information JJ is a special A or special C jackpot, the table TBL _A3 is used to operate the green CI effect, the red CI effect, and the rainbow effect with a probability of 15%, 60%, or 25%, respectively. Executed as corresponding effect X1,
When the special figure determination information JJ is a special B or special D jackpot, using the table TBL _A4 , the green CI effect, the red CI effect, the rainbow effect, the upper gimmick effect, and the premier character effect are respectively 15% and 60%. %, 15%, 5%, and 5% with a probability of being executed as the operation corresponding effect X1.

The table TBL _C includes tables TBL _{C1 to} TBL _C4 . The production control unit 403, in the second game state (that is, when the special figure determination for the special figure determination information JJ is performed in the second game state), when the special figure determination information JJ is a loss, the table TBL. _When the special figure determination information JJ is the big hit of the special A or the general B, the table TBL _C2 is used by using _C1. When the special figure determination information JJ is the special A or the special C big hit, the table TBL _C3 is shown. When the special drawing determination information JJ is a special B or special D jackpot, the table TBL _C4 is used to determine the effect mode (contents) of the operation corresponding effect X1 and the operation corresponding effect X1 according to the determined effect mode. To execute.

Specifically, the effect control unit 403, in the second game state (that is, when the special figure determination for the special figure determination information JJ is performed in the second game state),
When the special figure determination information JJ is lost, the table TBL _C1 is used to execute the green CI effect and the red CI effect as the operation corresponding effect X1 with a probability of 70% and 30%, respectively.
When the special drawing determination information JJ is a big hit of A or B, the table TBL _C2 is used to operate the green CI effect, the red CI effect, and the rainbow effect with a probability of 15%, 60%, or 25%, respectively. Executed as corresponding effect X1,
When the special drawing determination information JJ is a special A or special C jackpot, the table TBL _C3 is used, and the green CI effect, the red CI effect, the rainbow effect, the upper gimmick effect, and the premier character effect are respectively 15% and 60%. %, 5%, 10%, 10% with a probability of execution as operation corresponding effect X1,
When the special drawing determination information JJ is a special B or special D jackpot, using the table TBL _C4 , the green CI effect, the red CI effect, the rainbow effect, the upper gimmick effect, and the premier character effect are respectively 15% and 60%. %, 5%, 10%, and 10% with a probability of being executed as the operation corresponding effect X1.

  The effect control unit 403 determines the effect mode of the operation corresponding effect X1 with the above-mentioned probability, using the result of the special figure determination with respect to the special figure determination information JJ, the random number for the effect generated by itself, and the like. In any of the first and second game states, when the special figure determination information JJ is lost, the rainbow effect, the upper gimmick effect or the premier character effect is not executed as the operation corresponding effect X1. In the first game state, when the special figure determination information JJ is a hit of A, B, A or C, the upper gimmick effect or the premier character effect is not executed as the operation corresponding effect X1. In the second game state, when the special figure determination information JJ is a big hit of A or B, the upper gimmick effect or the premier character effect is not executed as the operation corresponding effect X1.

  The rainbow effect, the upper gimmick effect, and the premier character effect are executed only when the determination target TT (here, special figure determination information JJ) is a big hit. Therefore, the rainbow effect, the upper gimmick effect, and the premier character effect belong to the jackpot confirmation effect that suggests that one of the types of jackpots has been won. In other words, the jackpot expectation degree suggested by the jackpot finalization effect is 100%. The suggestion that you have won a jackpot of any type is also a suggestion that you will be in a jackpot game state where a jackpot game of any kind is performed, and a low probability non-electric sapo game state after a jackpot game. It is also a suggestion that a high-probability electric support game state or a low-probability electric support game state that is advantageous to the player is entered.

  In the first game state, among the rainbow effect, the upper gimmick effect and the premier character effect, only the upper gimmick effect and the premier character effect are executed only when the special B or the special D is a big hit. Therefore, in the first gaming state, the upper gimmick effect and the premier character effect belong to the first special jackpot final effect that suggests that the special B or special D jackpot is won. The suggestion that the special B or special D jackpot is won is also a suggestion that the jackpot game state where the special B or special D jackpot game (here, the 10R jackpot game) is performed, and the jackpot game It is also a suggestion that a high probability electric sapo game state, which is more advantageous to the player than a low probability non-electric sapo game state, is obtained.

However, in the second game state, the upper gimmick effect and the premier character effect can be executed not only in the special B or the special D but also in the special A or the special C big hit. When the table TBL _C is used, the upper gimmick effect and the premier character effect are executed only at the time of the probability variation jackpot, so the upper gimmick effect and the premiere character effect in the second game state are won for the probability variation jackpot. Belong to the production that suggests that. The suggestion that you have won the probability variation jackpot is also a suggestion that you will be in the jackpot game state where the jackpot game by the probability variation jackpot is performed, and after the jackpot game, it is a high probability that is more advantageous to the player than the low probability non-electric sapo game state. It is also a suggestion that it will be in a stochastic electric power support game state.

In each of the first and second game states, the green CI effect and the red CI effect are executed both when it is a big hit and when it is lost, so it does not belong to the big hit finalized effect. Both the green CI effect and the red CI effect suggest a jackpot expectation degree for the determination target TT, but the jackpot expectation degree suggested by them is less than 100%. As can be understood from the above-described expectation degree calculation formula and the tables TBL _A and TBL _C , it is suggested that the red CI effect has a higher expectation degree for any kind of jackpot than the green CI effect.

In the jackpot game state, a jackpot game state of 4R by a jackpot of A, B, special A or special C and a jackpot game of 10R by a jackpot of special B or D which is more advantageous to the player. There is a state. Based on the result of the special figure determination, the effect control unit 403 may execute the jackpot confirmation effect in the variable effect HE before the jackpot gaming state. In the first gaming state, since the table TBL _A is used, when a special B or special D big hit, an upper gimmick effect or a premier character effect may be executed among a plurality of types of jackpot final effects. Then, in the case of a jackpot of the communication A, communication B, special A or special C, the upper gimmick effect or the premier character effect is not executed. By making such an upper gimmick effect or premier character effect executable, in the first game state, the player strongly desires the occurrence of the upper gimmick effect or the premier character effect, and the upper gimmick effect or the premier character effect. It is possible to obtain a great joy and a sense of security (a sense of security that a jackpot game for 10R is played) when the effect is generated.

On the other hand, in the second game state, since the table TBL _C is used, there is a case where any of the upper gimmick effect or Premier character presentation even if the jackpot JP A~ JP D is executed. The second gaming state is a gaming state that shifts when a jackpot occurs in the first gaming state (low-probability non-electricity support gaming state), so the jackpot that occurs in the second gaming state is a so-called Renso jackpot. is there. The Renso jackpot is very pleasing to the player, so if you make a premiere character production etc. that appears only under very limited conditions in the first gaming state appear at the Renjo jackpot, you will feel Is expected to be very exciting. Therefore, in the second game state, the condition for allowing the appearance of the premier character effect is relaxed to allow the premier character effect to appear even when the jackpot of 4R is achieved. As a result, it is expected that the joy of the Renso jackpot and the joy of frequently appearing in the premier character production, which is rarely seen in the first game state, will be combined, and it will be easier for the player to feel great fun in the game.

Also, it can be considered as follows.
In the first gaming state, the effect control unit 403 uses the table TBL _A2 or TBL _A3 under the condition that the special-drawing determination information JJ is a big hit for the communication A, communication B, special A, or special C. Under the condition that the jackpot finalizing effect to be executed can be determined from among a plurality of types of jackpot finalizing effects, and the special figure determination information JJ is a special B or special D jackpot, the table is Under the determination condition of TBL _A4, it is possible to determine the jackpot finalizing effect to be executed, out of a plurality of types of jackpot finalizing effects.
In the first game state, the determination condition by the table TBL _A2 or TBL _{A3 cannot} determine the upper gimmick production or the premier character production, while the determination condition by the table TBL _A4 can determine the upper gimmick production or the premier character production. Is.
In the first gaming state, the effect control unit 403 executes in a determination condition by the table TBL _A2 or TBL _A3 when the jackpot gaming state of 4R due to the jackpot of the communication A, the communication B, the special A or the special C is reached. It is possible to determine the jackpot confirmation effect to be performed, and in the case of a jackpot gaming state for 10R due to the jackpot of the special B or the special D, the jackpot confirmation effect to be executed can be determined under the determination condition according to the table TBL _A4 .

On the other hand, in the second gaming state, the effect control unit 403, under the condition that the special figure determination information JJ has won the communication A or communication B, determines a plurality of types of jackpots by the determination condition based on the table TBL _C2. Under the condition that the jackpot finalizing effect to be executed can be determined and the special figure determination information JJ has won any of the special jackpots A to D, the table TBL _C3 or TBL _C4 is used. It is possible to determine the jackpot finalizing effect to be executed from among the plurality of types of jackpot finalizing effects under the determination condition.
In the second game state, it is impossible to determine the upper gimmick effect or the premier character effect under the determination condition by the table TBL _C2 , while it is possible to determine the upper gimmick effect or the premier character effect under the determination condition by the table TBL _C3 or TBL _C4. Is.
In the second gaming state, the effect control unit 403 can determine the jackpot finalizing effect to be executed under the determination condition according to the table TBL _C2 when it is determined that the jackpot game with the jackpot A or the jackpot B is performed. When it is determined that the special jackpot or special jackpot jackpot game is to be played, the jackpot jackpot game to be executed can be determined by the determination condition according to the table TBL _C3 , and the jackpot jackpot game of the jackpot special jackpot or the jackpot jackpot D. When it is determined to perform, the jackpot finalizing effect to be executed can be determined under the determination condition based on the table TBL _C4 .

Further, when the special B or special D in the first gaming state is a big hit, the appearance rate of the upper gimmick effect and the appearance rate of the premier character effect may be different from each other. That is, for example, when it is determined that the special image determination information JJ is a special B or special D jackpot in the first gaming state, a green CI effect, a red CI effect, a rainbow effect, an upper gimmick effect, and a premier character effect are obtained. , The table TBL _A4 may be modified so as to be executed as the operation corresponding effect X1 with a probability of 15%, 60%, 15%, 8%, 2%, respectively.
Similarly, for example, when it is determined that the special image determination information JJ is a big hit of the special A or the special C in the second game state, a green CI effect, a red CI effect, a rainbow effect, an upper gimmick effect, a premier character effect. However, the table TBL _C3 may be modified so as to be executed as the operation corresponding effect X1 with a probability of 15%, 60%, 15%, 8%, 2%, respectively, instead of or in addition to this, When it is determined that the special image determination information JJ has won the special B or special D jackpot in the second gaming state, the green CI effect, the red CI effect, the rainbow effect, the upper gimmick effect, and the premier character effect are respectively generated. The table TBL _C4 may be modified so as to be executed as the operation corresponding effect X1 with a probability of 15%, 60%, 15%, 2%, 8%. According to this, in the second game state, when the premiere character effect is executed, it is more likely that the special B or special D jackpot is won than when the upper gimmick effect is executed. The player is more likely to want the appearance of the premier character production than the upper gimmick production, and when the appearance of the premier character production is obtained, greater pleasure can be obtained.

Further, in the first gaming state, if the special figure determination information JJ is a big hit of any of special A to special D, the upper gimmick effect may be executed as the operation corresponding effect X1, In addition, the table TBL _A is modified so that the premiere character effect may be executed as the operation corresponding effect X1 only when the special figure determination information JJ is won in the special B or special D jackpot. Is also good.
Instead of this or in addition to this, in the second game state, when the special figure determination information JJ has won any of the special jackpots A to D, the upper gimmick effect is executed as the operation corresponding effect X1. As described above, the premiere character effect may be executed as the operation corresponding effect X1 only when the special figure determination information JJ is won in the special B or the special D. it may be modified table TBL _C.

Further, in the second game state, if the special figure determination information JJ is a big hit of special C or special D based on the game ball entering the second starting opening 106, the upper gimmick as the operation corresponding effect X1. Operation so that the production or the premier character production can be executed, and when the special figure determination information JJ is a special A or special B jackpot based on the game ball entering the first starting opening 105 as never upper gimmick effect or premium character presentation is performed as the corresponding effect X1, it may be modified table TBL _C.

Further, in the second game state, even when the special figure determination information JJ is a big hit of the communication A or communication B, the upper gimmick effect or the premier character effect can be executed as the operation corresponding effect X1, it may be modified the table TBL _C.

Basically, in the first game state, a game is played by left-handing in which the game ball can enter only the first starting port 105 among the first starting port 105 and the second starting port 106, and the second game. In the state, the game is played by hitting the right side so that the game ball can enter only the second starting port 106 among the first starting port 105 and the second starting port 106. For this reason, in the first gaming state, the presence of the big hits of the special B, the special C, and the special D is ignored, and only the big hit of the special A, the special A, or the special B is focused on, and the operation corresponding effect X1 by the table TBL _A The determination method may be applied, and in the second game state, the presence of the jackpots of A, B, and B is ignored, and only the B, B, or D jackpot is paid attention to, and the table TBL _C The method of deciding the operation corresponding effect X1 may be applied.

[Example EX1_7]
Example EX1_7 will be described. In the embodiment EX1_7, some modifications of the above-described embodiments will be described. The matters described in the first embodiment including the example EX1_7 can be applied to other embodiments described later as long as there is no contradiction.

The operation effect including the operation corresponding effect X1 is either a button effect or a lever effect.
In each of the above-described embodiments, when the jackpot finalized effect (rainbow effect, upper gimmick effect or premier character effect) is executed as the operation corresponding effect X1, the big hit finalized effect (rainbow effect, upper gimmick effect is generated as the operation corresponding effect X1. Or, in order to make it easier to execute the lever effect as the operation effect including the operation corresponding effect X1 (in other words, to make it difficult to execute the button effect) than in the case where the premier character effect is not executed, the operation corresponding effect X1 You may decide the mode of the operation effect including.
Similar to this, in each of the above-described embodiments, when the upper gimmick effect or the premier character effect is executed as the operation corresponding effect X1, the upper gimmick effect or the premier character effect is not executed as the operation corresponding effect X1. Also, the mode of the operation effect including the operation corresponding effect X1 is determined so that the lever effect is easily executed as the operation effect including the operation corresponding effect X1 (conversely, it is difficult to execute the button effect). Is also good.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, any one of the green CI effect, the red CI effect, the rainbow effect, the upper gimmick effect and the premier character effect is executed as the effect X1, and the effect X1 is the reach effect execution period in the variable effect HE. Although it is assumed that it is the operation corresponding effect executed during (see FIG. 18), the effect X1 may be the operation corresponding effect executed at the timing when the reach effect is not executed in the variable effect HE. The effect may be executed at a predetermined timing during the variable effect HE regardless of whether or not an operation is input to the operation means (effect button 121 or effect lever 127).

When the rainbow effect is executed as the effect X1 in one variation effect HE based on the result of the special figure determination for the special figure determination information JJ, the rainbow effect is performed only once in the one variation effect HE. While there are times when it is executed and when it is executed a plurality of times, the first or second special jackpot finalized effect (hence the upper gimmick effect or the premier character effect; see FIGS. 19 and 24) is produced in one variable effect HE. When executed as X1, the first or second special jackpot finalized effect is always executed only once in the one variable effect HE. That is, for example, when paying attention to the premier character effect as the first or second special jackpot finalizing effect, it is preferable that the premier character effect is not executed a plurality of times in one variable effect HE. As a result, the rarity of the premier character production and the like increases, and a great joy can be given to the player when the premier character production or the like appears.
Alternatively, when the first or second special jackpot finalization effect is executed as the effect X1 in one variation effect HE, the first or second special jackpot finalization effect is executed multiple times in the one variation effect HE. However, it is preferable that the first or second special jackpot finalizing effect (especially, for example, a premier character effect) is less likely to be executed a plurality of times in the variable effect HE than the rainbow effect.
More specifically, for example, when the rainbow effect is executed as the effect X1 in one variable effect HE, the rainbow effect is executed only once in the one variable effect HE by using an effect random number or the like. The probability is 70% and the probability that the rainbow effect is executed twice is 30%, and the first or second special jackpot finalized effect (especially, for example, the premiere character effect) is produced in one variation effect HE. When executed as X1, there is a 99% probability that the first or second special jackpot finalized effect (especially, for example, a premier character effect) is executed only once in the one fluctuating effect HE, and the first or second special jackpot. It is advisable to set the probability of executing the finalized effect (especially, for example, the premier character effect) twice to be 1%.

  When the rainbow effect is executed multiple times in one variation effect HE, there may be some differences in the specific effect contents of the multiple rainbow effects, and the multiple rainbow effects are different in the specific effect contents. May be the same as each other. Similarly, when the upper gimmick effect is executed multiple times in one variation effect HE, there may be some difference in the specific effect contents of the upper gimmick effect multiple times, or the upper gimmick effect multiple times. May be the same as each other in terms of concrete content. Similarly, when the premier character effect is executed multiple times in one variation effect HE, there may be some difference in the concrete effect contents of the premier character effect plural times, or the premier character effect plural times. May be the same as each other in terms of concrete content.

  As described above, the premier character effect is an effect of displaying a premier character image showing a predetermined premier character on the image display unit 104, but there may be a plurality of concrete effect contents in the premier character effect. That is, for example, referring to FIGS. 34A and 34B, the premier character effect is the first premier character effect in which the premier character image 1410 indicating a predetermined premier character is displayed on the image display unit 104, or the premier character effect. It may be the second premiere character effect in which the other premier character image 1410a indicating the is displayed on the image display unit 104. The premier character image 1410a may be, for example, a reduced image of the premier character image 1410. When it is determined to execute the premier character effect, one of the first and second premier character effects can be selectively executed by lottery using a random number for effect. Alternatively, for example, the first premier character effect may be performed as the premier character effect in the first game state and the second premier character effect may be performed as the premier character effect in the second game state. It can be said that the first premier character production and the second premiere character production are jackpot finalization productions of special production modes.

As the number of rounds in the jackpot game is more advantageous to the player, according to the example of FIG. 7, the jackpot game of special B is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot game of special A, and the jackpot of special D. The game is more advantageous to the player than the special C big hit game, and there is no difference in the degree of advantage between the special A big hit game and the special C big hit game, and the special B big hit game and the special D big hit. There is no difference in the degree of advantage with the game.
However, the difference in the degree of advantage or the sameness between the special jackpot games of special A to special D are not limited to those described above, and can be arbitrarily changed.
For example, the number of rounds forming the jackpot game of special A, special B, special C, and special D may be 10, 16, 4, and 8. In this case, the special A jackpot game has a greater advantage than the special C and D jackpot games in that the number of rounds is larger.
Alternatively, for example, the number of rounds constituting the jackpot game of special A, special B, special C, and special D may be 10, 16, 4, and 10. In this case, the special A jackpot game has a large advantage degree in that the number of rounds is larger than the special C jackpot game, and the advantage degree is common in that the special D jackpot game has the same number of rounds.
Furthermore or alternatively, for example, it is possible to set the number of rounds constituting the jackpot game of special A, special B, special C, and special D to 4, 16, 8, and 16.

<< Second Embodiment >>
A second embodiment of the gaming machine 100 will be described. The gaming machine 100 according to the above contents is a so-called loop machine, but the gaming machine 100 may be configured as a so-called V loop machine. An embodiment in which the gaming machine 100 is configured as a V loop machine will be described as a second embodiment.

  35A to 35C are schematic diagrams showing the internal structure of the special winning opening 111 according to the second embodiment. 35A to 35C, the up-down direction corresponds to the up-down direction in FIG. 1, and the right-left direction corresponds to the front-back direction in FIG. That is, it can be said that FIGS. 35A to 35C are diagrams showing the internal structure of the special winning opening 111 when the gaming machine 100 is viewed from the left side. The internal area of the special winning opening 111 is an area into which the game ball can enter when the special winning opening 111 is open. When the special winning opening 111 is in the closed state, it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the internal area of the special winning opening 111 than when the special winning opening 111 is in the open state. Substantially, when the special winning opening 111 is closed, it is impossible for a game ball to enter the internal area of the special winning opening 111, and only when the special winning opening 111 is open The game ball can enter the inner area of the mouth 111. In FIGS. 35 (a) to 35 (c), the flow of the game ball is represented by a broken line circle and a broken line segment and broken line.

  In FIG. 35 (a), the special winning opening 111 is in a closed state, and in FIGS. 35 (b) and 35 (c), the special winning opening 111 is in an open state. In the internal area of the special winning opening 111, a V area 141, a non-V area 142, a guide member 143 for guiding the game ball entering the internal area of the special winning opening 111 to the V area 141 or the non-V area 142, and A distribution member 144 for distributing whether or not to enter the game balls that have entered the internal area of the special winning opening 111 into the V area 141 is provided. The game ball entering the V area 141 is synonymous with the game ball passing through the V area 141. In addition, in FIG. 35 (a) to (c), the game ball that has entered the internal area of the special winning opening 111 moves in the front-rear direction (front-rear direction when viewed from the player) to become the V area 141 or the non-V area 142. Although it is supposed to go, a configuration may be adopted in which the game ball that has entered the internal area of the special winning opening 111 moves leftward and rightward toward the V area 141 or the non-V area 142.

  The distribution member 144 is provided in the vicinity of the V region 141, and the V region 141 is a region that is opened only when the distribution member 144 is operating. The distribution member 144 has a closed state (state shown in FIG. 35B) that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the V area 141, and an open state that makes it easier to enter the game ball into the V area 141 than in the closed state. One of the states (state shown in FIG. 35C) is taken. Substantially, when the distribution member 144 is in the closed state, the ball cannot enter the V area 141 of the game ball, and only when the distribution member 144 is in the opened state, the V area of the game ball It becomes possible to enter into 141. The opening of the distribution member 144 is also referred to as opening of the distribution member 144 or opening of the V region 141.

  When the game ball that has entered the internal area of the special winning opening 111 does not enter the V area 141, the game ball is guided to the non-V area 142. Therefore, when the distribution member 144 is in the closed state, the game ball is guided to the non-V area 142 without entering the V area 141. The non-V area 142 is an area that is always open, and the game ball guided to the non-V area 142 enters the non-V area 142. Although details will be described later, the V area 141 functions as a probability variation function operation switch, and when a game ball enters the V area 141, the gaming state of the gaming machine 100 thereafter is controlled to a high probability gaming state.

  FIG. 36 is a diagram showing types of jackpots according to the second embodiment. In the second embodiment as well, similar to the basic embodiment and the first embodiment (see FIG. 7), there are general A, general B, and special A to special D as types of jackpot. However, the number of rounds of the special A, the general B, the special A and the special C is 5, and the number of rounds of the special B and the special D is 10. In addition, "R" in the jackpot indicates a round.

  In the special symbol hit determination for the first special symbol (in the special symbol hit determination based on the establishment of the first starting condition), when the jackpot is won, the proportions of the jackpot being the common A, the special A, and the special B are respectively. , 50%, 45%, 5%. In the special symbol hit determination for the second special symbol (in the special symbol hit determination based on the establishment of the second starting condition), when the jackpot is won, the ratio of the jackpot to be the B, the C, and the D. They are 35%, 30%, and 35%, respectively. The special symbol determination table TZt is formed so that the types of jackpots for the first and second special symbols are determined by the above-mentioned ratio.

  As a prescribed maximum opening time which is the maximum opening time of the special winning opening 111 in each round game, a predetermined short opening time (for example, 0.2 seconds) and a predetermined long opening time (for example, 30 seconds) longer than the short opening time. There is. Of the five rounds that make up the jackpot game of each of A and B, the specified maximum opening time in a particular round is the short opening time, and the specified maximum opening time in the other four rounds is the long opening time. Is. The specified maximum opening times in the five rounds that constitute the jackpot game of each of the special A and the special C are long opening times. In a round game in which the short open time is the specified maximum open time, it is practically difficult to enter a game ball into the special winning opening 111 (at most one even if there is a ball). It can be said that the number of rounds of each jackpot game is substantially “4”. The specified maximum opening times of the 10 round games that constitute the jackpot games of each of the special B and the special D are all long open times. In addition, the jackpot by A or B can be called 4RV short jackpot, the jackpot by special A or C can be called 5RV long jackpot, and the jackpot by B or D can be called 10RV long jackpot. You can

  The jackpot game including many round games in which the long opening time is the specified maximum opening time is more advantageous to the player, because the number of prize balls that can be obtained by winning in the special winning opening 111 in the jackpot game is larger. Therefore, the special A jackpot game is more advantageous than the regular A jackpot game, and the special B jackpot game is more advantageous than the special A jackpot game. Similarly, the jackpot game of special C is more advantageous than the jackpot game of B, and the jackpot game of Toku D is more advantageous than the jackpot game of Toku C. Further, as will be apparent from the description below, after a jackpot game of any one of special A ~ special D is basically in a high probability game state, after the jackpot game of communication A or communication B is basically a low probability game Since the state is set, it can be said that the jackpot games of special A to special D are more advantageous than the jackpot games of regular A and regular B in terms of easiness of winning the jackpot after the jackpot game.

  The fact that the game ball enters the V area 141 during the jackpot game (in other words, the game ball passes through the V area 141) is referred to as "V winning". V jackpot is easy in each jackpot game of special A ~ D, whereas V jackpot is difficult in jackpot game of each of A and B (that is, the former jackpot game and the latter one). In comparison with the jackpot game, the former jackpot game is easier to win V than the latter jackpot game, and the latter jackpot game is more difficult to win V than the former jackpot game).

  Since it is a well-known technique, a detailed description thereof will be omitted, but a method of realizing easy / difficulty of V winning will be briefly described. The main control unit 401 opens and closes the distribution member 144 according to a predetermined distribution member opening pattern only in a specific round (for example, the third round) in an arbitrary jackpot game, and closes the distribution member 144 at other timings. Keep in the state. In each specific jackpot game of special A ~ special D, the specified maximum opening time is a long opening time, and if you continue right-handing during the big hit game, it will be distributed so that V winning will easily occur. The member release pattern is set. On the other hand, since the specified maximum opening time is the short opening time in the specific round in each of the jackpot games of communication A and communication B, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the special winning opening 111 in the specific round. Even if the ball is played, the distribution member 144 is switched from the open state to the closed state before the game ball passes over the guide member 143 and reaches the distribution member 144 (that is, V winning is not generated), The length and the like of the guide member 143 are defined.

  When there is a V winning during a jackpot game of any type, after the jackpot game is over, the main CPU 411 sets the gaming state of the gaming machine 100 to a high-probability gaming state, and then the next jackpot (that is, immediately before). When the number of times the special symbol fluctuates (that is, the number of times the special symbol fluctuates and stops through the variable display) does not occur, the next big jackpot as seen from the jackpot that occurred in The gaming state is set to the low-probability gaming state. When there is no V winning during the jackpot game, after the jackpot game is over, the main CPU 411 sets the gaming state of the gaming machine 100 to the low-probability gaming state. The significance of the number of times of giving a high probability is as described above.

  The numbers of high-probability imparted to the jackpots of special A to special D, communication A, and communication B are all 10,000. Therefore, after the end of each special jackpot game of special A ~ special D, communication A and communication B including the occurrence of V winning, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 10,000 times without other big hits (in other words For example, if the special map determination is performed 10,000 times), the gaming state of the gaming machine 100 is changed from the high-probability gaming state to the low-probability gaming state. However, the gaming machine 100 is configured such that it is practically impossible to generate the V winning in each of the big hit games of the communication A and the communication B.

  Further, regardless of whether or not there is a V winning during the jackpot game, after the jackpot game is over, the main CPU 411 sets the gaming state of the gaming machine 100 to the electric support gaming state, and then the next jackpot (that is, immediately before). When the number of times the special symbol fluctuates (that is, the number of times that the special symbol fluctuates and stops via the variable display) does not occur, the next big jackpot as seen from the jackpot that has occurred is equal to or greater than the number of electric support provisions, the game of the gaming machine 100. Set the state to the non-electric support game state. The significance of the number of power support applications is as described above.

The number of times electric support is applied to the jackpots of special A to special D is 10,000 times. Therefore, after the jackpot game of any one of special A ~ special D, when the number of times the special symbol changes reaches 10,000 times without causing another big hit (in other words, if the special figure determination is performed 10,000 times) ), The game state of the gaming machine 100 is changed from the electric support game state to the non-electric support game state.
The number of times electric power is applied to the jackpots of the communication A and the communication B is 50 times. Therefore, after the big hit game of communication A or communication B ends, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 50 times (in other words, when the special figure determination is performed 50 times), no other big hit occurs. The game state of the machine 100 is changed from the electric support game state to the non-electric support game state.

  Therefore, the changes in the game state triggered by the occurrence of the jackpot are summarized as follows.

In each of the special A to special D jackpot games, it is easy to win the V prize, and if the right hit is continued during the jackpot game, the V prize is usually generated.
After the jackpot game of any one of special A to special D including the occurrence of the V winning is finished, the main CPU 411 sets the gaming state of the gaming machine 100 to the high-probability electric support game state, and then, the next big jackpot (that is, When the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is equal to or higher than the number of times of providing a high probability and the number of times of applying electric support (that is, reaches 10000 times) without the occurrence of the next jackpot as seen from the jackpot that has occurred immediately before, the gaming machine 100 Set the gaming state to the low probability non-electric support game state.
If there is no V winning during the jackpot game of special A to special D, after the jackpot game is over, the main CPU 411 sets the gaming state of the gaming machine 100 to the low-probability electric support game state, After that, when the next big hit (that is, the next big hit seen from the last big hit) does not occur, and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol becomes equal to or more than the number of electric support grants (that is, reaches 10,000 times), the gaming machine. Set 100 gaming states to a low probability non-electric support game state.

In each of the jackpot games A and B, it is difficult and practically impossible to win the V prize.
After finishing the jackpot game of A or B which does not include the occurrence of V winning, the main CPU 411 sets the gaming state of the gaming machine 100 to the low-probability electric support game state, and then the next jackpot (that is, immediately before. Next jackpot from the generated jackpot) does not occur, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is equal to or more than the number of electric support provided (ie, reaches 50 times), the gaming state of the gaming machine 100 is a low probability non-electric support Set the game state.
If a V winning occurs during the jackpot game of the communication A or the communication B, the main CPU 411 sets the gaming state of the gaming machine 100 to the high-probability electric support gaming state after the termination of the jackpot game, and then the next time. No jackpot (that is, the next jackpot seen from the jackpot that occurred immediately before) occurs, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol becomes equal to or greater than the number of electric support grants (that is, reaches 50 times), the gaming state of the gaming machine 100 Is set to a high-probability non-electric power support game state, and after the big hit game is over, when the next big hit does not occur, the number of times the special symbol changes is equal to or higher than the high probability grant count and equal to or more than the power assist grant count (that is, 10000). When the number of times is reached), the gaming state of the gaming machine 100 is set to the low-probability non-electric power support gaming state.

  In order to realize the setting of these game states, in the game state setting process associated with the jackpot of any of special A to special D, if there is a V winning during the big hit game, a high-probability game flag and an electric support game flag Are both ON, and both the high-probability game remaining number X and the electric support game remaining number J are set to "10000", and if there is no V winning during the jackpot game, the high-probability game flag is turned off. The high-probability game remaining number X is set to "0" and the electric support game flag is turned ON, and the electric support game remaining number J is set to "10000". In the game state setting process associated with the big hit of communication A or communication B, if there is a V winning during the big hit game, both the high-probability game flag and the electric support game flag are turned ON, and the high-probability game remaining number X and electric If the support game remaining number J is set to "10000" and "50", respectively, and if there is no V prize during the jackpot game, the high-probability game flag is set to OFF and the high-probability game remaining number X is "0". Is set and the electric support game flag is turned ON, and the electric support game remaining number J is set to "50".

  As described above, the high-probability game remaining number X set in the game state setting process is subtracted by "1" every time the special figure determination is executed once when "X ≧ 1", When X = 0 ", the high-probability game flag is set to OFF and the gaming state of the gaming machine 100 becomes the low-probability gaming state. When the special support game remaining number J set in the game state setting process is "J ≧ 1", "1" is subtracted each time the special figure determination is executed, and "J = 0" is obtained. The electric support game flag is set to OFF, and the game state of the gaming machine 100 becomes the non-electric support game state.

  Ignoring the situation where the V prize is generated in the jackpot game of A and B and the situation that the V prize is not generated in the jackpot game of special A to special D, the operation of the flowchart of FIG. The same applies to the form, and all the matters described in the first embodiment also apply to the second embodiment as long as there is no contradiction. The jackpots of the communication A and the communication B can be considered to belong to the ordinary jackpot, and the jackpots of the special A to the special D can be considered to belong to the probability variation jackpot.

<< Third Embodiment >>
A third embodiment of the gaming machine 100 will be described. The gaming machine 100 may be configured as a so-called VST machine. An embodiment in which the gaming machine 100 is configured as a VST machine will be described as a third embodiment. When the gaming machine 100 is configured as a VST machine, the following modifications may be made based on the second embodiment. With respect to matters not particularly mentioned in the third embodiment, the description of the second embodiment is also applied to the third embodiment as long as there is no contradiction.

  FIG. 37 is a diagram showing types of jackpots according to the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, the types of jackpots include the communication A and the special B to the special D, and the communication B and the special A do not exist.

  In the special symbol hit determination for the first special symbol (in the special symbol hit determination based on the establishment of the first starting condition), when the jackpot is won, the proportion of the jackpot being the common A and the special B is 50%, respectively. , 50%. In the special symbol hit determination for the second special symbol (in the special symbol hit determination based on the establishment of the second starting condition), when the jackpot is won, the ratio of the jackpot to the special C and the special D is 50, respectively. % And 50%. The special symbol determination table TZt is formed so that the types of jackpots for the first and second special symbols are determined by the above-mentioned ratio.

  In the third embodiment, the number of rounds in the special B jackpot game is 5, and the specified maximum opening times in the five rounds that make up the special B jackpot game are all long opening times. The number of rounds in each jackpot game of special A, special C and special D and the opening mode of the special winning opening 111 are as described in the second embodiment, and the opening pattern of the distributing member 144 (the distributing member opening pattern) is also included. This is as described in the second embodiment. Therefore, in the third embodiment, the jackpot according to the communication A can be referred to as a 4RV short jackpot, the jackpot according to the B or C can be referred to as a 5RV long jackpot, and the jackpot according to the D to be a 10RV long jackpot. You can As described in the second embodiment, the V jackpot is easy in the jackpot game of each of the special B to the D, while the V jackpot is difficult in the jackpot game of the through A (that is, the former). Comparing the big hit game of and the big hit game of the latter, the former big hit game is easier to win V than the latter big hit game, and the latter big hit game is more difficult to win V than the former big hit game Is).

  The number of high-probability imparted to the jackpots of the communication A and the special B to the special D is 50 times. Therefore, after the end of each big jackpot game of special A and special B ~ special D including the occurrence of V winning, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 50 times (in other words, special figure When the determination is made 50 times), the gaming state of the gaming machine 100 is caused to shift from the high-probability gaming state to the low-probability gaming state. However, the gaming machine 100 is configured such that it is practically impossible to generate a V prize in the jackpot game of the general A.

  Further, regardless of whether or not there is a V winning during the jackpot game, after the jackpot game is over, the main CPU 411 sets the gaming state of the gaming machine 100 to the electric support gaming state, and then the next jackpot (that is, immediately before). When the number of times the special symbol fluctuates (that is, the number of times that the special symbol fluctuates and stops via the variable display) does not occur, the next big jackpot as seen from the jackpot that has occurred is equal to or greater than the number of electric support provisions, the game of the gaming machine 100. Set the state to the non-electric support game state. The significance of the number of power support applications is as described above.

The number of times electric support is applied to the jackpots of special B to special D is 50 times. Therefore, after the jackpot game of any one of special B ~ special D, when the number of times the special symbol changes reaches 50 times without causing another big hit (in other words, if the special figure determination is performed 50 times ), The game state of the gaming machine 100 is changed from the electric support game state to the non-electric support game state.
The number of times power support is applied to the jackpot of the communication A is 50 times. Therefore, after the end of the big hit game of the communication A, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 50 times (in other words, the special figure determination is performed 50 times) without the occurrence of other big hits, the gaming machine 100 The game state is changed from the electric support game state to the non-electric support game state.

  Therefore, the changes in the game state triggered by the occurrence of the jackpot are summarized as follows.

In each of the special B to special D jackpot games, it is easy to win the V prize, and if the right hit is continued during the jackpot game, the V prize is usually generated.
After the jackpot game of any one of special B to special D including the occurrence of the V winning, the main CPU 411 sets the gaming state of the gaming machine 100 to the high-probability electric support game state, and then, the next big jackpot (that is, When the number of changes in the special symbol is equal to or higher than the number of times of giving a high probability and the number of times of giving an electric power support (that is, 50 times) without the occurrence of the next jackpot as seen from the jackpot that occurred immediately before (that is, when reaching 50 times), Set the gaming state to the low probability non-electric support game state.
If there is no V winning during the special jackpot game of special B to special D, the main CPU 411 sets the gaming state of the gaming machine 100 to the low-probability electric support game state after the jackpot game ends. After that, when the next big hit (that is, the next big hit seen from the last big hit) does not occur and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol becomes equal to or more than the number of electric support grants (that is, reaches 50 times), the gaming machine. Set 100 gaming states to a low probability non-electric support game state.

It is difficult and practically impossible to win the V prize in the jackpot game of commuter A.
After the end of the jackpot game of the passing A that does not include the occurrence of V winning, the main CPU 411 sets the gaming state of the gaming machine 100 to the low-probability electric support game state, and then the next jackpot (that is, the jackpot that occurred immediately before). The next big hit) does not occur, and when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol becomes equal to or greater than the number of electric support provisions (that is, reaches 50 times), the gaming state of the gaming machine 100 is changed to the low-probability non-electric support game state. Set.
If a V winning occurs during the jackpot game of Tsuru A, the main CPU 411 sets the gaming state of the gaming machine 100 to the high-probability electric power support gaming state after the jackpot game is over, and then the next jackpot ( That is, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is equal to or higher than the number of times of giving a high probability and the number of times of giving an electric power support (that is, 50 times) without the occurrence of the next big jackpot from the jackpot that occurred immediately before, that is, the gaming machine. Set 100 gaming states to a low probability non-electric support game state.

  In order to realize the setting of these gaming states, in the gaming state setting process associated with the jackpot of special B to special D, if there is a V winning during the jackpot game, the high-probability gaming flag and the electric support gaming flag. Are both ON, and both the high-probability game remaining number X and the electric support game remaining number J are set to "50", and if there is no V winning during the jackpot game, the high-probability game flag is turned off. The high-probability game remaining number X is set to "0" and the electric support game flag is turned ON, and the electric support game remaining number J is set to "50". In the game state setting process associated with the jackpot A of the communication A, if there is a V winning during the jackpot game, both the high-probability game flag and the electric support game flag are turned ON, and the high-probability game remaining number X and the electric support game remaining. If both the number of times J is set to "50" and there is no V winning during the big hit game, the high-probability game flag is set to OFF and the high-probability game remaining number X is set to "0" and the electric support game. The flag is set to ON and "50" is set to the electric support game remaining number J.

  If the situation in which the V prize is generated in the jackpot game of commuting A and the situation in which the V prize is not generated in the jackpot game of special B to special D is ignored, the operation of the flowchart of FIG. 8 is the same in the third embodiment. (However, in step S128, 50 is set for each of the numbers X and J), and the matters described in the first embodiment are all applied to the third embodiment as long as there is no contradiction. , Special A and communication B are ignored in the third embodiment). It can be considered that the jackpot of the communication A usually belongs to the jackpot, and the jackpots of the special B to the special D belong to the probability variation jackpot.

  In particular, if the method shown in Example EX1_6 is applied to the third embodiment, the following operation can be realized and the following operational effects can be expected.

The jackpot gaming state is a jackpot gaming state due to a jackpot of A, a jackpot gaming state due to a jackpot of special B or a bonus C that is more advantageous to the player than that, and a jackpot of bonus D that is more advantageous to the player than those. There is a jackpot gaming state by. Based on the result of the special figure determination, the effect control unit 403 may execute the jackpot confirmation effect in the variable effect HE before the jackpot gaming state. In the first gaming state, since the table TBL _{A of} FIG. 33 is used, there is a case where the upper gimmick effect or the premier character effect is executed out of a plurality of types of jackpot final effects when the special B is hit. Then, in the case of the big hit of the communication A, the upper gimmick effect or the premier character effect is not executed. By making such an upper gimmick effect or premier character effect executable, in the first game state, the player strongly desires the occurrence of the upper gimmick effect or the premier character effect, and the upper gimmick effect or the premier character effect. When the effect is produced, it is possible to obtain a great joy and a sense of security (a sense of security that a jackpot game in which V winning is easy is performed).

On the other hand, in the second game state, the table TBL _{C of} FIG. 33 is used, and in the case of either special C or special D that is expected to occur in the second game state, the upper gimmick effect or the premier character effect. Is sometimes executed. In the gaming machine 100 formed as a VST machine, the jackpot generated in the second gaming state is basically a jackpot of special C or special D based on a game ball entering the second starting opening 106, and a special C or special jackpot. When the jackpot game of D is performed, the gaming state after the jackpot game is substantially set to the high-probability electric power support gaming state. Therefore, in the second gaming state in the gaming machine 100 formed as a VST machine, regardless of the number of rounds to be awarded, the jackpot is unconditionally pleasing to the player. Therefore, in the second game state, whether the jackpot game to be executed is a special C or special D jackpot game, the upper gimmick effect or the premier character effect can be executed, and the upper gimmick effect or the premier character effect can be performed. By executing the game, it is possible to give the player a great joy (joy of winning the Renjo jackpot) and a sense of security (a sense of security that a jackpot game in which V prizes are easily won).

  Further, when the method shown in Example EX1_4 is applied to the third embodiment, the following may be performed.

FIG. 38 shows a jackpot effect pattern representing a jackpot effect pattern executed in the jackpot game OU according to the third embodiment. The production control unit 403 selects one of the jackpot production patterns PTN _{B1 to} PTN _B3 , and performs the jackpot production according to the selected jackpot production pattern during execution of the jackpot game OU. The selection method of the jackpot effect pattern is as described in the embodiment EX1_4. However, the description of special A and communication B is ignored in the third embodiment, and the jackpot game OU considered in the example of FIG. 38 is a jackpot game executed as a result of the special figure determination in the first gaming state. To do.

The jackpot effect patterns PTN _B2 and PTN _B3 in the third embodiment are the same as the jackpot effect patterns PTN _B2 and PTN _B3 (see FIG. 25) described in Example EX1_4. Jackpot performance pattern _{PTN B1} in the third embodiment is the same as the jackpot performance pattern _{PTN B1} mentioned basically embodiment EX1_4, in the third embodiment, Produce _{E B2} 'jackpot performance pattern _{PTN B1} Is inserted.

Referring also to FIG. 39, specifically, for example, in the third embodiment,
In the jackpot production with the jackpot production pattern PTN _B1 , after performing the V acquisition challenge production as the first half of the production E _B1 , the production E _B2 'is performed as the V acquisition failure production, and then the latter half of the production E _B1 is performed.
In the big hit production by the big hit production pattern PTN _B2 , after the V acquisition challenge production is performed as the first half of the production E _B1 , the production E _B2 is performed as the V acquisition success production, and then the production E _B3 is performed instead of the latter half of the production E _B1. . The effects E _B2 and E _B2 ′ are effects different from each other.

As described in the second embodiment, the main control unit 401 opens and closes the distribution member 144 according to a predetermined distribution member opening pattern only in a specific round (for example, the third round) in an arbitrary jackpot game, At other timings, the distribution member 144 is maintained in the closed state. In each of the special B to special D jackpot games, it is easy to win V in a particular round, and in each jackpot game of A, it is difficult (substantially impossible) to win V in a particular round. For example, if a particular round is the third round, the first half and directing _{E B2} of the effect _{E B1} in jackpot performance pattern _{PTN B1} 'also early and directing _{E B2} of the effect _{E B1} in jackpot performance pattern _{PTN B2} also common Then, it is executed from the first round to the second round.

As described above, when it is considered that the jackpot game OU is a jackpot game that is executed as a result of the special map determination in the first gaming state, the effect E _B1 is that the jackpot game being executed is A or B. Since it may be executed at the time of any jackpot game, it suggests that the jackpot game being executed may be a jackpot game due to a normal jackpot, and it goes through a jackpot game to a low probability electric support game state. It functions as an indication that there is a possibility of transition, or suggests that the jackpot game being executed is a jackpot game with either a regular jackpot or a probability variation jackpot and a low-probability electric power support after the jackpot game. It functions as an indication that it is either to enter the gaming state or to enter the high-probability electric support game state on condition of V winning. . Since the productions E _B2 and E _B3 are executed only when the special B jackpot game is executed, it is suggested that the jackpot game being executed is a jackpot game due to a probability variation jackpot, and a V winning condition is passed after the jackpot game. It functions as a production that suggests a transition to a high probability electric support game state.

The production E _B2 'functions as a production that suggests that the jackpot game being executed is a jackpot game due to a normal jackpot and that the jackpot game goes into a low-probability electric support game state. However, in the case of the probability variation big hit, the jackpot production pattern PTN _B2 or PTN _B3 may be selected in many cases, but the gaming machine 100 may be formed so that the big hit production pattern PTN _B1 is rarely selected. In that case, the effect E _B2 'will suggest something similar to the effect E _B1 .

If the method described in the embodiment EX1_4 is used for the gaming machine 100 formed as a VST machine, as in the case where the gaming machine 100 is formed as a loop machine, after performing the effect E _B1 in the jackpot gaming state by the probability variation jackpot, In the case where the effects E _B2 and E _B3 are executed, the second special jackpot finalizing effect is not executed or is difficult to be executed in the preceding variable effect HE (FIGS. 26 and 27).

<< Fourth Embodiment >>
A fourth embodiment of the gaming machine 100 will be described. The gaming machine 100 may be configured as a so-called 100% sure variation inrush type ST machine.

  In this case, for example, in the special figure hit determination for the first special symbol (in the special figure hit determination based on the establishment of the first starting condition), when the jackpot is won, the proportion of the jackpot to be the special A and the special B is , 90% and 10%, respectively, and, in the special symbol hit determination for the second special symbol (in the special symbol hit determination based on the establishment of the second starting condition), when the jackpot is won, the jackpot is The special symbol determination table TZt may be formed so that the ratios of C and special D are 50% and 50%, respectively. The contents of the special jackpot game of special A to special D in this case are as described in the basic embodiment (see FIG. 7), and in the fourth embodiment, the big jackpots of communication A and communication B do not occur.

  Then, the number of times of high probability application and the number of times of power support application to the jackpots of special A to special D are set to 50 times and 50 times, respectively. Therefore, after the jackpot game of any of special A ~ D, the gaming state of the gaming machine 100 is set to the high probability electric support game state, and after the jackpot game of any one of special A ~ D, other Without a big hit, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 50 times (in other words, when the special symbol determination is performed 50 times), the gaming state of the gaming machine 100 changes from a high-probability electric support game state to a low-probability electric support game state. It is made to shift to the electric support game state.

  As long as there is no contradiction, the matters described in the first embodiment (especially, for example, Examples EX1_1, EX1_2, EX1_6 and EX1_7) can be applied to the fourth embodiment. However, in this application, the descriptions about the communication A and the communication B are ignored in the fourth embodiment.

<< Discussion of Invention >>
The invention embodied in the above embodiment will be considered.

The gaming machine W _{1 according} to one aspect of the present invention is a determination means for determining whether or not to make a special game state advantageous to a player (big hit game state / electric support game state after big hit game), and the above determination. When it is determined by the means that the special game state, the game state control means for setting the special game state, and the effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect, the first special game state, A special game state (eg, 4R jackpot or 4RV short jackpot / low probability electric support game state) and a second special game state (eg, 10R jackpot or 5RV long jackpot / high) that is more advantageous than the first special game state. Stochastic electric support game state), and the effect execution means, based on the determination result of the determination means, to execute a specific effect (big hit confirmation effect) that suggests that the special game state There are times when the specific effect includes a plurality of types of specific effects, and when the second special game state is reached, a special specific effect (upper gimmick effect or premier character effect) of the plurality of types of specific effects Is sometimes executed, and when the first special game state is entered, the special special effect is not executed.

  As a result, the player strongly desires the occurrence of the special special effect, and when the special special effect occurs, a particularly great joy and a sense of security (a sense of security to enter the second special game state). Can be obtained.

In the gaming machine W ₁ , for example, the effect execution means suggests that there is a possibility of the first special game state in the first special game state (example: E _A1 , E _B1 , E _C1 ) may be executed, and in the second special game state, the second effect suggesting that the second special game state is in effect after executing the first effect (example) : E _A2 , E _B2 , E _C2 ) may be executed, and when the second effect is executed after the first effect is executed in the second special game state, the special identification is performed. It is desirable that the production is difficult or not performed.

  The special special effect can be executed only when the second special game state is set in the first and second special game states. Therefore, when the special special effect is performed, the player recognizes at that stage that the second special game state is set. Then, after the special special effect is performed, in the second special game state, the second special game state is executed after executing the first effect that suggests the possibility of the first special game state. The player may feel a sense of incongruity when performing the second effect that suggests that the first effect is the function of the first effect (function that causes anxiety about the possibility of the first special game state). There is a possibility that the second effect becomes a useless effect (redundant effect) that does not suggest any new information to the player as well as being lost. According to the above configuration, such concern is eliminated or suppressed.

The gaming machine W _{2 according} to one aspect of the present invention determines a determination whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and the determination unit determines to execute the special game. In case of, the special game execution means for executing the special game, and the effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect, the special game, the first special game (eg: 4R by the first special symbol) There is a jackpot / 4RV short jackpot) and a second special game (example: 10R jackpot / 5RV long jackpot according to the first special symbol), which is more advantageous than the first special game, and the performance executing means is Based on the determination result of the determination means, there is a case where a specific effect (big hit confirmation effect) that suggests that the special game is executed is executed, and the specific effect includes a plurality of specific effects having different effect modes. Yes, when the second special game is executed, a specific effect (upper gimmick effect or premier character effect) of a special effect mode among the plurality of specific effects may be executed, and the first special effect may be executed. When the game is executed, the specific effect of the special effect mode is not executed.

  As a result, the player strongly desires the occurrence of the specific effect of the special effect mode, and when the specific effect of the special effect mode occurs, a particularly great joy and a sense of security (the second special game is executed). You can get a sense of security).

In the gaming machine W ₂ , after the special game is executed, a game state control means capable of controlling the game in a specific game state advantageous for the player (low probability / high probability electric support game state) is further provided,
In the special game, in addition to the first special game and the second special game, a third special game (eg: 10R big hit / 10RV long big hit by the second special symbol) and the third special game. There is a fourth special game (eg: 4R jackpot / 5RV long jackpot due to the second special symbol), which is more disadvantageous than a game, and the second special game is played when the game is not controlled in the specific game state. When executed, the special effect of the special effect mode may be executed, and when the first special game is executed when the game is not controlled in the specific game state, the special effect Even if the third special game or the fourth special game is executed when the game is controlled in the specific game state without performing the specific effect of the aspect, the special feature is executed. Even if when the specific effect of the representation embodiment is performed good (see Fig. 33).
In addition, this method is also applicable to the above-mentioned gaming machine W ₁ or the later-described gaming machine W ₃ , and in this case, the “special gaming state in the above-mentioned gaming machine W ₁ or the later-described gaming machine W ₃ is set. "Determination", "special game state", "being the first special game state", "being the second special game state", "determination of whether to perform a special game", "special game" , "Execute the first special game", "execute the second special game" should be read (also similarly read for similar expressions).

  Since the specific game state is a game state that shifts after the special game is executed, the third or fourth special game that can occur in the specific game state is a so-called continuous special game (Renso jackpot game). is there. Continuous special games are very pleasing to the player. With the above configuration, in the specific game state, the condition that allows the appearance of the specific effect in the special effect mode is relaxed, and the special special operation is performed regardless of whether the third special game or the fourth special game is executed. Execution of the specific effect of the effect mode is allowed. As a result, the pleasure caused by the continuous special games being executed is combined with the pleasure that the specific effects in the special effect mode, which are difficult to be executed when the game is not controlled in the specific game state, frequently appear, resulting in a game. It is expected that it will be easier for them to feel great fun.

The gaming machine W _{3 according} to one aspect of the present invention is a determination means for determining whether or not to make a special game state (big hit game state / electric support game state after big hit game) advantageous to the player, and the above determination. When it is determined by the means that the special game state, the game state control means for setting the special game state, and the effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect, the effect execution means, the effect execution means of the determination means. Based on the determination result, it is possible to execute any one of a plurality of types of specific effects (big hit confirmation effect) that suggests that the special game state is reached, and under the first condition (eg: 4R big hit / normal big hit / 4RV in short time jackpot) first determination condition (eg determining allowed the specific effect to be executed among the plurality of types of specific effect in _{TBL B2)} of _TBL A2, _{TBL A3} or 24 in FIG. 19 , And the second conditions: In (example 10R jackpot / probability variation jackpot / 5RV Long jackpot) second determination condition: the plurality of types in (Example _TBL B3, _{TBL B4} of _{TBL A4} or 24 in FIG. 19) It is characterized in that it is possible to determine a specific effect to be executed among the specific effects.

  The execution of the specific effect suggesting that the player is in the special game state is pleasing to the player. According to the above configuration, the type of specific effect to be actually executed can be determined under the determination condition adapted to the condition at that time. For example, by determining the type of specific effect to be executed according to the content of the special game state, the correspondence relationship between the content of the special game state and the type of specific effect to be executed can be made appropriate.

In the gaming machine W ₃ , for example, the first determination condition is a condition in which a special specific effect (upper gimmick effect or premier character effect) cannot be determined, and the second determination condition is the special specification. It is good that the conditions can determine the effect.

  As a result, it becomes possible to control whether or not the special specific effect can be executed in accordance with the condition when it is determined that the special game state is set.

In the gaming machine W ₃ , for example, the special game state includes a first special game state (eg, 4R jackpot or 4RV short jackpot / low probability electric support game state) and a second special game state (eg, 10R). Jackpot or 5RV long jackpot / high probability electric support game state), and the effect execution means can determine the specific effect to be executed under the first determination condition when the first special game state is reached. When the second special game state is reached, the specific effect to be executed can be determined under the second determination condition.

  This makes it possible to control the type of specific effect to be executed according to the contents of the special game state.

The determining means, the game state control means, and the special game executing means in the gaming machine W ₁ , W ₂ or W ₃ are realized by, for example, the main control unit 401 in the gaming machine 100.
The effect execution means in the gaming machine W ₁ , W ₂ or W ₃ is realized by, for example, the effect control unit 403 in the game machine 100, or realized by the effect control unit 403 and the effect realizing element (effect means).

  The special game includes a game that involves opening a special winning opening. The special winning opening may be the special winning opening 111, and thus the special game may be a game involving opening of the special winning opening 111 (for example, a jackpot game). In this case, the determination by the determination means includes a special figure hit determination, and may further include a special figure symbol determination and a special figure variation pattern determination.

  In the description of each of the above-described embodiments, it may be considered that entering the game ball into the starting opening 105 or 106 (winning) is the establishment of the first starting condition or the second starting condition. Strictly speaking, it may be considered as follows. That is, the entry of the game ball into the starting opening 105 or 106 (specifically, the entry into the ball is detected by the starting opening SW 414a or 414b) corresponds to the satisfaction of the predetermined acquisition condition. Special figure determination information is acquired. Then, reaching the state in which the acquired special figure determination information is read as the determination target TT from the special figure determination information storage area 413a in the special symbol process corresponds to the satisfaction of the starting condition, and when the starting condition is satisfied. The special figure determination is performed on the special figure determination information.

<< Fifth Embodiment >>
A fifth embodiment of the gaming machine 100 will be described. In the fifth embodiment and each of the embodiments to be described later, an application technique to the technique of each of the above embodiments will be described. Unless otherwise specified, the contents described in the basic embodiment and the first to fourth embodiments are applied to the fifth embodiment and each embodiment described later. In the fifth embodiment, with respect to matters that contradict the contents described in the basic embodiment or the first to fourth embodiments, the following description in the fifth embodiment has priority. The same applies to other embodiments described later. Further, based on the basic embodiment, it is possible to combine any two or more of the above-described first to fourth embodiments, the fifth embodiment, and each of the embodiments described later.

  In the fifth embodiment and each of the embodiments described below, the gaming machine 100 is assumed to be configured as the loop machine shown in the basic embodiment unless otherwise specified. That is, as shown in FIG. 7, as the types of jackpots, there are a jackpot of the regular A or the jackpot B that belongs to the regular jackpot and a jackpot of the special A, the special B, the special C, or the special D that belongs to the probability variation big jackpot. It is assumed that the game state control shown is performed (see FIG. 8). However, it is possible to form the gaming machine 100 as the V loop machine shown in the second embodiment, the VST machine shown in the third embodiment, and the ST machine shown in the fourth embodiment.

  17 (a) and 17 (b) will be referred to again. Also in the fifth embodiment and each of the embodiments described below, for clarity of explanation, attention is paid to one special figure determination information JJ acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the starting opening 105 or 106. As described above, the main control unit 401 performs the special figure determination including the special figure hit determination, the special figure symbol determination, and the special figure variation pattern determination on the special figure determination information JJ (see FIG. 3). . When the effect control unit 403 receives the variation start command including the result of the special figure determination for the special figure determination information JJ from the main control unit 401, the variation production for the special figure determination information JJ is performed based on the result of the special figure determination. The content of the HE is determined, and the variable effect HE including the variable display of the first to third decorative symbols is started. The variation effect is an effect executed by the effect control unit 403 during the variable display of the special symbol, and includes an effect that suggests the determination result of the special symbol determination. Further, when the main control unit 401 performs the special figure determination on the special figure determination information JJ, the special symbols are variably displayed for a time corresponding to the result of the special figure variation pattern determination included in the special figure determination. After that, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode showing the result of the special symbol determination. The production control unit 403 starts the variable display of the first to third decorative symbols in synchronization with the start of the variable display of the special symbol for the special symbol determination information JJ, and the variable display of the special symbol for the special symbol determination information JJ. In synchronism with the stop of, the variation effect HE is ended and the first to third decorative symbols are stopped and displayed (main stop display) in a mode showing the result of the special figure determination. When the special figure determination information JJ is a big hit, after the special symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner showing a big hit and the first to third decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner showing a big hit (accordingly, variation) After the end of the production HE), the jackpot game OU is played.

  The effect control unit 403 realizes an arbitrary effect including the variable effect HE by using effect means. The rendering means includes all or a part of the image display unit 104, the speaker 115, the rendering light unit 116, the frame movable accessory 117, the rendering button 121, the rendering lever 127, the panel lamp 135, and the panel movable accessory 130 ( 1 and 2). As described above, unless otherwise specified, the display of arbitrary images and designs (decorative designs, etc.) under the control of the effect control unit 403 refers to those displays on the image display unit 104, and sounds and sounds. Is the output of sound or voice from the speaker 115.

  Various effects (including various effects that form the variable effect HE) described in the fifth embodiment and each of the embodiments described below include the gaming state of the gaming machine 100 in the low-probability non-electric support game state, unless otherwise specified. It is understood that it is executed (that is, executed when a special figure determination is made to the special figure determination information JJ in the low-probability non-electricity support game state), unless otherwise stated. It may be understood that the game state is executed when the gaming state is a low-probability electric sapo gaming state, a high-probability electric sapo gaming state, or a high-probability non-electric sapo gaming state. In the fifth embodiment and each of the embodiments described later, when it is necessary to consider the gaming state of the gaming machine 100 (for example, when the production control is different between the low-probability non-electric support game state and the high-probability electric support game state) ), A description of the gaming state of the gaming machine 100 will be provided separately.

  Reference is made to FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (b) are the same as FIGS. 9 (a) and 9 (b). In FIG. 40 (a), SZL, SZR, and SZC represent the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol, respectively. The first to third decorative symbols are also referred to as left symbol, right symbol and middle symbol, respectively. The production control unit 403 assigns each of the first to third decorative symbols to the numbers “1”, “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, “6” according to the result of the special drawing determination. It is possible to stop and display any of seven types of numerical symbols with "," "7" and special symbols different from the numerical symbols. Instead of the numerical design, a character design to which an alphabet or the like is added may be used. As the special symbol, there are a symbol that suggests execution of a so-called pseudo continuous effect, a symbol that suggests transition to a certain effect mode, and the like. Numerical symbols with the numbers "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", respectively, 1 symbol, 2 symbols, 3 symbols, 4 symbols, Sometimes referred to as 5 symbols, 6 symbols, 7 symbols.

  The effect control unit 403 can stop and display the first to third decorative symbols in a doublet or non-doublet pattern in accordance with the result of the special drawing determination. The doublet indicates a state in which the first to third decorative symbols are arranged in a common numerical pattern on a predetermined effective line. The stop display of the first to third decorative patterns by the doublet corresponds to notification of an arbitrary jackpot or a specific jackpot (a definite suggestion that a jackpot game is played). The non-doublet indicates a state in which the first to third decorative designs are not aligned with a common numerical design on a predetermined effective line. In principle, the stop display of the first to third decorative symbols by the non-doublet is equivalent to a notification of loss (a definite suggestion that the jackpot game is not played).

  As shown in FIG. 40 (c), when the special image determination information JJ is a big hit, in the variation effect HE, the first to third decorative symbols are aligned in two patterns (hereinafter, referred to as a double-throttle pattern). When the temporary stop display is performed in the form of (1), and when the temporary stop display is performed in the form of the double stitches (hereinafter, referred to as the third double stitches) in which the first to third decorative symbols are arranged in three patterns. And, when the temporary stop display is performed in the form of the double stitches (hereinafter, referred to as the seven double stitches) in which the first to third decorative symbols are arranged in the seven symbols, it is assumed that there is a variable stop command reception. In response to the above, the first to third decorative patterns may be permanently stopped and displayed in the form of the 2nd, 3rd or 7th. Hereinafter, for simplification of description, it is assumed that there are only three types of doublet, third, and seventh doublet, unless otherwise specified.

The effect of stopping and displaying the first to third decorative symbols in the 7th pattern (temporary stop display, main stop display) is executed only when the special B or special D jackpot is won, and , B, special A or special C jackpot is not executed at the time of winning. Therefore, it is suggested that the effect of stopping and displaying the first to third decorative symbols (temporary stop display, main stop display) in the 7th zoro mode is winning the special B or special D jackpot. Can be said.
The effect of stopping and displaying the first to third decorative symbols (temporary stop display, main stop display) in the form of the third zoro is executed only when one of the special jackpots A to D is won. , It won't be executed at the time of winning the big hit of A or B. Therefore, it is suggested that the effect of stopping and displaying the first to third decorative patterns (temporary stop display, main stop display) in the form of the third flatter is winning any of the special A to special D jackpots. It can be said that they are doing.
The effect of displaying the first to third decorative symbols in a stopped state (temporary stop display, main stop display) in the form of the second zoro is executed at the time of winning any of the jackpots of the communication A, the communication B, and the special A to special D. Can be done. Therefore, the effect of displaying the first to third decorative symbols in a stopped state (temporary stop display, main stop display) in the form of the second zoro is to win the jackpot of any one of the communication A, the communication B, and the special A to special D. Suggesting that

The suggestion that the special B or special D jackpot is won is also the suggestion that the special B or special D jackpot is in the jackpot game state, and the low probability non-electric sapo game state is achieved after the jackpot game. It is also a suggestion that it will be in a high-probability electric power support game state that is more advantageous to the player.
The suggestion that the jackpot of any one of special A to special D has been won is also the suggestion that the jackpot game by any of special A to special D will be in the jackpot game state, and the low hit after the jackpot game. It is also a suggestion that a high-probability electric sapo game state, which is more advantageous to the player than the stochastic non-electric sapo game state, is entered.
The suggestion that the jackpot of communication A or communication B has been won is also a suggestion that the bonanza game by communication A or communication B will be in the jackpot game state, and the low-probability non-electric support game state after the jackpot game. It is also a suggestion that it will be in a low-probability electric support game state that is more advantageous to the player but is more disadvantageous to the player than the high-probability electric support game state.
The suggestion that you have won the jackpot of A to D, B to B and special A to D is a jackpot game state in which a jackpot game is performed by either A to D or B to D. It is also a suggestion that it will be, and it is also a suggestion that after a jackpot game, it becomes either a low-probability electric sapo game state or a high-probability electric sapo game state that is more advantageous to the player than the low-probability non-electric sapo game state.

[Explanation of variation effect pattern]
Next, a variation effect based on some typical variation effect patterns will be described. In the variable effect shown below, there are cases where the SP reach effect is executed as the reach effect and where the normal reach effect is executed. When the special figure determination information JJ is a big hit, the SP reach effect is more likely to be executed than the normal reach effect in the variable effect HE, and when the special figure determination information JJ is out of order, the normal reach effect is lost. The content of the variable effect HE is determined based on the result of the special figure determination with respect to the special figure determination information JJ so that the probability of being executed is higher than that of the SP reach production. For this reason, the expectation of a jackpot suggested by the reach effect is higher in the SP reach effect than in the normal reach effect. The SP reach hit effect, the SP reach hit effect, the normal reach hit effect, the normal reach hit effect, the tempo-inspired hit effect, and the basic hit effect are explained in sequence below. Among these, the SP reach hit effect and the normal reach hit effect are , The special drawing determination information JJ may be executed in the variable effect HE only when the jackpot of any kind is won, SP reach loss effect, normal reach loss effect, tempo-inspired loss effect and basic loss. The effect may be executed by the variable effect HE only when the special image determination information JJ is lost.

  With reference to FIG. 41, the flow of the variation effect HE by the SP reach hit effect will be described. In the fluctuation effect HE by the SP reach hit effect, in response to the reception of the fluctuation start command, the variable display of the first to third decorative symbols is started, and then the first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed with a predetermined numerical symbol, and thereafter. , The second decorative design is temporarily stopped by the tempai-inspiring effect that suggests whether or not the second decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed in the same numerical design as the temporarily displayed first decorative design for a predetermined time. A tempai success effect is displayed in which a temporary stop display is performed with a numerical design common to the displayed first decorative design. In the SP reach hit effect, the tempai success effect may be performed without executing the tempai twisting effect.

  One or more notice effects may be executed in the variable effect HE. The notice effect is an effect that is executed based on the result of the special figure determination with respect to the special figure determination information JJ, and may be an effect that suggests the expectation of the jackpot for the special figure determination information JJ. In the fluctuating effect HE, the notice effect that is executed before the tempai-raising effect or the tempai-successful effect is executed is particularly called a pre-reach notice effect. In the SP reach hit effect, one or more pre-reach notice effects may be executed, or the pre-reach notice effect may not be executed.

  In the SP reach hit effect, the development destination selection effect is executed after the tempai success effect. At this stage, the display positions and display sizes of the first and second decorative symbols are changed, which will be described later. There are a plurality of types of SP reach effects, and in the development destination selection effect, after displaying a plurality of candidates for the type of SP reach effects that can be actually executed using the image display, a plurality of types of SP reach effects are displayed. Among them, an effect for specifying the type of SP reach effect that is actually executed is performed. Through this specified effect, the specified SP reach effect is executed. However, it is possible that the SP reach production is started after the tempai success production without the development destination selection production being performed.

  In the SP reach production, a production in which a game problem (for example, a hero character wins an enemy character in a game battle) occurs and a moving image display indicating whether or not the problem is achieved is produced. To be executed. First, in the SP reach effect, after the title display effect for displaying the game title of the SP reach effect to be executed is executed, the final winning effect is executed through the predetermined SP reach mid effect including moving image display and the like. To be done. In the title display effect and the effect during SP reach, an effect suggesting the expectation of a jackpot may be performed. An operation effect (see FIG. 15) is performed in the final winning effect. The operation effect executed in the winning effect is particularly referred to as a winning operation effect. The final winning effect is an effect for finally suggesting and notifying whether or not the special drawing determination information JJ has won the jackpot. In the winning operation effect, when a player inputs a predetermined operation within a predetermined operation valid period, an operation corresponding effect (see FIGS. 16A and 16B) is executed in response to the input. . In any operation effect including the winning operation effect, the predetermined operation by the player is a button operation if the operation effect is a button effect as described above (see FIGS. 16A and 16B). If is a lever effect, it is a lever operation. The operation corresponding effect may be considered to be included in the constituent elements of the operation effect, or may be considered to be an effect executed after the operation effect (the same applies to other embodiments described later).

  In the SP reach hit production, the operation corresponding production in the winning operation production is the SP reach success production. In the SP reach hit effect, if there is no input of a predetermined operation within the operation valid period of the winning operation effect, the SP reach success effect is executed after the expiration of the operation valid period. Regarding the SP reach hit production, here, it is considered that the SP reach success production is included in the components of the SP reach production, but even if it is considered that the SP reach success production is not included in the components of the SP reach production. good.

  The SP reach success effect is an effect that suggests that the special-drawing determination information JJ is a big hit. In the SP reach success effect, a moving image showing how the game task defined in the SP reach effect is achieved is displayed (in FIG. 41, the appearance is omitted), and at the same time or after that, the third The decorative pattern (middle pattern) is temporarily stopped and displayed in the same numerical pattern as the first and second decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped (that is, the first to third decorative patterns are temporarily stopped in a zigzag pattern). Is displayed).

  After the SP reach success production, with the change of the display position and the display size of each decorative design, a flattering temporary stop production for temporarily displaying the first to third decorative designs in a flatter pattern is performed, and then, After the re-lottery effect is performed, in response to the reception of the variation stop command, the zoro-eye main stop effect is performed in which the first to third decorative symbols are permanently stopped and displayed in the form of a doublet. Although the re-lottery effect will be described later, the re-lottery effect may not be performed after the SP reach success effect.

  With reference to FIG. 42, a flow of the variation effect HE by the SP reach loss effect will be described. The SP reach loss effect includes the tempai success effect and the SP reach effect as in the SP reach hit effect, and the effect until the final winning effect is executed is common between the SP reach hit effect and the SP reach hit effect.

  In the SP reach loss effect, the operation corresponding effect in the winning operation effect is the SP reach failure effect. In the SP reach loss effect, if the predetermined operation is not input within the operation valid period of the winning operation effect, the SP reach failure effect is executed after the expiration of the operation valid period. Regarding the SP reach loss effect, here, it is considered that the SP reach failure effect is included in the components of the SP reach effect, but it may be considered that the SP reach failure effect is not included in the components of the SP reach effect. .

  The SP reach failure effect is an effect that suggests that the special image determination information JJ is lost. In the SP reach failure production, a moving image showing that the game task defined in the SP reach production is not achieved is displayed (in FIG. 42, the situation is not shown), and at the same time or after that, the third decoration The design (middle design) is temporarily stopped and displayed in a numerical design that is not common to the first and second decorative designs that are provisionally stopped (that is, the first to third decorative designs are provisionally in the non-zero form). Will be stopped).

  After the SP reach failure effect, a non-double eye temporary stop effect is performed in which the first to third decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in a non-flat pattern with the change of the display position and the display size of each decorative pattern, After that, in response to the reception of the fluctuation stop command, a non-Zoro eye main stop effect of performing the main stop display of the first to third decorative symbols in a non-Zoro eye mode is performed. No re-lottery effect is performed in the SP reach loss effect, the normal reach loss effect, the tempo-inspired loss effect, and the basic loss effect described below.

  With reference to FIG. 43, the flow of the variation effect HE by the normal reach hit effect will be described. In the variation effect HE by the normal reach hit production, in response to the reception of the variation start command, after the variation display of the first to third decorative symbols is started, the first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed with a predetermined numerical symbol, and thereafter, The second decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed through a tempai-inspiring effect that suggests whether or not the second decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed in the same numerical design as the first decorative design that is temporarily stopped and displayed. A tempai success effect is displayed in which a temporary stop display is made with a numerical design common to the first decorative design. In the normal reach hit production, the tempai success production may be performed without executing the tempai twist production. In the normal reach hit effect, one or more pre-reach notice effects may be executed, or the pre-reach notice effect may not be executed.

  In the normal reach hit production, the normal reach production is executed after the tempai success production without executing the SP reach production (without developing into the SP reach production). The normal reach effect is an effect that suggests whether or not the third decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed with a numerical design common to the first and second decorative designs that are temporarily stopped and displayed for a predetermined time. In the normal reach effect, the normal reach success effect in which the third decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed in the same numerical design as the temporarily stopped displayed first and second decorative designs is executed after the predetermined time. Therefore, the normal reach success production suggests that the special figure determination information JJ is a big hit. Here, regarding the normal reach hit production, it is considered that the normal reach success production is included in the components of the normal reach production, but it may be considered that the normal reach success production is not included in the components of the normal reach production.

  After the normal reach success effect, the re-lottery effect is performed, and thereafter, in response to the reception of the variation stop command, the zoro-eye main stop effect is performed in which the first to third decorative symbols are permanently stopped and displayed in the form of a doublet. Although the re-lottery effect will be described later, the re-lottery effect may not be performed after the normal reach success effect.

  With reference to FIG. 44, a flow of the variation effect HE by the normal reach loss effect will be described. The normal reach lost effect includes the tempai success effect and the normal reach effect as in the normal reach hit effect, and the effect until the normal reach effect is executed is common between the normal reach hit effect and the normal reach miss effect. The content of the normal reach production itself is the same between the normal reach hit production and the normal reach lost production, but in the normal reach lost production, instead of the normal reach successful production, the third decorative design is temporarily stopped, and the first and second decorative designs are displayed. A normal reach failure effect is displayed in which a temporary stop display is made with a non-common numerical pattern. Therefore, the normal reach failure effect suggests that the special figure determination information JJ is lost. Here, regarding the normal reach lost effect, it is considered that the normal reach failure effect is included in the components of the normal reach effect, but it may be considered that the normal reach failure effect is not included in the components of the normal reach effect. After the normal reach failure effect, the non-Zoro eye main stop effect is performed in which the first to third decorative symbols are permanently stopped and displayed in the non-Zero eye mode in response to the reception of the variation stop command.

  With reference to FIG. 45, the flow of the variation effect HE by the tempo-inspired loss effect will be described. In the variation effect HE by the tempo-inspired loss effect, in response to the reception of the variation start command, the variable display of the first to third decorative symbols is started, and then the first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in a predetermined numerical pattern, After that, the second decorative pattern is subjected to a tempai-inspiring effect that indicates for a predetermined time whether or not the second decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the same numerical design as the temporarily stopped and displayed first decorative pattern. A temporary failure display is performed in which a temporary stop display is made with a numerical pattern that is not common to the first decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed. After the tempai failure production, the first to third decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in a non-flat pattern by the temporary stop of the third decorative symbol, and the first to third decorative symbols are received in response to the reception of the variation stop command. This stop display is performed in a non-double eye pattern.

  With reference to FIG. 46, the flow of the variation effect HE due to the basic loss effect will be described. In the variation effect HE by the basic loss effect, after the variation display of the first to third decorative symbols is started in response to the reception of the variation start command, the first decorative symbol is performed without performing tempai-inspiring effect and any reach effect. , The second decorative pattern, the third decorative pattern, in the form of forming a non-flat pattern sequentially or simultaneously at the same time, in response to the reception of the variation stop command, the first to third decorative pattern non-flat pattern This stop display is performed in this manner.

  With reference to FIG. 47, the display position and the display size of the decorative design relating to the reach effect will be described. In FIG. 47, areas 211 to 2113, 2121 and 2122 represent different display areas set in the entire display area of the image display unit 104. The size (area) of each of the display regions 2111 to 2113 is larger than the size of each of the display regions 2121 and 2122. The display areas 2111 to 2113 may have the same size, and the display areas 2121 and 2122 may also have the same size. The display area 2111 is closer to the display area 2121 than the display area 2121 and the display area 2112 is closer to the center of the entire display area of the image display unit 104 than the display area 2122.

  As a general rule, the temporary stop display and the first to third decorative patterns displayed in the final stop are displayed in large sizes in the display areas 211 to 2113, respectively. However, when a specific effect is performed in the variable effect HE, the first and second decorative symbols (left and right symbols) are displayed in a small size in the display areas 2121 and 2122, respectively. Small size is smaller than large size. The first and second decorative symbols displayed in the display areas 2121 and 2122 may be considered to be a reduction of the first and second decorative symbols displayed in the display areas 2111 and 2112.

  Specifically, when the above-mentioned tempai twisting effect, tempai success effect, and tempai failure effect are performed, the first and second decorative designs are displayed in large-sized display areas 2111 and 2112, respectively (however, tempe The display position of the second decorative design in the stirrup production may be slightly deviated from the area 2112), and when the doublet provisional stop production and the doublet main stop production are performed, the first to third decorative designs are respectively A large size is displayed in the display areas 2112 to 2113. On the other hand, when the development destination selection effect and the SP reach effect are being performed, the player visually recognizes the contents of the development destination selection effect and the SP reach effect, which are mainly displayed near the center of the image area of the image display unit 104. For easier operation, the first and second decorative symbols are displayed in the display areas 2121 and 2122 in a small size. In the SP reach success production and the SP reach failure production, while the first and second decorative symbols are displayed in the display areas 2121 and 2122 in a small size, in order to clearly show the end of the SP reach production to the player, the third The decorative pattern is displayed in a large size in the display area 2113, and in the subsequent flattering temporary stop effect and non-zero-eye temporary stop effect, the first to third decorative patterns are respectively large size in the display areas 2111 to 2113. Is displayed.

  When the normal reach effect is being performed, the first and second decorative symbols are displayed in a large size in the display areas 2111 and 2112 so that the normal reach effect itself is easily visible, and the third decorative pattern is also displayed in a large size. It is displayed in the area 2113 or in the vicinity of the display area 2113.

  When the SP reach hit effect and the normal reach hit effect are compared, when the first to third decorative designs are aligned in a zigzag pattern (in other words, the first to third decorative patterns are first provisionally in a zigzag pattern). The display position and display size of the first and second decorative symbols (when stopped and displayed) are different between the SP reach hit effect and the normal reach hit effect. That is, in the SP reach hit production, the first to third decorative designs are aligned in a zigzag pattern in the SP reach successful production, but at that time, the first and second decorative designs are small in display area 2121. And 2122. On the other hand, in the normal reach hit production, in the normal reach success production, the first to third decorative designs are aligned in a zigzag pattern, and at that time, the first and second decorative designs are displayed in the display areas 2111 and 2112 in a large size. To be done. The display position and the display size of the third decorative symbol when the first to third decorative symbols are aligned in a zigzag pattern may be different between the SP reach hit effect and the normal reach hit effect.

  Reference is made to FIGS. 48 (a) to 48 (c). There are different types of numerical designs for tempai-inspiring productions, and there are different types of numerical designs for successful tempai productions. Tempered fanning effects performed in a state where the first decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed with two, three, and seven symbols are referred to as a two-tempered fanned effect, a three-tempered fanned effect, and a seven-tempered fanned effect, respectively. Temporary success productions in which both the first and second decorative designs are temporarily stopped and displayed with 2 designs, 3 designs, and 7 designs are referred to as 2 temporary success productions, 3 temporary success productions, and 7 successful success productions, respectively. The tempai success effect that is performed through the i tempai twisting effect is the i tempai success effect (where i is 2, 3 or 7). After the tempai success effect, before the SP reach success effect, the SP reach failure effect, the normal reach success effect or the normal reach failure effect is performed, the first and second decorative symbols that are temporarily displayed are a common numeral pattern. It is possible that the number is changed to another numerical design, but here, it is assumed that there is no such change.

  Then, in the fluctuating effect HE by the SP reach hit effect, in the SP reach successful effect after the i tempai success effect, the first to third decorative symbols are arranged in the i pattern as the numerical pattern, and in the fluctuation effect HE by the normal reach hit effect. , In the normal reach success production after the i tempai success production, the first to third decorative designs are arranged in the i design as the numerical design (where i is 2, 3 or 7).

[Re-lottery production]
The re-lottery effect will be described with reference to FIG. After the SP reach success production or the normal reach success production, before the re-lottery production is performed, the double-eye temporary stop production is referred to as a front stage double-eye temporary stop production. In the re-lottery effect, a re-variation display effect (for example, a display effect in which it is difficult to specify which numerical symbol the first to third decorative symbols are) that re-variably displays the first to third decorative symbols is performed. After that, the second-stage tentative stop production is performed. Since it is assumed here that there are only three types of doublet, third, and seventh doublet as the type of doublet, in the second stage double stop provisional production, the first to third decorative symbols are the second doublet, The temporary stop display is performed in the form of the 3rd or 7th. When the production control unit 403 receives the variable stop command after the second-stage tentative stop production in which the first to third decorative symbols are tentatively stopped and displayed in the form of the second, third, and seventh zolo, respectively, when the variation stop command is received, The first to third decorative symbols are permanently stopped and displayed in the form of the second, third, and seventh zoro.

  When the form of the doublet in the first stage double drop provisional stop production is the second set, and when the form of the doublet eye in the second stage double drop provisional stop production is the third set, the second stage double stop provisional stop after the re-variation display production Prior to the effect, a predetermined three promotion effects (for example, a display effect of the character image “good!”) Are executed (however, it is possible that they are not executed). The 3 promotion effect is executed only when one of the special A to special D jackpots is won, and is not executed when the jackpot of the communication A or the communication B is won. Therefore, it can be said that the 3 promotion effect is an effect that suggests that one of the special A to special D jackpots has been won.

  When the form of the doublet in the first stage double-stop provisional stop production is the 2nd or the third set, when the form of doublet in the second-stage double-stop provisional stop production is the 7th doublet, after the re-variation display production, the second stage A predetermined 7 promotion effect (for example, a display effect of the character image “YU !!”) is executed (however, it may not be executed) before the double eye temporary stop effect. The 7 promotion effect is executed only when the special B or special D jackpot is won, and is not executed when the general A, communication B, special A or special C jackpot is won. Therefore, it can be said that the 7 promotion effect is an effect that suggests that the special B or special D jackpot is won.

With reference to FIG. 50, the effect control unit 403 assumes that there are only three types of doublet, third, and seventh doublet as the type of doublet, according to the table 2200 held by itself, the doublet pattern PTN. _It is possible to select one doublet pattern from _{C1 to} PTN _C10 and control the mode of the doublet pattern at the time of a big hit by the selected doublet pattern. That is, for example, under the above assumptions, the effect control unit 403 appropriately uses an effect random number generated by itself based on a variation start command including the result of the special figure determination for the special figure determination information JJ,
When the special figure determination information JJ is a big hit of the communication A or the communication B, the doublet pattern PTN _C1 is selected with a probability of 100%,
When the special figure determination information JJ is a special A or special C jackpot, the doublet patterns PTN _C2 , PTN _C3 , and PTN _C4 are selected with a probability of 20%, 30%, and 50%, respectively. Then
When the special figure determination information JJ is a special B or special D jackpot, the doublet patterns PTN _C5 , PTN _C6 , PTN _C7 , PTN _C8 , PTN _C9 , and PTN _C10 are 15%, respectively. Select with a probability of 15%, 20%, 10%, 20%, 20%.

In the doublet pattern PTN _C1 , PTN _C2, and PTN _C5 , both the doublet in the front-stage double-eye temporary stop production and the second-stage double-eye temporary stop production are the second flatter,
In the double stitch patterns PTN _C3 and PTN _C6 , the double _stitches in the front stage double stitch temporary stop effect and the second stage double stitch temporary stop effect are the second double stitch and the third double stitch, respectively.
In the doublet patterns PTN _C4 and PTN _C8 , both the doublet in the front-stage double-eye temporary stop production and the second-stage double-eye temporary stop production are the third double
In the double stitch pattern PTN _C7 , the double _stitches in the front stage double stitch temporary stop effect and the second stage double stitch temporary stop effect are the second double stitch and the seventh double stitch, respectively.
In the double _stitch pattern PTN _C9 , the double _stitches in the pre-stage double _stitch temporary stop effect and the second stage double stitch temporary stop effect are the third double stitch and the seventh double stitch, respectively.
In the double _stitch pattern PTN _C10 , the double _stitches in the preliminary flat stitch temporary stop effect and the second stage double stitch temporary stop effect are both zero.

  When the special A or special C jackpot is won and the doublet in the second-stage double-eye temporary stop production is set to the second flatter, after that, during the jackpot game, etc., the production control unit 403 performs 3 promotion production. Equivalent promotion production can be performed. In the case where the special B or special D jackpot is won, if the doublet in the second-stage double-eye temporary stop production is set to the second or third doublet, then during the jackpot game, the production control unit 403, It is possible to perform promotion effects equivalent to 7 promotion effects.

  In addition, at the stage of the SP reach success production or the normal reach success production, when the first to third decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in the form of the 7th zoro, the re-lottery production may not be executed.

[Special figure fluctuation pattern table]
FIG. 51 shows a special figure fluctuation pattern table 2300 included in the special figure fluctuation pattern table THt (see FIG. 2). In the fifth embodiment and each embodiment described later, the special figure variation pattern determination is performed using the table 2300 in an arbitrary game state unless otherwise specified. However, for example, the special figure fluctuation pattern table may be determined using different special figure fluctuation pattern tables between the low-probability non-electric sapo game state, the low-probability electric sapo game state, and the high-probability electric sapo game state. good.

  The special figure variation pattern table 2300 includes special figure variation patterns THp_a [1] to THp_a [Na], THp_b [1] to THp_b [Nb], THp_c [1] to THp_c [Nc] and THp_d [1] to THp_d [Nd. ]including. Here, Na is an integer of 4 or more, and each of Nb, Nc, and Nd is an integer of 2 or more.

  Each special figure variation pattern defines the variation time of the special symbol. The variation time of the special symbol defined in the special figure variation pattern THp_a [1], THp_a [2], THp_a [3], THp_a [4] is 7 seconds, 15 seconds, 30 seconds, and 60 seconds, respectively. . The variation time of the special symbol defined by the special figure variation patterns THp_b [1], THp_c [1] and THp_d [1] is 30 seconds. The variation time of the special symbol defined by the special figure variation patterns THp_b [2], THp_c [2] and THp_d [2] is 60 seconds. Although not described here, the variation time of a predetermined special symbol is also associated with other special symbol variation patterns that can be included in the table 2300. The main control unit 401 determines the variation time of the special symbol through the selection of the special symbol variation pattern, and the variation display of the special symbol is started, and after the determined variation time elapses, the special symbol hit determination and the special symbol are determined. It can be said that it includes the symbol display control means for stopping and displaying the special symbol in a mode showing the result of the symbol determination.

When the result of the special figure determination with respect to the special figure determination information JJ indicates a loss, one of the special figure variation patterns THp_a [1] to THp_a [Na] is selected using a special figure variation pattern random number or the like. The selection probability of the special figure variation pattern THp_a [i] is represented by TKa [i] (i is an integer). Then, “1> TKa [1]> TKa [2]> TKa [3]> TKa [4]> 0” is satisfied.
When the result of the special figure determination with respect to the special figure determination information JJ indicates a big hit of communication A or communication B, any one of the special figure fluctuation patterns THp_b [1] to THp_b [Nb] is calculated by using a special figure fluctuation pattern random number or the like. To be selected. The selection probability of the special figure variation pattern THp_b [i] is represented by TKb [i] (i is an integer). Then, “0 <TKb [1] <TKb [2] <1” is satisfied.
When the result of the special figure determination with respect to the special figure determination information JJ indicates a big hit of the special figure A or the special figure C, one of the special figure variation patterns THp_c [1] to THp_c [Nc] is obtained using a special figure variation pattern random number or the like. To be selected. The selection probability of the special figure variation pattern THp_c [i] is represented by TKc [i] (i is an integer). Then, “0 <TKc [1] <TKc [2] <1” is satisfied.
When the result of the special figure determination with respect to the special figure determination information JJ indicates a big hit of the special figure B or the special figure, one of the special figure variation patterns THp_d [1] to THp_d [Nd] is obtained using a special figure variation pattern random number or the like. To be selected. The selection probability of the special figure variation pattern THp_d [i] is represented by TKd [i] (i is an integer). Then, “0 <TKd [1] <TKd [2] <1” is satisfied.

  In FIG. 51, the outline of the variation effect corresponding to each special figure variation pattern is shown for convenience. Actually, the data indicating the content of the variation effect is not included in the special figure variation pattern table 2300, but is stored in the sub ROM 432 provided in the effect control unit 403.

When the special figure variation pattern THp_a [1] is selected for the special figure determination information JJ, the effect control unit 403, in the variable effect HE, the basic loss effect that does not include the reach effect or the tempai-shaking effect (see FIG. 46). ) Is executed.
When the special figure variation pattern THp_a [2] is selected for the special figure determination information JJ, the effect control unit 403, in the variable effect HE, does not include the reach effect, but includes the tempai-inspired effect, and causes the tempo-inspired loss effect. (See FIG. 45) is executed.
When the special figure variation patterns THp_a [3] and THp_a [4] are selected for the special figure determination information JJ, the effect control unit 403, in the variable effect HE, includes the normal reach lost effects including the normal reach effect (Fig. 44), SP reach lost effect including SP reach effect (see FIG. 42) is executed.

When the special figure variation pattern THp_b [1], THp_c [1] or THp_d [1] is selected for the special figure determination information JJ, the effect control unit 403 determines whether the normal reach effect including the normal reach effect is included in the variable effect HE. The effect (see FIG. 43) is executed.
When the special figure variation pattern THp_b [2], THp_c [2] or THp_d [2] is selected for the special figure determination information JJ, the effect control unit 403, in the variable effect HE, SP including SP reach effect. A reach effect (see FIG. 41) is executed.

  The expectation of the jackpot associated with the SP reach production (ie, the expectation of the jackpot suggested in the SP reach production) is the expectation of the jackpot associated with the normal reach production (ie, the expectation of the jackpot suggested in the normal reach production) The selection probability of each special figure variation pattern is set and the content of the variation effect is determined so as to be higher than the degree. As the simplest example, “Na = 4” and “Nb = Nc = Nd = 2” can be set, and in this case, it is derived from the table 2300 shown in FIG. 51 and the above-described expectation degree calculation formula for the jackpot. As described above, the jackpot expectation associated with the SP reach effect is higher than the jackpot expectation associated with the normal reach effect.

  In addition, as shown in a specific numerical example of the variation time of the special symbol, when the variation effect (7 seconds) of the special symbol when the basic loss effect is executed, the tempo-inspired loss effect is performed Special symbol variation time (15 seconds) is longer, special reach when normal reach hit production or normal reach loss effect is executed than the variation time (15 seconds) of special symbol The variation time (30 seconds) of the symbol is longer, and the SP reach hit production or the SP reach loss production is executed more than the variation time (30 seconds) of the special symbol when the normal reach hit effect or the normal reach loss effect is executed. The variation time (60 seconds) of the special symbol is even longer.

[Big hit confirmation production]
As described in the basic embodiment, the first embodiment, and the like, when the special figure determination information JJ is a big hit, the effect control unit 403 sets the big figure determination information JJ to the special figure determination information JJ. May be executed. When the special figure determination information JJ is lost, the jackpot finalizing effect is not executed for the special figure determination information JJ.

With reference to FIGS. 52 (a) and 52 (b), the jackpot finalizing effect is first classified into a simple winning effect and a certainty effect. The simple winning effect can be executed at the time of winning all the big hits of the communication A, the communication B, and the special A to special D. For this reason, the simple winning effect is an effect that suggests that the winning combination of the communication A, the communication B, and the special A to the special D is won (in other words, the communication A, the communication B, and the special A to the special). The production that suggests that one of the jackpots D has been won belongs to the simple winning production), and the gaming state of the gaming machine 100 is changed to the high-probability electric support game state after the jackpot game performed through the simple winning production. There are cases where it becomes and cases where it becomes a low-probability electric support game state (in other words, cases where it does not become a high-probability electric support game state). On the other hand, the certainty effect is executed only when one of the special A to special D jackpots is won, and is not executed when the communication A or communication B jackpot is won. For this reason, the certainty effect is an effect that suggests that one of the special A to special D jackpots has been won (in other words, that one of the special A to special D jackpots has been won. The suggested production belongs to the certainty production), and the gaming state of the gaming machine 100 is always in the high-probability electric power support gaming state after the jackpot game performed through the certainty production.
Furthermore, the definite production is subdivided into a simple definite production and a super definite production. The simple certainty effect is executed only when any one of the special A to special D jackpots is won, and is not executed when the jackpot of the communication A or the communication B is won. For this reason, the simple certainty effect is an effect that suggests that one of the special A to special D jackpots has been won (in other words, one of the special A to special D jackpots has been won. Production that suggests belongs to simple and accurate production). On the other hand, the super-probability production is executed only when the special B or special D jackpot is won, and is not executed when the regular A, regular B, special A or special C jackpot is won. Therefore, the super-probable effect is an effect that suggests that the special B or special D jackpot has been won (in other words, the effect that suggests that the special B or special D jackpot is won is super-determined. Belongs to the production).

  As described above, the jackpot finalizing effect includes the simple winning effect and the certainty effect, but when it is necessary to distinguish between them, the terms “simple winning effect” and “certainty effect” will be used. Further, the certainty definite production includes simple certainty production and super certain production, but the terms “simple certain production” and “super certain production” will be used when it is necessary to distinguish them. A plurality of types of jackpot finalization effects, each of which is classified as a simple winning production, a simple certainty production, or a super certainty production, are jackpot finalization productions that have different production modes from each other. The finalized effect can be considered to be a jackpot finalized effect that is most preferable for the player and has a special effect mode. However, there may be a plurality of types of jackpot finalizing effects that are classified as super-probability effects, and among some types of super-probability effects, only some of the super-probability effects may be considered to have a special effect mode.

  The effect control unit 403 may realize the simple winning effect, the simple certainty effect, and the super certainty effect by using any effect means. For example, the display of a specific image by the image display unit 104 or the output of a specific sound from the speaker 115 may realize a simple winning effect, a simple accurate effect, or a super- certain effect, and the effect light unit 116 or the panel lamp 135. The effect of causing the light-emitting element included in the element to emit light in a specific light emitting mode may be made to function as a simple accurate effect, a simple accurate effect, or a super accurate effect, or an effect of operating the movable accessory 130 in a specific mode is achieved as a simple accurate effect. , May be made to function as a simple certainty effect or a super certainty effect. Further, for example, an ejection mechanism (not shown) for ejecting air may be provided in the gaming machine 100, and the effect of ejecting air from the ejection mechanism may be made to function as a simple accurate production, a simple certainty production, or a super certain production. Further, for example, a function of vibrating the effect button 121 may be provided, and the effect of vibrating the effect button 121 at a specific timing may be made to function as a simple accurate effect, a simple certainty effect, or a super certain effect.

  FIG. 53 shows some examples of the jackpot confirmation effect. The jackpot confirmation effect includes a first special character effect, a second special character effect, a third special character effect, a rainbow image effect, a special telop effect, a rainbow lamp effect, a P flash effect, and a P siren effect. Various other effects can be executed as the jackpot finalization effect, but here, description will be provided for these eight types of jackpot finalization effects.

  As shown in FIGS. 54A to 54C, the first special character effect is an effect of displaying the image 2310 representing the first special character on the image display unit 104, and the second special character effect is the second special character. The image 2320 shown is an effect of displaying on the image display unit 104, and the third special character effect is an effect of displaying an image 2330 showing a third special character on the image display unit 104. The first to third special characters are different from each other.

The rainbow image effect is an effect of displaying an image including seven colors forming the rainbow color on the image display unit 104. The seven colors forming the iridescent color are red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo and purple. Rainbow image effects include rainbow character effects, rainbow CI effects, rainbow background effects, rainbow button display effects, and rainbow lever display effects.
As shown in FIG. 54D, the rainbow character effect is an effect of displaying a rainbow-colored character image or an effect of displaying a rainbow-colored image around the character image display area.
As shown in FIG. 54 (e), the rainbow CI effect is an effect for displaying a cut-in image expressed in rainbow colors. The rainbow CI effect can be executed as an operation corresponding effect in the operation effect.
As shown in FIG. 54 (f), the rainbow background effect is an effect of displaying a rainbow-colored background image as a background image of an arbitrary image forming the variation effect (for example, as a background image of the image forming the reach effect).
As shown in FIG. 54 (g), the rainbow button display effect is an effect of displaying a button image 1212R having a rainbow color scheme as the button image 1212 in the button effect (see FIG. 16A). The rainbow button display effect is an effect of displaying an effect image having a rainbow color scheme around the button image 1212 (see FIG. 16A) displayed in the button effect, or a display area of the button image 1212. It is possible to include an effect of displaying an image having a rainbow color scheme as a background image of the button image 1212 in a display area included therein and larger than the display area. In this case, the button image 1212 displayed in the button effect may have a rainbow color scheme (that is, the button image 1212R may be displayed), or the button image 1212 displayed in the button effect. The image itself may be a common image (an image having a common color arrangement different from the rainbow color) when the rainbow button display effect is executed and when it is not executed.
As shown in FIG. 54 (h), the rainbow lever display effect is an effect of displaying a lever image 1222R having a rainbow color scheme as the lever image 1222 (see FIG. 16 (b)) in the lever effect. The rainbow lever display effect is an effect of displaying an effect image having a rainbow color scheme around the lever image 1222 (see FIG. 16B) displayed in the lever effect, or a display area of the lever image 1222. An effect of displaying an image having a rainbow color scheme as a background image of the lever image 1222 in a display area included therein and larger than the display area may be included. In this case, the lever image 1222 displayed in the lever effect may have a rainbow color scheme (that is, the lever image 1222R may be displayed), or the lever image 1222 displayed in the lever effect. The image itself may be a common image (an image having a common color arrangement different from the rainbow color) when the rainbow lever display effect is executed and when it is not executed.
54 (a) to 54 (h), the illustration of the decorative pattern is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 54 (i), the special telop effect is an effect of displaying a telop with a special character string on the image display unit 104, which indicates the occurrence of the special B or special D jackpot.

  The rainbow lamp effect is an effect of causing the frame lamp section including the light emitting elements provided in the frame section of the gaming machine 100 to emit light with seven colors forming the rainbow color. The frame portion of the gaming machine 100 includes the inner frame 11 and the door frame 12, and thus the frame lamp portion includes the effect light portion 116 (see FIGS. 1 and 2). The light emitting element forming the frame lamp portion is arranged outside the game board 101 as viewed from the player, and thus is arranged outside the image display portion 104 fitted in the center portion of the game board 101. The type of the light emitting element forming the frame lamp portion is arbitrary, and is composed of, for example, an incandescent light bulb or an LED (light emitting diode). In the rainbow lamp effect, seven colors forming a rainbow color may be simultaneously emitted by a plurality of light emitting elements forming the frame lamp section, or by changing the emission color of each light emitting element forming the frame lamp section. The seven colors forming the rainbow color may be developed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds). Further, in the rainbow lamp effect, the board lamp 135 provided on the game board 101 may also emit and emit light in seven colors forming the rainbow color.

  The P-flash effect is defined as a fixed sound effect for outputting a predetermined sound (for example, a sound that sounds like a cuin cuin) from the speaker 115, and a light emitting element (not shown; part of the effect light unit 116) built in the operation handle 119. (Which is also good) is emitted in a predetermined manner. The P-siren effect is an effect obtained by removing the fixed light emission effect from the P-flash effect.

  It is assumed that the first special character effect, the second special character effect, and the third special character effect function as a simple winning effect, a simple certainty effect, and a super certainty effect, respectively. The rainbow image effect, the special telop effect, and the P-flash effect function as super-accurate effects. The rainbow lamp production shall function as a simple and accurate production. The P siren effect shall function as a simple accurate effect.

  However, the execution condition of each jackpot finalizing effect may change depending on the gaming state of the gaming machine 100. That is, for example, while changing the first special character effect executed in the fluctuation effect HE in the low-probability non-electricity support game state to function as a simple winning effect, fluctuation in the low-probability electric support game state or the high-probability electric support game state The first special character effect executed in the effect HE may be made to function as a simple certainty effect or a super certainty effect. In order to realize this, in the low-probability non-electricity support game state, the first special character effect can be executed at the time of winning any of the big hits of A, D, and A to D. In the low probability electric sapo game state or the high probability electric sapo game state, the first special character effect is executed only when one of the special jackpots A to D has been won, or The first special character effect may be executed only when the special B or special D jackpot is won. The same applies to the jackpot confirming effect other than the first special character effect.

<< Sixth Embodiment >>
The sixth embodiment of the gaming machine 100 will be described based on the matters described in the fifth embodiment.

  Reference is made to FIGS. 55 (a) and 55 (b). The effect control unit 403 can execute the operation effect one or more times in one variation effect HE for one piece of special figure determination information JJ. For example, in the above-described SP reach hit effect, SP reach miss effect, normal reach hit effect or normal reach miss effect variable effect HE, the operation effect may be executed once, twice, three times or four times (even five times or more. good). In each operation effect, it is possible to perform the operation corresponding effect in response to the input of a predetermined operation associated with each operation effect (see FIGS. 15, 16A and 16B).

  When a plurality of operation effects are executed in the variable effect HE by the SP reach hit effect or the SP reach loss effect, the winning operation effects (see FIG. 41, FIG. 42) executed at the final stage of the SP reach effect are plural. It may be the last operation effect of the operation operations of the times. However, when the variation effect HE by the SP reach hit effect includes the re-lottery effect and the operation effect is performed in the re-lottery effect, the winning operation effect is not the last operation effect.

  Although there are a button effect and a lever effect as operation effects, the jackpot expectation level associated with the lever effect is higher than the jackpot expectation level associated with the button effect. In other words, it suggests that the lever effect has a higher expectation of a big hit than the button effect. In order to realize this, the effect control unit 403 relates to the operation effect executed in the variable effect HE when the special figure determination information JJ is a big hit, rather than the button effect as the operation effect. The content of the operation effect is selected so that the lever effect is easily selected and executed, and when the special figure determination information JJ is lost, the button effect is more easily selected and executed as the operation effect than the lever effect. Just decide.

  Characteristic effect control related to the operation effect will be described with reference to FIG. 56. FIG. 56 is an operation flowchart of the fluctuating effect content determination processing executed by the effect control unit 403 in response to the reception of the fluctuation start command. However, FIG. 56 is a flowchart of a part of the fluctuating effect content determination process focusing on the jackpot finalizing effect and the winning operation effect that can be executed in the fluctuating effect HE, and various other processes that are not actually shown in FIG. 56. Is included in the variation effect content determination processing, but description of other processing is omitted here.

  In the variation effect content determination process, when the variation start command is received, the effect control unit 403 analyzes the variation start command in step S211, and determines the result of the special figure determination included in the variation start command in step S212. Based on this, the variation effect pattern that defines the content of the variation effect HE is selected from the plurality of variation effect patterns stored in the variation effect pattern table. The variation effect HE based on the variation effect pattern selected here is executed. In the following step S213, the effect control unit 403 confirms whether the special figure determination information JJ has won any kind of jackpot and a variable effect pattern for performing SP reach hit effect has been selected. If the special figure determination information JJ has been won for any kind of jackpot and the variable effect pattern for performing the SP reach hit effect is selected, the process proceeds from step S213 to step S214 and the processes of steps S214 and S215. On the other hand, while the variable effect content determination processing is ended after executing, the variable effect content determination processing is ended after performing step S215 without performing the processing of step S214 described later (however, the winning operation effect In the case where the variation effect pattern that defines that the variation effect HE that is not included is executed is selected, the process of step S215 is not executed). According to the example illustrated in FIG. 51, when the fluctuation start command indicating that the special figure fluctuation pattern THp_b [2], THp_c [2], or THp_d [2] is received, the process of step S214 is executed. Will be done.

  The effect control unit 403 determines in step S214 whether or not to perform the jackpot finalization effect and, when performing the jackpot finalization effect, the finalization effect execution determination for selecting and determining which kind of jackpot finalization effect to perform at which timing. Processing is performed, and in step S215, a winning operation effect selection process for selecting and determining the type of winning operation effect is performed.

With reference to FIG. 57, the effect control unit 403 executes the final effect execution determination process according to the final effect determination table 3100 held by itself.
In the finalized effect execution determination processing according to the table 3100, the effect control unit 403 uses the random numbers for effect generated by itself,
When the special figure determination information JJ is a jackpot of A or B, it is determined that the jackpot final effect is not executed with the probability of KA ₁ , and with the probability of KA ₂ , KA ₃ , and KA ₄ , respectively. , It is decided to execute the simple accurate production, simple accurate production, and super accurate production,
When the special figure determination information JJ is a special A or special C jackpot, it is determined that the jackpot final effect is not executed with the probability of KA ₅ , and with the probability of KA ₆ , KA ₇ , and KA ₈ , respectively. , It is decided to execute the simple accurate production, simple accurate production, and super accurate production,
When the special figure determination information JJ is a special B or special D jackpot, it is determined that the jackpot final effect is not executed with the probability of KA ₉ , and with the probability of KA ₁₀ , KA ₁₁ , and KA ₁₂ , respectively. , It is decided to execute a simple-probability production, a simple-probability production, and a super-probability production.

Here, "KA ₁ + KA ₂ + KA ₃ + KA ₄ = 1", "KA ₅ + KA ₆ + KA ₇ + KA ₈ = 1" and "KA ₉ + KA ₁₀ + KA ₁₁ + KA ₁₂ = 1", and the probabilities KA _{1 to} KA _{12 to} KA ₁₂ Of the probabilities KA ₃ , KA ₄ and KA ₈ are zero and the other nine probabilities are greater than zero. Numerical examples include, for example, KA ₁ 70%, KA ₂ 30%, KA ₅ 70%, KA ₆ 15%, KA ₇ 15%, KA ₉ 70%, KA ₁₀ 10%, KA ₁₁ Is 10% and KA ₁₂ is 10%. As a matter of course, when the special image determination information JJ is lost, the jackpot finalizing effect is not executed.

  In the fixed production execution determination process according to the table 3100, when it is determined to execute the super-certain precision production, and when there are a plurality of types of super-probability production that the production control unit 403 can execute, which type of super-probability production is performed. It is also decided to execute. For example, as shown in FIG. 53 and FIG. 54, a plurality of types of super certainty effects such as a third special character effect, a rainbow character effect, a rainbow CI effect, and a P-flash effect can be executed as the super certainty effect, so that the effect control unit can be executed. In the case where 403 is configured, it is also determined which kind of super certain effect is to be executed. The same applies to the simple win-win effect and the simple win-win effect.

In the finalized effect execution determination process of step S214, when it is determined to execute any type of jackpot finalized effect, the effect control unit 403 uses the random number for the effect generated by itself, etc., to execute the jackpot finalized effect. Also decide. Any timing during the execution period of the variation effect HE can be determined as the execution timing of the jackpot confirmation effect, but for example, a plurality of candidate timings are previously set within the execution period of the variation effect HE (that is, the variation display period of the special symbol). It is sufficient to set and set any one of the plurality of candidate timings as the execution timing of the jackpot confirming effect by lottery using the random number for effect.
More specifically, for example, when the special figure variation pattern (THp_b [2], THp_c [2], THp_d [2]; see FIG. 51) associated with the execution of the SP reach effect is selected (see FIG. 41). At the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol or the decorative symbol (immediately after the start), during the execution period of the pre-reach notice production, within the period after the execution of the tempai success production and before the start of the SP reach production, during the SP reach. For example, one or more candidate timings may be set within the performance execution period, and the jackpot finalization performance execution timing may be selected and determined from among the plurality of candidate timings.
Further, for example, when the special figure variation pattern (THp_b [1], THp_c [1], THp_d [1]; see FIG. 51) associated with the execution of the normal reach effect is selected (see FIG. 43), the special symbol Or when the decorative pattern starts changing (immediately after the start), within the execution period of the pre-reach notice production, within the period after the execution of the successful tempai production and before the start of the normal reach production, after the start of the normal reach production, and the normal reach For example, one or more candidate timings may be set within a period until the successful effect is executed, and the jackpot finalizing effect execution timing may be selected and determined from among the plurality of candidate timings.

  After these determinations, the effect control unit 403 executes, in the variable effect HE, a jackpot finalizing effect of the type determined by itself at the timing determined by itself.

  With reference to FIG. 58, the effect control unit 403 executes the winning operation effect selection process in accordance with the winning operation effect selection table 3200 held by itself while considering the result of the finalized effect execution determination process. In the winning operation effect selection process, whether or not the jackpot confirmation effect is executed before the winning operation effect is executed is considered. Here, the jackpot confirmation effect executed before the execution of the winning operation effect is particularly referred to as a prior jackpot confirmation effect, and among the prior jackpot confirmation effects, a simple winning effect, a simple certainty effect, and a super- certainty effect are particularly preferable. , Respectively, referred to as advance simple accurate production, advance simple precise production, and pre-exact production.

In the winning operation effect selection process according to the table 3200, the effect control unit 403 uses effect random numbers generated by itself,
When the special figure determination information JJ is lost, the winning operation effect is determined to be button effect or lever effect with probability of KB ₁ or KB ₂ , respectively.
When the special figure determination information JJ has won the big hit of any one of the communication A, the communication B, and the special A to the special D, and the big hit confirmation effect in advance is not executed, the winning operation effect is KB ₃ , KB. _With a probability of ₄ , each is decided to be a button effect and a lever effect,
When the special figure determination information JJ has won the big hit of any one of the communication A, the communication B, and the special A to the special D and the simple simple winning effect is executed in advance, the winning operation effect is KB ₅ , With a probability of KB ₆ , each is decided to be a button effect or lever effect,
When the special figure determination information JJ has won the big hit of any of the communication A, the communication B, and the special A to the special D, and the simple certainty demonstration effect is executed in advance, the winning operation effect is KB ₇ , With a probability of KB ₈ , each is decided to be a button effect or lever effect,
When the special figure determination information JJ has won the jackpot of any one of the communication A, the communication B, and the special A to the special D, and the pre-exact super accurate production is executed, the winning operation production is KB ₉ , With the probability of KB ₁₀ , the button effect and the lever effect are determined respectively.
The winning operation effect determined here is executed as the winning operation effect during the variation effect HE.

Here, “KB ₁ + KB ₂ = 1”, “KB ₃ + KB ₄ = 1”, “KB ₅ + KB ₆ = 1”, “KB ₇ + KB ₈ = 1” and “KB ₉ + KB ₁₀ = 1”, Further, “1> KB ₁ > KB ₃ > KB ₅ > KB ₇ > KB ₉ ≧ 0” and “0 <KB ₂ <KB ₄ <KB ₆ <KB ₈ <KB ₁₀ ≦ 1” are satisfied. “KB ₉ = 0” and “KB ₁₀ = 1” may be satisfied, or “KB ₉ > 0” and “KB ₁₀ <1” may be satisfied. Numerical examples include, for example, KB ₁ , KB ₂ , KB ₃ , KB ₄ , KB ₅ , KB ₆ , KB ₇ , KB ₈ , KB ₉ , KB ₁₀ are 80%, 20%, 40% and 60%, respectively. , 30%, 70%, 20%, 80%, 0%, 100%.

From the above-mentioned expectation calculation formula and the magnitude relationship among the probabilities KB ₁ , KB ₃ , KB ₅ , KB ₇ and KB ₉ and the magnitude relationship among the probabilities KB ₂ , KB ₄ , KB ₆ , KB ₈ and KB ₁₀ and the above-mentioned expectation calculation formula. The degree of expectation of the jackpot associated with the lever effect as the operation effect is higher than the degree of expectation of the jackpot associated with the button effect as the winning operation effect. Further, assuming that the table 3100 of FIG. 57 is used, “1> KB ₁ > KB ₃ > KB ₅ > KB ₇ > KB ₉ ≧ 0” and “0 <KB ₂ <KB ₄ <KB in the table 3200 of FIG. _By setting ₆ <KB ₈ <KB ₁₀ ≦ 1 ”, the probability that the lever effect is executed as the winning operation effect is maximized when the super-precision operation is performed in advance.

Referring to FIG. 59, and more specifically,
When the special figure determination information JJ has won the special B or special D jackpot, the case in which the super-precision operation is executed in advance (corresponding to KB ₁₀ ) is better than the case in which the super-precision operation is not executed in advance. Also, there is a high probability that the winning operation effect will be a lever effect (in other words, the latter case has a higher probability of the winning operation effect being a button effect than the former case). The same thing can be said regardless of the type of jackpot that the special figure determination information JJ has won. That is,
When the special figure determination information JJ has won any of the special jackpots A to D, the case in which the pre-high-precision production is executed in advance (corresponding to KB ₁₀ ) is executed in advance. There is a higher probability that the winning operation effect will be a lever effect than in the case that is not played (in other words, the latter case has a higher probability that the winning operation effect is a button effect than the former case).
When the special figure determination information JJ has won the big hit of any one of the communication A, the communication B, and the special A to the special D, the case (corresponding to KB ₁₀ ) in which the super-precision production is executed in advance is more advance. There is a higher probability that the winning operation effect will be a lever effect than in the case where the super-certain effect effect is not executed. ).

  Since the lever effect is an operation effect with a higher jackpot expectation than the button effect, it is considered that the player watches the SP reach effect while hoping that the lever effect appears in the winning operation effect. Then, when the lever effect actually appears, it is considered that the expectation for the jackpot will swell at a stretch and feel excited. On the other hand, since the super-probability effect suggests the jackpot of the special B or the special D that is most preferable for the player, the player receives the special B or special D jackpot at the time of watching the appearance of the super-probability effect. Being convinced of the occurrence or thinking that a jackpot of special B or special D is likely to occur, watch the SP reach production while looking forward to the big hit game of special B or special D which will be performed from now on. In such a situation, if a low-expectation button effect that frequently appears at the time of a loss is performed as the winning operation effect, the excitement of the entire effect may become a dip and the player's interest may be distracted. In the present embodiment, when the super certain effect is performed before the winning operation effect, the lever effect is selected and executed as the winning operation effect with a probability of 100% or close to 100%, so the player feels in the super certain effect. You can enjoy the winning operation production while keeping the state of excitement.

Further, from the viewpoint of maintaining mood excitement due to the execution of the super-accurate production, the first embodiment is not limited to the pre-determined super-precise production, and when the super-probable production is executed for the special figure determination information JJ. ~ It is good to always set the stop mode of the third decorative pattern to the mode of the 7th doublet pattern (that is, it is good to select the doublet pattern PTN _C7 , PTN _C9 or PTN _{C10 in} Fig. 50).

  The sixth embodiment includes the following Examples EX6_1 to EX6_10, and in Examples EX6_1 to EX6_10, detailed contents and modifications regarding the matters described above in the sixth embodiment will be described. The matters described above in the sixth embodiment are applied to the following Examples EX6_1 to EX6_10 unless otherwise stated and inconsistent, and in each of Examples EX6_1 to EX6_10, conflict with the matters described above in the sixth embodiment. As for matters to be done, the description in each example has priority. Also, as long as there is no contradiction, the matters described in any one of the embodiments EX6_1 to EX6_10 can be applied to any other embodiment (that is, any two or more implementations in a plurality of embodiments. It is possible to combine examples).

――― Example EX6_1 ――――
Example EX6_1 will be described.

  With reference to FIG. 60, the effect control unit 403 according to Example EX6_1 executes the winning operation effect selection process according to the winning operation effect selection table 3220 held by itself, instead of the winning operation effect selection table 3200 of FIG. In the winning operation effect selection process when the table 3220 is used, it is not taken into consideration whether or not the jackpot determination effect is executed before the winning operation effect is executed.

Specifically, in the winning operation effect selection process according to the table 3220, the effect control unit 403 uses a random number for effect generated by itself,
When the special figure determination information JJ is lost, the winning operation effect is determined to be button effect or lever effect with the probability of KC ₁ or KC ₂ , respectively.
When the special drawing determination information JJ is a jackpot of the communication A or the communication B, the winning operation effect is determined to be the button effect and the lever effect with the probability of KC ₃ and KC ₄ , respectively.
When the special figure determination information JJ is a special A or special C jackpot, the winning operation effects are determined to be button effects and lever effects with the probability of KC ₅ and KC ₆ , respectively.
When the special drawing determination information JJ is a special B or special D jackpot, the winning operation effect is determined to be button effect or lever effect with probability of KC ₇ or KC ₈ , respectively.
The winning operation effect determined here is executed as the winning operation effect during the variation effect HE.

Here, “KC ₁ + KC ₂ = 1”, “KC ₃ + KC ₄ = 1”, “KC ₅ + KC ₆ = 1” and “KC ₇ + KC ₈ = 1”, and “1> KC ₁ > KC”. ₃ > KC ₅ > KC ₇ ≧ 0 ”and“ 0 <KC ₂ <KC ₄ <KC ₆ <KC ₈ ≦ 1 ”are satisfied. “KC ₇ = 0” and “KC ₈ = 1” may be satisfied, or “KC ₇ > 0” and “KC ₈ <1” may be satisfied. As examples of numerical values, for example, KC ₁ , KC ₂ , KC ₃ , KC ₄ , KC ₅ , KC ₆ , KC ₇ and KC ₈ are 80%, 20%, 30%, 70%, 20% and 80%, respectively. 10% and 90%.

Based on the magnitude relationship among the probabilities KC ₁ , KC ₃ , KC ₅ and KC ₇ and the magnitude relationship among the probabilities KC ₂ , KC ₄ , KC ₆ and KC ₈ , the expectation degree of the jackpot associated with the lever effect as the winning operation effect Is higher than the jackpot expectation associated with the button effect as the winning operation effect. Also, assuming that the table 3100 of FIG. 57 is used, “1> KC ₁ > KC ₃ > KC ₅ > KC ₇ ≧ 0” and “0 <KC ₂ <KC ₄ <KC ₆ <KC in the table 3220 of FIG. 60. _By setting ₈ ≦ 1 ″, the lever effect is more likely to be executed as the winning operation effect when the advance super-precision operation is executed than when the advance super-precision operation is not executed. The super-probability effect (including the pre-probability probabilistic effect) is executed only when the special B or special D jackpot is won, and when the special B or special D jackpot is won, the winning operation effect is the lever effect. This is because the probability (corresponding to KC ₈ ) is the maximum.

If it is determined in the finalized effect execution determination processing that the super-probable effect is to be executed, the super-probable effect may always be the pre-probable super-probable effect. Then, in Example EX6_1,
In the case where the special figure determination information JJ has won the big hit of any one of the communication A, the communication B, and the special A to the special D, the case where the pre-high-precision production is executed has the pre-high-precision production. The probability that the winning operation effect is the lever effect is higher than that in the case where it is not executed (conversely, the latter case has a higher probability that the winning operation effect is the button effect than the former case).

――― Example EX6_2 ――――
Example EX6_2 will be described.

  With reference to FIG. 61, the effect control unit 403 according to the embodiment EX6_2 executes the winning operation effect selection process according to the winning operation effect selection table 3240 held by itself, instead of the winning operation effect selection table 3200 of FIG. In the winning operation effect selection process when the table 3240 is used, it is not taken into consideration whether or not the jackpot confirmation effect is executed before the winning operation effect is executed.

Specifically, in the winning operation effect selection process according to the table 3240, the effect control unit 403 uses an effect random number generated by itself,
When the special figure determination information JJ is lost, the winning operation effect is determined to be button effect or lever effect with the probability of KD ₁ or KD ₂ , respectively.
When the special-drawing determination information JJ wins the big hit of any one of the through A, the through B, and the special A to the special D, the winning operation is performed with the probability of KD ₃ and KD ₄ , respectively. , Determine the lever production.
The winning operation effect determined here is executed as the winning operation effect during the variation effect HE.

Here, “KD ₁ + KD ₂ = 1” and “KD ₃ + KD ₄ = 1”, and “1 ≧ KD ₁ > KD ₃ > 0” and “0 ≦ KD ₂ <KD ₄ <1” are satisfied. Be done. As a numerical example, for example, KD ₁ , KD ₂ , KD ₃ , and KD ₄ are 80%, 20%, 30%, and 70%, respectively. It is also possible to set “KD ₁ = 1” and “KD ₂ = 0”. When “KD ₁ = 1” and “KD ₂ = 0” are set, the winning operation effect becomes the lever effect only when any kind of jackpot is won.

From the magnitude relationship between the probabilities KD ₁ and KD ₃ and the magnitude relationship between the probabilities KD ₂ and KD ₄ , the expectation degree of the jackpot associated with the lever effect as the winning operation effect is associated with the button effect as the winning operation effect. It is higher than the expected jackpot. The execution of the super-precision operation is limited to the special B or special D jackpot, so the case in which the super-precision operation is executed in advance is more successful than the case in which the super-precision operation is not executed in advance. Is more likely to be a lever effect (in other words, the latter case has a higher probability of a winning operation effect being a button effect than the former case).

――― Example EX6_3 ――――
Example EX6_3 will be described. Although the method of performing the finalized effect execution determination processing first and performing the winning operation effect selection processing in consideration of the processing result has been described above (see FIG. 56), the winning operation effect selection processing is performed first and the processing result is considered. Then, a method of performing the finalized effect execution determination processing may be adopted. The latter method will be described in Example EX6_3.

  Characteristic effect control related to the operation effect will be described with reference to FIG. 61-1. FIG. 61-1 is an operation flowchart of the fluctuating effect content determination processing executed by the effect control unit 403 in response to the reception of the fluctuation start command according to the embodiment EX6_3. However, FIG. 61-1 is a flowchart of a part of the fluctuating effect content determination processing, which focuses on the jackpot finalizing effect and the winning operation effect that can be executed in the fluctuating effect HE, and there are various flowcharts not actually shown in FIG. 61-1. Although other processing is included in the variable effect content determination processing, description of other processing will be omitted here. The variation effect content determination process of FIG. 61-1 includes each process of steps S231 to S238. When the variable effect HE is executed according to the items selected, determined, and set in the process of each step of FIG. 61-1 and the execution of the jackpot final effect is determined, the process of each step of FIG. According to the items that have been selected, determined, and set, the jackpot confirmation effect is executed in the variable effect HE.

  In the variation effect content determination process, when the variation start command is received, the effect control unit 403 analyzes the variation start command in step S231 and determines the result of the special figure determination included in the variation start command in step S232. Based on this, the variation effect pattern that defines the content of the variation effect HE is selected from the plurality of variation effect patterns stored in the variation effect pattern table. The variation effect HE based on the variation effect pattern selected here is executed. In the following step S233, the effect control unit 403 confirms whether or not the variation effect pattern that defines the execution of the SP reach effect is selected for the special figure determination information JJ, and changes that defines the execution of the SP reach effect. If the effect pattern is selected, the process proceeds to step S234, while if not, the process proceeds to step S237. According to the example shown in FIG. 51, when the fluctuation start command indicating that the special figure fluctuation pattern THp_a [4], THp_b [2], THp_c [2] or THp_d [2] is selected is received, the step The process proceeds to S234.

  In step S234, the effect control unit 403 performs a winning operation effect selection process for selecting and determining the type of winning operation effect (details will be described later). After the process of step S234, the process proceeds to step S235.

  In step S235, the effect control unit 403 confirms whether or not the special figure determination information JJ is a big hit, and if the special figure determination information JJ is a jackpot of any kind, After performing the process of step S236, the variation effect content determination process is ended. However, if the special figure determination information JJ is lost, the variation effect content determination process is terminated without performing the process of step S236. In step S236, the effect control unit 403 performs a first finalized effect execution determination process.

  In step S237, the effect control unit 403 confirms whether or not the special-drawing determination information JJ is a big hit, and when the special-drawing determination information JJ is a big hit of any type, After performing the process of step S238, the variation effect content determination process is ended. However, if the special figure determination information JJ is lost, the variation effect content determination process is terminated without performing the process of step S238. In step S238, the effect control unit 403 performs a second finalized effect execution determination process.

  Both the first finalized effect execution determination process of step S236 and the second finalized effect execution determination process of step S238 determine whether or not to perform the jackpot finalized effect, and which kind of jackpot finalized effect when the jackpot finalized effect is performed. This is a process for selecting and deciding whether to perform at timing.

  In the case where the special figure determination information JJ is a big hit and a variation effect pattern that does not include the winning operation effect is selected (that is, according to the example shown in FIG. 51, the special figure variation pattern THp_b [1]). , THp_c [1] or THp_d [1] is selected), the process proceeds to step S238. The second finalized effect execution determination process of step S238 may be the same as the finalized effect execution determination process of step S214 of FIG. 56, that is, the second finalized effect execution determination of step S238 according to the final effect determination table 3100 of FIG. You just have to do the processing.

  When the special figure determination information JJ is a big hit and a variation effect pattern including a winning operation effect is selected (that is, according to the example shown in FIG. 51, the special figure variation pattern THp_b [2], If a fluctuation start command indicating that THp_c [2] or THp_d [2] is selected is received), the process proceeds to step S236.

  The processes of steps S234 and S236 will be collectively described with reference to FIG. The winning operation effect selection process in step S234 is the same as that described in the embodiment EX6_1 or EX6_2, that is, may be performed according to the winning operation effect selection table 3220 or according to the winning operation effect selection table 3240. May be. The tables 3220 and 3240 shown in FIG. 61-2 are the same as those of FIGS. 60 and 61 referred to in the examples EX6_1 and EX6_2.

  When the processes of steps S234 and S236 are executed, in step S234, after determining which of the button effect and the lever effect is to be executed as the winning operation effect according to the table 3220 or 3240, the effect control unit 403 determines in step S236. The first finalized effect execution determination process is performed according to the finalized effect determination table 3300 held by itself. In the first finalized effect execution determination process according to table 3300, the jackpot finalized effects that can be determined to be executed are limited to the prior jackpot finalized effects.

In the first finalized production execution determination process according to the table 3300, the production control unit 403 uses a random number for production generated by itself,
When the special figure determination information JJ is a jackpot of A or B and it is determined that the button effect is executed as the winning operation effect, the jackpot finalizing effect is set in advance with the probability of KG _1. It is determined not to execute, and with the probability of KG ₂ , KG ₃ , and KG ₄ , it is determined to execute a simple pre-exact production in advance, a simple exact production in advance, and a super-exact production in advance, respectively.
If the special figure determination information JJ is a big hit of the communication A or the communication B and it is determined that the lever effect is executed as the winning operation effect, the big hit confirmation effect is set in advance with the probability of KG _5. It is determined not to execute, and with the probability of KG ₆ , KG ₇ , and KG ₈ , it is determined to execute a simple simple accurate production in advance, a simple accurate production in advance, and a super-exact production in advance, respectively.
When the special figure determination information JJ is a special A or special C jackpot and it is determined that the button effect is to be executed as the winning operation effect, the jackpot confirmation effect is set in advance with a probability of KH _1. It is determined not to execute, and with the probability of KH ₂ , KH ₃ , and KH ₄ , it is determined to execute the advance simple accurate production, the advance simple accurate production, and the super-exact production in advance, respectively.
When the special figure determination information JJ is a special A or special C jackpot and it is determined that the lever effect is executed as the winning operation effect, the jackpot finalizing effect is set in advance with a probability of KH _5. It is determined not to execute, and with the probability of KH ₆ , KH ₇ , and KH ₈ , it is determined to execute the simple simple accurate production in advance, the simple accurate production in advance, and the super-exact production in advance, respectively.
When the special figure determination information JJ is a special B or special D jackpot and it is determined that the button effect is to be executed as the winning operation effect, the jackpot confirmation effect is set in advance with a probability of KI _1. It is determined not to perform, and with the probability of KI ₂ , KI ₃ , and KI ₄ , it is determined to perform a simple pre-exact production in advance, a simple exact production in advance, and a super-exact production in advance, respectively.
If the special figure determination information JJ is a special B or special D jackpot and it is determined that the lever effect is to be executed as a winning operation effect, the jackpot finalizing effect is set in advance with a probability of KI _5. decided not to run, and, at the probability of _{KI 6, KI 7, KI 8} , respectively, in advance of a simple shoo production, pre simple確確director, decides to run the pre-super確確director.

Here, as a major premise,
"KG ₁ + KG ₂ + KG ₃ + KG ₄ = 1", "KG ₅ + KG ₆ + KG ₇ + KG ₈ = 1",
"KH ₁ + KH ₂ + KH ₃ + KH ₄ = 1", "KH ₅ + KH ₆ + KH ₇ + KH ₈ = 1",
"KI ₁ + KI ₂ + KI ₃ + KI ₄ = 1", "KI ₅ + KI ₆ + KI ₇ + KI ₈ = 1",
And “KG ₃ = KG ₄ = KG ₇ = KG ₈ = KH ₄ = KH ₈ = 0” holds.
Moreover,
The first inequality “1 ≧ KG ₁ > KG ₅ ≧ 0”,
The second inequality “0 ≦ KG ₂ <KG ₆ ≦ 1”,
The third inequality “1 ≧ KH ₁ > KH ₅ ≧ 0”,
The fourth inequality “0 ≦ KH ₂ <KH ₆ ≦ 1”,
The fifth inequality “0 ≦ KH ₃ <KH ₇ ≦ 1”,
The sixth inequality “1 ≧ KI ₁ > KI ₅ ≧ 0”,
The seventh inequality “0 ≦ KI ₂ <KI ₆ ≦ 1”,
Eighth inequality “0 ≦ KI ₃ <KI ₇ ≦ 1”, and ninth inequality “0 ≦ KI ₄ <KI ₈ ≦ 1”,
Is established.

As a numerical example, for example,
(KG ₁ , KG ₂ ) = (70%, 30%),
(KG ₅ , KG ₆ ) = (40%, 60%),
(KH ₁ , KH ₂ , KH ₃ ) = (70%, 15%, 15%),
(KH ₅ , KH ₆ , KH ₇ ) = (40%, 30%, 30%),
(KI ₁ , KI ₂ , KI ₃ , KI ₄ ) = (70%, 10%, 10%, 10%),
(KI ₅ , KI ₆ , KI ₇ , KI ₈ ) = (40%, 20%, 20%, 20%),
It is said.

Regarding the first inequality, “1 = KG ₁ > KG ₅ = 0” may be set, or “1> KG ₁ > KG ₅ > 0” may be set.
Regarding the third inequality, “1 = KH ₁ > KH ₅ = 0” may be set, or “1> KH ₁ > KH ₅ > 0” may be set.
Regarding the sixth inequality, “1 = KI ₁ > KI ₅ = 0” may be satisfied, or “1> KI ₁ > KI ₅ > 0” may be satisfied.

Regarding the second inequality, “0 = KG ₂ <KG ₆ = 1” may be satisfied, or “0 <KG ₂ <KG ₆ <1” may be satisfied.
Regarding the fourth inequality, “0 = KH ₂ <KH ₆ = 1” may be set, or “0 <KH ₂ <KH ₆ <1” may be set.
Regarding the seventh inequality, “0 = KI ₂ <KI ₆ = 1” may be satisfied, or “0 <KI ₂ <KI ₆ <1” may be satisfied.
Regarding the fifth inequality, “0 = KH ₃ <KH ₇ = 1” may be satisfied, or “0 <KH ₃ <KH ₇ <1” may be satisfied.
Regarding the eighth inequality, “0 = KI ₃ <KI ₇ = 1” may be set, or “0 <KI ₃ <KI ₇ <1” may be set.
Regarding the ninth inequality, “0 = KI ₄ <KI ₈ = 1” may be satisfied, or “0 <KI ₄ <KI ₈ <1” may be satisfied.

With the use of the table 3300, in the case where the special drawing determination information JJ has been won in the big hit of the communication A or the communication B and the winning operation effect is performed in the variation effect HE,
Since “KG ₂ <KG ₆ ”, the case in which the lever effect is executed as the winning operation effect (corresponding to KG ₆ ) is better than the case in which the button effect is executed as the winning operation effect (corresponding to KG ₂ ). There is a high probability that a simple accurate production in advance will be executed, and
Since “KG ₁ > KG ₅ ”, the case in which the button effect is executed as the winning operation effect (corresponding to KG ₁ ) is better than the case in which the lever effect is executed as the winning operation effect (corresponding to KG ₅ ). There is a high probability that advance jackpot confirmation effects (simple winning effects) will not be executed.

  That is to say, conversely, when the special drawing determination information JJ is a big hit of the communication A or the communication B and the winning operation is performed in the variation effect HE, a simple simple winning effect is executed in advance. The probability that the winning operation effect will be the lever effect is higher than the case where the simple simple winning effect is not executed in advance, and the jackpot finalizing effect (the simple winning effect) is not executed in advance in the case where the prior jackpot finalizing effect (simple winning effect) is not executed ( The probability that the winning operation effect is the button effect is higher than that in the case where the simple winning effect) is executed.

With the use of the table 3300, when the special figure determination information JJ is a special A or special C jackpot and the winning operation effect is performed in the variation effect HE,
Since “KH ₂ <KH ₆ ”, the case in which the lever effect is executed as the winning operation effect (corresponding to KH ₆ ) is better than the case in which the button effect is executed as the winning operation effect (corresponding to KH ₂ ). It is highly probable that the simple, accurate production in advance will actually be executed, and
Since “KH ₃ <KH ₇ ”, the case in which the lever effect is executed as the winning operation effect (corresponding to KH ₇ ) is more than the case in which the button effect is executed as the winning operation effect (corresponding to KH ₃ ). There is a high probability that a simple, accurate production in advance will be executed, and
Since “KH ₁ > KH ₅ ”, the case where the button effect is executed as the winning operation effect (corresponding to KH ₁ ) is better than the case where the lever effect is executed as the winning operation effect (corresponding to KH ₅ ). There is a high probability that the prior jackpot confirmation effect (simple winning effect or simple certainty effect) is not executed.

  That is to say, conversely, when the special figure determination information JJ is a special A or special C jackpot and the winning operation effect is performed in the variable effect HE, a simple simple winning effect is executed in advance. Has a higher probability that the winning operation effect will be the lever effect than the case in which the simple simple accuracy effect is not executed in advance, and the case in which the simple accurate accuracy effect is executed in advance is higher than the case in which the simple accurate accuracy effect is not executed in advance. Even if the winning operation production is a lever production, the jackpot confirmation production (simple winning production or simple certainty production) is better in cases where the prior jackpot confirmation production (simple winning production or simple certainty production) is not executed. The probability that the winning operation effect is the button effect is higher than that in the case of being executed.

With the use of the table 3300, in the case where the special figure determination information JJ has been won as a special B or special D jackpot and the winning operation effect is performed in the variable effect HE,
Since “KI ₂ <KI ₆ ”, the case in which the lever effect is executed as the winning operation effect (corresponding to KI ₆ ) is better than the case in which the button effect is executed as the winning operation effect (corresponding to KI ₂ ). There is a high probability that a simple accurate production in advance will be executed, and
Since “KI ₃ <KI ₇ ”, the case in which the lever effect is executed as the winning operation effect (corresponding to KI ₇ ) is more preferable than the case in which the button effect is executed as the winning operation effect (corresponding to KI ₃ ). There is a high probability that a simple, accurate production in advance will be executed, and
Since “KI ₄ <KI ₈ ”, the case in which the lever effect is executed as the winning operation effect (corresponding to KI ₈ ) is better than the case in which the button effect is executed as the winning operation effect (corresponding to KI ₄ ). There is a high probability that pre-exact production will be performed, and
Since “KI ₁ > KI ₅ ”, the case where the button effect is executed as the winning operation effect (corresponding to KI ₁ ) is better than the case where the lever effect is executed as the winning operation effect (corresponding to KI ₅ ). There is a high probability that the prior jackpot confirmation effect (simple winning effect, simple certainty effect or super certainty effect) is not executed.

  That is to say, conversely, when the special figure determination information JJ is a special B or special D jackpot and the winning operation effect is performed in the variable effect HE, a simple simple winning effect is executed in advance. Has a higher probability that the winning operation effect will be the lever effect than the case in which the simple simple accuracy effect is not executed in advance, and the case in which the simple accurate accuracy effect is executed in advance is higher than the case in which the simple accurate accuracy effect is not executed in advance. The probability that the winning operation effect will be the lever effect is higher, and the probability that the winning operation effect will be the lever effect will be higher in the case where the super-precision operation is executed in advance than in the case where the super-precision operation is not executed in advance. If the jackpot confirmation effect (simple winning production, simple certainty production or super certainty production) in advance is not executed, the jackpot confirmation production (simple winning production, simple certainty production or super) The probability that Toraku operation performance than the case that sure performance) is executed becomes the button production increases.

  In the first finalized production execution determination process of step S236, when it is determined to execute the super-probability production, and when there are a plurality of types of super-probability production that the production control unit 403 can execute, which type of super-problem production is performed? It is also decided whether to execute the definite production. For example, as shown in FIG. 53 and FIG. 54, a plurality of types of super certainty effects such as a third special character effect, a rainbow character effect, a rainbow CI effect, and a P-flash effect can be executed as the super certainty effect, so that the effect control unit can be executed. In the case where 403 is configured, it is also determined which kind of super certain effect is to be executed. The same applies to the simple win-win effect and the simple win-win effect.

  When it is determined in the first finalized effect execution determination process of step S236 that a jackpot finalized effect of any type is to be executed, the effect control unit 403 uses the random numbers for the effect generated by the effect control unit 403 to determine the jackpot finalized effect. The execution timing is also determined. The method of determining the execution timing of the jackpot confirmation effect may be the same as that described above, for example, the period within the execution period of the variable effect HE (that is, the variable display period of the special symbol) and before the execution of the winning operation effect. A plurality of candidate timings may be set in advance, and any one of the plurality of candidate timings may be determined as the execution timing of the jackpot finalizing effect by lottery using a random number for effect.

  According to the above-described method in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won, when the lever effect is executed, the prior jackpot final effect is relatively easy to be executed. In other words, if the opposite is considered, it means that the lever effect is relatively easy to be executed when the prior jackpot confirmation effect is executed. It is thought that the mood of the player will rise up at once due to the appearance of the jackpot confirmation production in advance, but if the button production with a low expectation for jackpots appears after the jackpot confirmation production in advance, the mood rises and the player becomes a pit There is a risk that the interest of will be diminished. According to the above-described method in the present embodiment, the lever effect is relatively easy to be executed when the prior jackpot confirmation effect is executed, and thus the mood is raised by the advance jackpot confirmation (the player's mood). It is possible to further excite by the lever production with high expectations.

  However, even if it is possible to replace the inequalities “≧” and “>” with “≦” and “<”, respectively, in any one or more inequalities among the above first, third and sixth inequalities Well, in any one or more inequalities of the above-mentioned second, fourth, fifth and seventh to ninth inequalities, replacing the inequalities “≦” and “<” with “≧” and “>”, respectively. May be possible.

――― Example EX6_4 ――――
Example EX6_4 will be described. The operation effect may be performed in the re-lottery effect shown in FIG. 49. That is, in the re-lottery effect of FIG. 49, the operation effect is executed as the re-lottery effect operation effect after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the re-variation display effect, and within the operation valid period in the re-lottery effect operation effect. When the player inputs a predetermined operation, it is preferable to respond to the input and perform the second-stage interlaced eye temporary stop effect as the operation corresponding effect.

When the mode of the doublet before the re-lottery effect is the second doublet and the mode of the doublet is changed to the third doublet in the re-lottery effect (that is, the doublet pattern PTN _C3 or PTN _{C6 in} FIG. 50). When (is selected), the operation corresponding effect in the re-lottery effect operation effect includes 3 promotion effects,
When the form of the doublet before the re-lottery effect is the 2nd or 3rd, and the form of the doublet is changed to the 7th in the re-lottery effect (that is, the doublet pattern PTN in FIG. 50). The operation corresponding effect in the re-lottery effect operation effect (when _C7 or PTN _C9 is selected) includes 7 promotion effects. When the player does not input a predetermined operation within the operation valid period of the re-lottery effect operation effect, the same effect as the effect that should be performed after the expiration of the operation effective period is performed.

When the SP reach success effect or the normal reach success effect is performed, if the first to third decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the form of the 7th zoro (that is, the Zoro eye pattern PTN _C10 of FIG. 50 is displayed). If selected), the re-lottery effect may be non-executed (therefore, the re-lottery effect operation effect may also be non-executed).

  Referring to FIG. 62, when the first to third decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in the form of the second doublet in the preceding stage zoro eye temporary stop effect, and the re-lottery effect operation effect is performed, the re-lottery effect operation effect is produced. Will be described in detail. The effect control unit 403 can determine whether the re-lottery effect operation effect is a button effect or a lever effect, based on the result of the special figure determination with respect to the special figure determination information JJ.

  Specifically, the effect control unit 403 determines the aspect of the doublet eyes of the first to third decorative symbols in the front-stage double-eye temporary stop production and the second-stage double-eye temporary stop production according to the table 2200 of FIG. Here, as described above, it is assumed that the mode of the doublet of the first to third decorative symbols in the preliminary double-stage provisional stop effect is determined to be the second flatter.

As shown in FIG. 62, in this case, the effect control unit 403 uses the random numbers for effect,
When it is decided to make the aspect of the doublet of the first to third decorative symbols in the second-stage double-eye temporary stop production to the third double-sided, the first-third decorative pattern of the second-stage double-eye temporary stop production It is easier to select the lever operation as the re-lottery effect operation effect than when it is determined to change the mode of No. 2 to the second addition, and
When it is decided to change the form of the doublet of the first to third decorative symbols in the second-stage double-eye temporary stop production to the 7th double-spaced pattern, the first-third decorative pattern of the second-stage double-eye temporary stop production It is preferable that the lever operation is more easily selected as the re-lottery effect operation effect than when it is determined that the mode is set to the third roll. In other words, conversely,
When it is decided to make the aspect of the doublet of the first to third decorative symbols in the second-stage double-eye temporary stop production to the third double-sided, the first-third decorative pattern of the second-stage double-eye temporary stop production Makes it easier to select the button operation as the re-lottery effect operation effect, and
When it is decided to make the aspect of the doublet of the first to third decorative symbols in the second-stage double-eye temporary stop production to the second double-spaced, the first-third decorative pattern of the second-stage double-eye temporary stop production It is better to make it easier to select the button operation as the re-lottery effect operation effect than when it is determined to change the mode to the third roll.

Further, when it is determined that the first to third decorative patterns in the second-stage double-throttle temporary stop production are the second or third doublet, the re-lottery production operation production has a probability of 100%. When it is determined that the button operation is performed, and the form of the doublet of the first to third decorative patterns in the second-stage double-eye temporary stop production is set to 7th, the re-lottery production operation production is 100%. The lever operation may be performed with the probability of.
Alternatively, when it is determined that the form of the doublet of the first to third decorative symbols in the second-stage double-eye temporary stop production is set to the second or third double, the re-lottery production operation production has a probability of 100%. When it is determined that the button operation is performed, and the form of the doublet pattern of the first to third decorative patterns in the second-stage double-drop temporary stop production is set to the seventh roll, the re-lottery production operation production is 30%. The button effect may be performed with a probability of 70% and the lever operation may be performed with a probability of 70%.

  Furthermore or, for example, in the same manner as when the winning operation effect is determined to be either button effect or lever effect according to the table 3200, 3220 or 3240 (see FIG. 58, FIG. 60, FIG. 61), the operation effect for re-lottery effect is effected. It may be determined whether the button production or the lever production is performed. That is, the table 3200, 3220 or 3240 is originally a selection table for the winning operation effect, but according to the table 3200, 3220 or 3240, it is selected whether the operation effect for re-lottery effect is a button effect or a lever effect. And may be determined. For example, in the case of using the table 3200, the probability that the lever effect is executed as the re-lottery effect operation effect is maximized when the pre-exact certainty effect is executed.

――― Example EX6_5 ――――
Example EX6_5 will be described. In Example EX6_5, the probability variation promotion challenge effect will be described. The probability variation promotion challenge effect is an effect that can be executed during the big hit game OU, and is an effect that suggests whether or not the high probability electric support game state will be set after the big hit game OU. The effect control unit 403 can realize the probability variation promotion challenge effect using at least the image display by the image display unit 104.

  With reference to FIG. 63, the probability variation promotion challenge effect can be executed in the case where the first to third decorative symbols are permanently stopped and displayed in the form of the second zoro based on the result of the special symbol determination with respect to the special symbol determination information JJ. is there. In this case, when the special figure determination information JJ is won in any of the special A to special D jackpots, the probability variation promotion challenge production is always executed, and the special figure determination information JJ is the regular A or regular B. When the jackpot is won, the probability variation promotion challenge effect may be executed without fail, and the probability variation promotion challenge effect may or may not be executed. In the case where the first to third decorative symbols are stop-displayed (temporary stop display or main stop display) in the form of the third zero or the seventh zoro based on the result of the special-drawing determination for the special-drawing determination information JJ, At the time when the stop display is performed, the player is shown to be in the high-probability electric power support game state after the big hit game OU, so the probability variation promotion challenge effect during the big hit game OU is not executed.

  As shown in FIG. 64, in the probability variation promotion challenge effect, a probability variation promotion challenge start effect, a probability variation promotion challenge operation effect, and a probability variation promotion result result effect are executed in this order. That is, in the probability variation promotion challenge effect, first, the probability variation promotion challenge start effect that displays and announces that the probability variation promotion challenge effect is performed is executed, and then the operation effect for the probability variation promotion challenge that is an operation effect is executed. If the player inputs a predetermined operation within the operation valid period in the probability variation promotion challenge operation effect, the probability variation promotion challenge result effect is performed as the operation corresponding effect in response to the input, and the operation effective period If there is no input of a predetermined operation by the player, the probability variation promotion challenge result presentation is performed after the expiration of the operation valid period.

When the special figure determination information JJ has won the jackpot A or B, it is suggested that the probability change promotion challenge result production will not be in the high-probability electric power support game state after the jackpot game OU (the jackpot game OU Probability change promotion failure production is executed, which does not suggest that it becomes a stochastic electric power support game state.
When the special figure determination information JJ is a special A or special C jackpot, as a probability variation promotion challenge result production, a probability variation promotion success production that suggests that the jackpot game OU is in a high probability electric support game state is executed. Is
When the special figure determination information JJ is a special B or special D jackpot, as a probability variation promotion challenge result production, it is suggested that the jackpot game OU is in a high probability electric support game state after the jackpot game OU, and the jackpot game OU is 10 The super-probable variation promotion success production that suggests that it will be executed until the round is executed.

  Since the number of rounds of the jackpot game OU of the communication A, communication B, special A and special C is 4, the probability variation promotion challenge production is started before the end timing of the round game of the fourth round (for example, from the second round). It will be executed over the third round). However, a part or all of the execution period of the super-probability variation promotion success effect may overlap with the execution period of the round game of the fifth round.

  Referring to FIG. 65, effect control unit 403 selects and determines which of the button effect and the lever effect is to be executed as the probability variation promotion challenge operation effect, in accordance with table 3400 held by itself.

Specifically, the effect control unit 403 uses the random numbers for effect generated by itself according to the table 3400,
When the special drawing determination information JJ is a big hit of the communication A or the communication B, the probability variation promotion challenge operation effect is determined to be button effect and lever effect with the probability of KE ₁ and KE ₂ , respectively.
When the special drawing determination information JJ has won any of the special A to special D jackpots, the probability variation promotion challenge operation effect has a probability of KE ₃ and KE ₄ for button effect and lever effect, respectively. decide.
The probability variation promotion challenge operation effect determined here is executed as the probability variation promotion challenge operation effect during the jackpot game OU.

Here, “KE ₁ + KE ₂ = 1” and “KE ₃ + KE ₄ = 1” are satisfied, and “1 ≧ KE ₁ > KE ₃ > 0” and “0 ≦ KE ₂ <KE ₄ <1” are satisfied. Be done. As a numerical example, for example, KE ₁ , KE ₂ , KE ₃ , and KE ₄ are 80%, 20%, 30%, and 70%, respectively. “1 = KE ₁ ” and “0 = KE ₂ ” may be set. When “1 = KE ₁ ” and “0 = KE ₂ ”, the lever effect becomes the operation effect for the probability variation promotion challenge only when the high-probability electric power support game state is reached after the jackpot game OU.

  Alternatively, the probability that the lever effect is selected and executed as the operation effect for the probability variation promotion challenge, the special figure determination information JJ is larger than that in the case where the special figure determination information JJ is a big hit of the communication A or the communication B. When the special A or special C jackpot is winning, the special figure determination is higher than when the special figure determination information JJ is a special A or special C jackpot. The content of the operation production for the probability variation promotion challenge may be determined so that the usage information JJ is higher when the special B or special D jackpot is won.

  With the probability control as described above, in the probability variation promotion challenge operation effect, the probability of becoming a high-probability electric support game state after the jackpot game OU is higher when the lever effect is executed than when the button effect is executed. Get higher

  In addition, when the certainty production (including the super-certainty production in advance) is executed in the variation production HE, the certainty variation promotion challenge operation production is not performed during the jackpot game OU, and the certainty production is made in the variation production HE. Only when is not executed, the operation effect for the probability variation promotion challenge may be performed during the jackpot game OU.

――― Example EX6_6 ――――
Example EX6_6 will be described. The effect shown in Example EX6_5 is based on the premise that the gaming machine 100 is configured as a loop machine (based on the gaming state control shown in the basic embodiment being performed; see FIG. 7).

  However, the effect shown in Example EX6_5 can be executed even when the gaming machine 100 is configured as the V loop machine shown in the second embodiment or the VST machine shown in the third embodiment. In this case, in any of the special jackpot game OU of special A to special D, if the V challenge production which is the same production as the probability variation promotion challenge production is executed before the specific round in which the V winning is possible is started. good. Then, in this case, the probability change promotion success effect functions as an effect that suggests that the player will be in the high-probability electric power support game state after the jackpot game OU on the condition of the V winning, and the super probability change promotion success effect is the jackpot on the condition of the V winning. It functions as a production that suggests that the high probability electricity support game state will be entered after the game OU and that the jackpot game OU will be executed up to 10R regardless of the V winning.

――― Example EX6_7 ――――
Example EX6_7 will be described. In Example EX6_7, round promotion challenge effects will be described. The round promotion challenge effect is an effect that can be executed during the jackpot game OU and suggests whether or not the jackpot game OU continues beyond the first stage to the second stage. The first stage corresponds to the final round of special A or special C, and the second stage corresponds to the final round of special B or special D. The effect control unit 403 can realize the round promotion challenge effect using at least the image display by the image display unit 104.

  Referring to FIG. 66, in the case where the first to third decorative symbols are permanently stopped and displayed in the form of the third zoro based on the result of the special symbol determination with respect to the special symbol determination information JJ, the round promotion challenge effect can be executed. is there. In this case, if the special figure determination information JJ is a special B or special D jackpot, the round promotion challenge production is always executed, and the special figure determination information JJ is a special A or special C jackpot. When winning, the round promotion challenge effect may be executed without fail, and the round promotion challenge effect may or may not be executed. In the case where the first to third decorative symbols are stopped and displayed (temporary stop display or main stop display) in the form of the 7th bit based on the result of the special drawing determination for the special drawing determination information JJ, the stop display is performed. Since it is shown to the player that the jackpot game OU will be performed up to the second stage at the time of being hit, the round promotion challenge production during the jackpot game OU is not executed.

  As shown in FIG. 67, in the round promotion challenge effect, a round promotion challenge start effect, a round promotion challenge operation effect, and a round promotion challenge result effect are executed in this order. That is, in the round promotion challenge effect, first, a round promotion challenge start effect that displays and notifies that the round promotion challenge effect is performed is executed, and thereafter, an operation effect for round promotion challenge that is an operation effect is executed. When a player inputs a predetermined operation within the operation valid period in the round promotion challenge operation production, in response to the input, the round promotion challenge result production is performed as the operation corresponding production, and the operation valid period If there is no input of a predetermined operation by the player, the round promotion challenge result production is performed after the expiration of the operation valid period.

When the special map determination information JJ has won the special A or special C jackpot, it suggests that the jackpot game OU will end by the first stage as a round promotion challenge result production (the jackpot game OU is the first It does not suggest to continue to the second stage beyond the stage) Round promotion failure production is executed,
When the special figure determination information JJ has won the special B or special D jackpot, the round promotion that suggests that the jackpot game OU will continue beyond the first stage to the second stage as a round promotion challenge result presentation. Success production is executed.

  Since the number of rounds of the special A and special C jackpot game OU is 4, the round promotion challenge effect is started before the end timing of the round game of the fourth round (for example, executed from the second round to the third round). ). However, a part or all of the execution period of the round promotion success effect may overlap with the execution period of the round game of the fifth round.

  Referring to FIG. 68, effect control unit 403 selects and determines which of the button effect and the lever effect is to be executed as the round promotion challenge operation effect, according to table 3500 held by itself.

Specifically, the effect control unit 403 uses the random numbers for effect generated by itself according to the table 3500,
When the special drawing determination information JJ has won the special A or special C jackpot, the operation effects for the round promotion challenge are determined to be button effects and lever effects with the probabilities of KF ₁ and KF ₂ , respectively.
When the special drawing determination information JJ is a special B or special D jackpot, the round promotion challenge operation effect is determined to be button effect or lever effect with a probability of KF ₃ or KF ₄ , respectively.
The round promotion challenge operation effect determined here is executed as the round promotion challenge operation effect in the jackpot game OU.

Here, “KF ₁ + KF ₂ = 1” and “KF ₃ + KF ₄ = 1”, and “1 ≧ KF ₁ > KF ₃ > 0” and “0 ≦ KF ₂ <KF ₄ <1” are satisfied. Be done. As a numerical example, for example, KF ₁ , KF ₂ , KF ₃ , and KF ₄ are 80%, 20%, 30%, and 70%, respectively. “1 = KF ₁ ” and “0 = KF ₂ ” may be set. When “1 = KF ₁ ” and “0 = KF ₂ ”, the lever effect becomes the round promotion challenge operation effect only when the special B or special D jackpot game OU is executed.

  By the probability control as described above, in the operation promotion for the round promotion challenge, the jackpot game OU goes beyond the first stage to the second stage when the lever production is performed than when the button production is executed. The probability of continuing will increase.

  In addition, when the super-probable effect (including the pre-probable super-probable effect) is executed in the variable effect HE, the operation effect for the round promotion challenge is not performed during the jackpot game OU, and the super-problem effect is superfluous in the variable effect HE. Only when the certainty effect (including the pre-exactly certainty effect) is not executed, the round promotion challenge operation effect may be performed during the jackpot game OU.

――― Example EX6_8 ――――
Example EX6_8 will be described. The production shown in Example EX6_7 is performed when the gaming machine 100 is configured as the V loop machine shown in the second embodiment, the VST machine shown in the third embodiment, or the ST machine shown in the fourth embodiment. Even if the gaming machine 100 is configured as a V loop machine, a VST machine, or an ST machine, the jackpot game OU of any one of special A to special D can be performed by the method shown in the embodiment EX6_7. The round promotion challenge production should be executed when is performed.

――― Example EX6_9 ――――
Example EX6_9 will be described. The method described above as a method for determining whether the winning operation effect is the button effect or the lever effect is the method for determining whether the operation effect other than the winning operation effect in the variable effect HE is the button effect or the lever effect. It can be used as.

  That is, for example, in the fluctuating effect HE, if the winning operation effect is performed after the execution of the super certain effect, and if the winning operation effect is performed without executing the super certain effect, the probability of the winning operation effect being a lever operation is different. Although the method for performing the above is described above, this method may be applied to a specific operation effect different from the winning operation effect in the variable effect HE. In this case, in the fluctuating effect HE, the lever operation is a specific operation effect depending on whether a specific operation effect is performed after execution of the super-accuracy effect or when a specific operation effect is performed without executing the super-accuracy effect. The probabilities will be different.

――― Example EX6_10 ――――
Example EX6_10 will be described. The effect control unit 403 may be capable of executing a plurality of types of operation effects having different effect modes, including the first operation effect and the second operation effect. The button effect and the lever effect described above are examples of a first operation effect and a second operation effect which are different in effect modes.

  The operation means for receiving an operation from the player may be different from each other in two or more operation effects, or may be common to each other. That is, for example, when the first operation effect and the second operation effect are the button effect and the lever effect, the operation means for receiving an operation from the player is different between the first operation effect and the second operation effect (the first operation effect and the second operation effect). (In the 1-operation effect, the operation means is the effect button 121, and in the second operation effect, the operation means is the effect lever 127), but the operation means that is operated by the player is between the first operation effect and the second operation effect. And may be common to each other.

  When the operation means for receiving an operation from the player is different between the first operation effect and the second operation effect, the operation means for receiving the operation input in the first operation effect and the operation input in the second operation effect are received. The operating means is arbitrary as long as they are different operating means, and is not limited to a button and a lever, and may be a dial, a touch panel, a gun trigger-like switch, a sword-shaped pushing operation means, or the like.

  Some examples of the case where the operation means for receiving an operation from the player are common to the first operation effect and the second operation effect will be described below.

The first configuration according to the embodiment EX6_10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 (a) and 69 (b).
In the first configuration according to Example EX6_10, the effect button 121 is an operation unit that can be in a normal state or a protruding state under the control of the effect control unit 403. In the projecting state, the effect button 121 is projected to the upper side with reference to the normal state. Among the button operations, the operation of pressing the effect button 121 in the normal state is particularly referred to as a normal button operation, and the operation of pressing the effect button 121 in the protruding state is particularly referred to as a protruding button operation. In the projecting button operation, the effect button 121 is pressed more than in the normal button operation. An operation effect that prompts input of a normal button operation as a predetermined operation is a first operation effect, and an operation effect that prompts input of a protruding button operation as a predetermined operation is a second operation effect (an operation effect instead of a lever effect). ) Can be.

  Referring to FIG. 70A, in the operation effect that prompts the normal button operation to be input as the predetermined operation, the operation input promotion image 3710 is used as an image that prompts the player to input the normal button operation to the effect button 121 in the normal state. May be displayed on the image display unit 104. At this time, the effect control unit 403 sets the effect button 121 to the normal state. The operation input promotion image 3710 includes at least a normal button image 3711 that is an image imitating the effect button 121 in the normal state, and an effective period image 3712 indicating the operation effective period of the effect button 121 in the normal state and an input of the normal button operation. It may further include a character image 3713 of the indicated character.

  Referring to FIG. 70B, in the operation effect that prompts the user to input the protrusion button operation as the predetermined operation, the operation input promotion image 3720 is an image that prompts the player to input the protrusion button operation to the effect button 121 in the protrusion state. May be displayed on the image display unit 104. At this time, the effect control unit 403 sets the effect button 121 to the protruding state (however, after the operation of the protruding button, the effect button 121 returns to the normal state). The operation input promotion image 3720 includes at least a projecting button image 3721 that is an image that imitates the projecting button 121 in the projecting state, and displays the valid period image 3722 indicating the operation valid period of the projecting button 121 in the projecting state and the projecting button operation input. It may further include a character image 3723 of the character to be instructed.

  The second configuration according to the embodiment EX6_10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 (a) and 71 (b). In the second configuration of the embodiment EX6_10, the continuous hitting operation and the long-pressing operation are used as the operations on the effect button 121. The continuous hit operation is an operation in which a unit operation of pressing the effect button 121 is repeated a plurality of times. The long press operation is an operation of continuously pressing the effect button 121 for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) or more. An operation effect that prompts the user to input the continuous hit operation as the predetermined operation can be the first operation effect, and an operation effect that prompts the long press operation to be input as the predetermined operation can be the second operation effect (or The reverse is also possible).

  With reference to FIG. 71 (a), in the operation effect that prompts the player to input the continuous hit operation as the predetermined operation, the operation input promotion image 3730 is displayed on the image display unit as an image that prompts the player to input the continuous hit operation to the effect button 121. It may be displayed in 104. The operation input promotion image 3730 includes at least a continuous-stroke button image 3731 that is an image that imitates the effect button 121, an effective period image 3732 that indicates the operation effective period of the effect button 121, and a character image of a character that instructs input of a continuous-stroke operation. 3733 may further be included.

  With reference to FIG. 71 (b), in the operation effect that prompts the user to input the long-press operation as the predetermined operation, the operation input promotion image 3740 is displayed as an image that prompts the player to input the long-press operation to the effect button 121. It may be displayed on the section 104. The operation input promotion image 3740 includes at least a long press button image 3741 that is an image imitating the effect button 121, an effective period image 3742 indicating the operation effective period of the effect button 121, and a character image of a character instructing the input of the long press operation. 3743 may further be included.

  As shown in FIG. 72, the display of the repeated hit button image 3731 includes, for example, the display of a moving image in which it appears as if the button on the image represented by the repeated hit button image 3731 is hit repeatedly. The display of the long press button image 3741 does not include the display of such a moving image. Therefore, also considering the character images 3733 and 3743, the player can easily determine whether the operation instructed to input is the continuous hit operation or the long press operation.

  In addition, a button image based on red that imitates the effect button 121 in the second operation effect is used in the second operation effect while using the common effect button 121 as the operation means that receives the input of the predetermined operation in the first operation effect and the second operation effect. While displaying a red effect button image), in the first operation effect, a button image based on white imitating the effect button 121 (a button image to which a red effect is not applied) is displayed. May be.

  A third configuration according to the embodiment EX6_10 will be described with reference to FIG. In the third configuration according to the example EX6_10, the button operation prompting effect (FIG. 16A) of the button effect as the first operation effect is the before-operation button image simulating the effect button 121 before the button operation is input. 3751 and a post-operation button image 3752 different from the pre-operation button image 3751 and an after-operation button image 3752 simulating the effect button 121 after the button operation is input are alternately and repeatedly displayed, and the second operation is included. The lever operation prompting effect (FIG. 16B) of the lever effect as the effect is different from the before-operation lever image 3761 and the before-operation lever image 3761, which is different from the before-operation lever image 3761 that imitates the effect lever 127 before the lever operation is input. A lever animation that alternately and repeatedly displays a post-operation lever image 3762 that imitates the effect lever 127 after the operation is input. It contains ® emission display. Information related to button operation (how to operate the effect button 121 and what to press the effect button 121) is transmitted to the player in an easy-to-understand manner by the button animation display, and information related to lever operation (effect lever 127 is displayed by the lever animation display. The way of operating and the effect that the effect lever 127 should be pulled) are transmitted to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. However, the button animation display is not performed in the situation where the effect button 121 is in the projecting state when the button operation prompting effect is performed (in the situation where the input of the projecting button operation is prompted), but in such a case here. Ignore.

  In the button effect, when there is a button operation input within the operation valid period, the button animation display is terminated in response to the input and the operation corresponding effect is executed, and there is no button operation input within the operation valid period. In this case, the button animation display ends when the operation valid period expires. Similarly, in the lever effect, when a lever operation is input within the operation valid period, the lever animation display is terminated in response to the input, and the operation corresponding effect is executed, and the lever operation input is performed within the operation effective period. If there is not, the lever animation display is terminated when the operation valid period expires.

  Then, in the third configuration according to the embodiment EX6_10, when the winning operation effect is executed in the variable effect HE, even when the prior jackpot final effect is executed in the variable effect HE, the prior jackpot final effect is changed. Even if it is not executed, the button animation is displayed in the button operation prompting effect when the button effect is performed as the winning operation effect, and the lever operation prompting effect is performed when the lever effect is performed as the winning operation effect. Lever animation display shall be performed. The prior jackpot confirmation effect here is a prior simple winning probability effect, a prior simple winning probability effect, or a preceding super- certainty effect.

  Consider a virtual game machine provided for comparison with the third configuration according to Example EX6_10. In the virtual game machine, when the button production is performed in the winning operation production after the prior jackpot confirmation production (especially the super-precise production in advance) is executed, the button animation is displayed in the button operation prompting production. In addition, when the lever effect is performed, the lever animation is displayed in the lever operation prompting effect, and the button is used in the winning operation effect without executing the jackpot confirmation effect in advance (especially the super-precise effect effect in advance). It is assumed that when the effect is performed, the button stillness is displayed by the button operation prompting effect, and when the lever effect is performed, the lever stillness display is performed by the lever operation prompting effect. The button still display is a display different from the button animation display and is a fixed display of a still image imitating the effect button 121. The lever still display is a display different from the lever animation display, and is a fixed display of a still image simulating the effect lever 127.

  Then, although the jackpot confirmation effect in advance (especially, the super-certain accuracy effect in advance) is executed in the virtual game machine, the player who plays the game in the virtual game machine misses the jackpot confirmation effect in advance by looking aside. Then, when I saw the button animation display or the lever animation display, I realized that I had missed the rare advance jackpot confirmation production (especially the super accurate confirmation production in advance), and I lost the rare experience. It is thought to be frustrating. On the other hand, in the third configuration according to the embodiment EX6_10, the button animation display or the lever animation display is executed in the winning operation effect regardless of whether or not the prior jackpot determination effect (in particular, the super-high-accuracy effect in advance) is executed. Therefore, there is no possibility of causing the player to feel the above-mentioned frustration (it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being distracted).

  The third configuration according to the embodiment EX6_10 has been described on the assumption that the operation means for receiving the operation from the player is different between the first operation effect and the second operation effect. However, the operation means for receiving the operation from the player is explained. The method according to the third configuration can be applied even when the first operation effect and the second operation effect are common to each other.

<< Seventh Embodiment >>
A seventh embodiment of the gaming machine 100 will be described.

  Refer to FIG. The effect control unit 403 may execute the lever certain effect in the variable effect HE for the special figure determination information JJ. Lever probability production, if the jackpot game is executed based on the result of the special figure determination for the special figure determination information JJ (that is, if the special figure determination information JJ is a big hit) after the jackpot game This is an effect that suggests that the game is controlled in the high-probability game state (specifically, the high-probability electric support game state). Due to the characteristics of the leverage confirmation effect, the leverage confirmation effect can be executed when the special figure determination information JJ is lost or when the probability variation jackpot is won. When JJ normally wins the jackpot, the leverage confirmation effect is not executed.

  That is, the effect control unit 403, as shown in FIG. 73 (a), based on the result of the special figure determination with respect to the special figure determination information JJ, when the special figure determination information JJ is a normal jackpot, the special figure determination is performed. There is no need to execute the leverage confirmation effect on the usage information JJ, and if the bonus drawing determination information JJ is a loss or a probability variation jackpot, the leverage confirmation effect is executed on the bonus image determination information JJ. I have something to do.

  FIG. 73 (b) shows an example of the leverage confirmation effect. In the example of FIG. 73 (b), the lever certain effect is realized by displaying a specific image on the image display unit 104. The effect control unit 403 may be capable of executing a plurality of types of leverage certain effects, and is now any of the plurality of types of leverage certain effects, and is during the execution period of the variable effect HE (that is, the special figure determination information JJ. Attention is paid to a certain leverage certain effect RK that can be executed during the execution period of the variable display of the special symbol based on the determination of the special symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 73 (c), the effect control unit 403 executes the variable effect HE on the special-drawing determination information JJ only when the special-drawing determining information JJ is a loss or if the winning is a probability variation jackpot. The lever positive effect RK can be executed at a specific timing during the period.

  On the other hand, as described with reference to FIG. 52 and the like, the effect control unit 403 may execute the jackpot confirming effect when the special figure determination information JJ is winning the jackpot.

  As shown in FIG. 73 (d), the effect control unit 403, based on the result of the special figure determination with respect to the special figure determination information JJ, when the special figure determination information JJ has won the probability variation jackpot, the variation effect. During HE, the leverage certain effect RK may be executed at a certain timing 4110, and the jackpot finalizing effect may be executed at a subsequent timing 4120. In such a flow of production, the expectation for the probable variation jackpot (expectation of the player) increased in the leverage confirmation production RK turns into a conviction in the subsequent jackpot confirmation production, and the mood is greatly raised. Improvement is achieved. The jackpot confirming effect at the timing 4120 may be a simple winning effect or a certain accuracy effect, and may be a super-determining effect when the special figure determination information JJ wins the special B or the special D jackpot. . Of course, since any effect is executed over a finite time, it is understood that the execution timing of a certain effect is a concept having a time length, or the execution start timing of the effect or It is understood to refer to the execution end timing, or to refer to the period from the execution start timing to the execution end timing of the effect.

  In this way, the leverage confirmation effect plays a role of encouraging a sense of expectation for the probability variation jackpot and enlivening the game, but when the gaming machine 100 is configured to be able to execute both the leverage confirmation effect and the jackpot finalization effect, they are executed. Some control is required. This will be described.

  FIG. 74 shows an outline of the lever certainty effect restriction control executed by the effect control unit 403. Lever probability production restriction control, when the big hit decision production is executed at a certain timing 4210 during the variable production HE based on the result of the special diagram determination for the special image determination information JJ, the leverage certain production RK is executed after the timing 4210. This is a control for prohibiting the execution (that is, the lever certain effect RK is not executed). The leverage confirmation effect RK fuels the player's expectation by suggesting that a jackpot will result in a high-probability game state. However, it is already recognized by the player that a jackpot confirmation effect will appear and become a jackpot. This is because, if agitation occurs due to the leverage confirmation effect RK after being played, the player may feel redundant annoyance and feel annoyed. By the above-described lever certainty effect restriction control, there is less possibility that the redundant agitation is eliminated and the interest of the game is distracted (conversely, the interest of the game is improved).

  The big hit confirmation effect at the timing 4210 may be a simple winning effect, or may be a certain accuracy effect when the special figure determination information JJ has won a certainty variation jackpot. Further, the jackpot confirmation effect at the timing 4210 may be a simple certainty effect when the special figure determination information JJ has won any of the special effects A to D, and the special figure determination information. When JJ has won the special B or special D jackpot, the super accurate production may be performed. In addition, when the special figure determination information JJ is a normal jackpot, the leverage definite effect RK is not executed in the variable effect HE without depending on the leverage definite effect restriction control.

  FIG. 75 shows an outline of the fixed production restriction control executed by the production control unit 403. The fixed production restriction control, when it is determined to execute the leverage certain production RK at a certain timing 4220 during the variable production HE based on the result of the special image determination on the special image determination information JJ, the timing in the variable production HE. It is a control that prohibits execution of the jackpot finalization effect before 4220 (that is, does not execute the jackpot finalization effect). The fixed effect limit control can also achieve the same effect as the lever positive effect limit control.

  The jackpot finalized production, which is prohibited from being executed at a timing before the timing 4220 by the finalized production limit control, includes a simple winning production, a simple winning production, and an ultra-probable production. Of course, when the special figure determination information JJ is a loss, the jackpot final effect is not executed without resorting to the final effect limit control. When the special figure determination information JJ is a big hit, and the execution of the leverage certain effect is determined, the fixed effect restriction control effectively functions.

The seventh embodiment includes the following examples EX7_1 to EX7_15, and in the examples EX7_1 to EX7_15, detailed contents and modifications regarding the matters described above in the seventh embodiment will be described. The matters described above in the seventh embodiment are applied to the following Examples EX7_1 to EX7_15 unless otherwise stated and inconsistent, and in each of Examples EX7_1 to EX7_15, conflict with the matters described above in the seventh embodiment. As for matters to be done, the description in each example has priority. Also, as long as there is no contradiction, the matters described in any one of the embodiments EX7_1 to EX7_15 can be applied to any other embodiment (that is, any two or more implementations in a plurality of embodiments. It is possible to combine examples).
In each of the embodiments described below, unless otherwise specified, at least one of the leverage confirmation effect restriction control and the finalization confirmation restriction control can be applied, and the leverage confirmation effect restriction control is also applied when the leverage confirmation effect is to be executed. Occasionally, the execution of the relevant leverage confirmation effect after the jackpot confirmation production may be prohibited, and when the confirmation production restriction control is applied even when the jackpot confirmation production is to be executed, the jackpot confirmation production before the leverage confirmation production is performed. Execution of production may be prohibited.

――― Example EX7_1 ――――
Example EX7_1 will be described.

  FIG. 76 is an operation flowchart of the variation effect content determination processing executed by the effect control unit 403 in response to the receipt of the variation start command. However, FIG. 76 is a part of the variable effect content determination processing which is an operation flowchart suitable for realizing the leverage certain effect restriction control and which focuses on the jackpot confirmation effect and the leverage certain effect that can be executed in the variable effect HE. It is a flowchart of. Actually, various other processes not shown in FIG. 76 are included in the variable effect content determination process, but the description of the other processes will be omitted here. The variation effect content determination process of FIG. 76 includes the processes of steps S311 to S322. When the variable effect HE is executed in accordance with the items selected, determined, and set in the processing of each step of FIG. 76, and the jackpot confirmation effect and the lever certain effect are determined to be executed, the process of each step of FIG. 76 is performed. In accordance with the items selected, determined, and set as described above, the jackpot finalizing effect and the lever certainty effect are executed in the variation effect HE.

  In the variation effect content determination process, when the variation start command is received, the effect control unit 403 analyzes the variation start command in step S311, and determines the result of the special figure determination included in the variation start command in step S312. Based on this, the variation effect pattern that defines the content of the variation effect HE is selected from the plurality of variation effect patterns stored in the variation effect pattern table. The variation effect HE based on the variation effect pattern selected here is executed. In the following step S313, the effect control unit 403 confirms whether or not the special figure determination information JJ is a big hit. When the special figure determination information JJ is a big hit, the process proceeds from step S313 to step S314, but when the special figure determination information JJ is a loss, it is determined that the big hit finalizing effect is not executed. Then, the process proceeds from step S313 to step S322.

  In step S314, the effect control unit 403 performs a finalized effect execution determination process for selecting and deciding whether or not to perform the big hit finalized effect and, in the case of performing the big hit finalized effect, what kind of big hit finalized effect to perform. . The selection and determination method here may be the same as that described above. For example, according to the table 3100 of FIG. 57, whether or not to perform the jackpot finalization effect, and when performing the jackpot finalization effect, what kind of jackpot. Select and decide whether to perform the finalized effect. In the finalized effect execution determination process in step S314, when it is determined to execute the super-probability effect, and when there are a plurality of types of super-probability effects that the effect control unit 403 can execute, which kind of super-probability is determined. It is also decided to execute the performance. For example, as shown in FIG. 53 and FIG. 54, a plurality of types of super certainty effects such as a third special character effect, a rainbow character effect, a rainbow CI effect, and a P-flash effect can be executed as the super certainty effect, so that the effect control unit can be executed. In the case where 403 is configured, it is also determined which kind of super certain effect is to be executed. The same applies to the simple win-win effect and the simple win-win effect.

  Even if it is determined to execute the big hit finalized effect, it is not determined until the execution timing of the big hit finalized effect at the stage of step S314. After the process of step S314, the process proceeds to step S315.

  In step S315, it is checked whether or not it is determined to execute the jackpot confirmation effect in step S314. If it is determined in step S314 to execute the jackpot confirmation effect, the process proceeds to step S316. Advances to step S323. In step S323, it is checked whether or not the special-drawing determination information JJ has won the probability variation jackpot. If the special-drawing determination information JJ has won the probability variation jackpot, the process proceeds to step S322, while When it is not (that is, when the special figure determination information JJ is a normal jackpot), it is determined not to perform the lever probability production, and then the variation production content determination processing is ended.

  In step S316, the effect control unit 403 sets one of the timings during the execution period of the variable effect HE as the execution timing TP of the jackpot finalizing effect while considering the selection result of the variable effect pattern. The timing TP corresponds to the timing 4120 in FIG. 73 (d) or the timing 4210 in FIG. 74.

Any timing during the execution period of the variation effect HE can be set (determined) to the execution timing TP of the jackpot finalization effect, for example, a plurality of within the execution period of the variation effect HE (that is, the variation display period of the special symbol) The candidate timing may be set in advance, and any one of the plurality of candidate timings may be determined as the jackpot finalizing production execution timing TP by lottery using the production random number.
More specifically, for example, when the special figure variation pattern (THp_b [2], THp_c [2], THp_d [2]; see FIG. 51) associated with the execution of the SP reach effect is selected (see FIG. 41). At the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol or the decorative symbol (immediately after the start), during the execution period of the pre-reach notice production, within the period after the execution of the tempai success production and before the start of the SP reach production, during the SP reach. For example, one or more candidate timings may be set in advance during the production execution period, and the jackpot finalization production execution timing TP may be selected and determined from among the plurality of candidate timings.
Further, for example, when the special figure variation pattern (THp_b [1], THp_c [1], THp_d [1]; see FIG. 51) associated with the execution of the normal reach effect is selected (see FIG. 43), the special symbol Or when the decorative pattern starts changing (immediately after the start), within the execution period of the pre-reach notice production, within the period after the execution of the successful tempai production and before the start of the normal reach production, after the start of the normal reach production, and the normal reach For example, one or more candidate timings may be set before the success effect is executed, and the jackpot finalizing effect execution timing TP may be selected and determined from among the plurality of candidate timings.

  In step S317 subsequent to step S316, it is checked whether or not the special-drawing determination information JJ has won the probability variation jackpot. In step S317, if the special figure determination information JJ has won the probability variation jackpot, the process proceeds to step S318, but if not (that is, if the special figure determination information JJ has won the normal jackpot). , And decides not to execute the leverage probabilistic effect, and then ends the variable effect content determination processing.

  In step S318, the effect control unit 403 sets the period before the timing TP in the execution period of the variable effect HE as the leverage certain effect executable period, and then proceeds to step S319. On the other hand, in step S322 which can be shifted from step S313 or S323, the effect control unit 403 sets the entire execution period of the variable effect HE to the lever certain effect executable period, and then proceeds to step S319. However, in step S322, a specific period within the execution period of the variable effect HE may be excluded from the leverage certain effect executable period. The specific period to be excluded includes a period after the timing at which the first to third decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in a doublet or non-doublet pattern, such as a period immediately before the stop of variation of the special symbol.

  In step S <b> 319, the effect control unit 403 performs the lever certainty effect execution determination processing for selecting and deciding whether or not to perform the certainty certainty effect and, in the case of performing the certainness of leverage, the type of the certainty certainty effect. To do. These selections and decisions may be realized by lottery using random numbers for presentation. The effect control unit 403 can execute the lottery based on the leverage certain effect execution determination table. The lever certainty effect execution determination table in the case where there are first and second lever certainty effects as the certainty certainty effects will be described. Each of the first and second lever certainty effects here corresponds to the certainty certainty effect RK of FIG. 73 to FIG. 75 which is controlled to be executed by the certaintying leverage effect limiting control.

  When the leverage certainty effect execution determination process is performed using the leverage certainty effect execution determination table 4100 of FIG. 77A, the execution probability of the first leverage certainty effect (that is, the probability that the first leverage certainty effect is determined to be executed). ), The execution probability of the second leverage certain effect (that is, the probability that the second leverage certain effect is determined to be executed) is 2% and 2%, respectively, and the probability that the leverage certain effect is not executed ( That is, the probability of determining that the leverage certain effect is not executed is 96%.

  The leverage certain effect execution determination process may be performed using the leverage certain effect execution determination table 4120 of FIG. 77 (b). In this case, if the special figure determination information JJ is a loss, the execution probability of the first leverage confirmation effect and the execution probability of the second leverage confirmation effect are 2% and 2%, respectively, while If the probability of non-execution of the probability effect is 96%, and the special figure determination information JJ has won the probability variation jackpot, the probability of execution of the first leverage probability effect and the probability of execution of the second leverage probability effect are , And 25% and 25%, respectively, while the probability of non-execution of the leverage definite effect is 50%. As described above, when the table 4120 is used, the probability of executing the leverage probabilistic effect is higher when the probability variation jackpot is won than when the special figure determination information JJ is lost.

  It progresses to step S320 after step S319. In step S320, it is checked whether or not the execution of the leverage confirmation effect has been determined. If it is determined that the leverage confirmation effect is to be executed, the processing of step S321 is performed and then the variation effect content determination processing is ended, while When it is determined that the definite effect is not executed, the variable effect content determination process is ended as it is.

  In step S321, the effect control unit 403 considers the selection result of the variable effect pattern and sets any timing belonging to the lever certainty effect executable period set in step S318 or S322 to the execution timing of the certainty confirmation. Set to TQ. Similar to the method of setting the execution timing TP of the jackpot confirming effect in step S316, for example, any one of a plurality of predetermined candidate timings may be set as the execution timing TQ of the leverage certain effect. However, the candidate timings that do not belong to the leverage certain effect executable period are excluded from the candidates of the execution timing TQ of the leverage certain effect.

  In the operation flowchart of FIG. 76, when it is determined to execute the jackpot finalization effect, the lever certainty effect executable period is set before the execution timing TP of the jackpot finalization effect (in other words, after the timing TP. By prohibiting the execution timing of the certain effect from being set), the lever certain effect limit control is realized. When the process of step S321 is executed after the process of step S316, the timings TQ and TP correspond to the timings 4110 and 4120 of FIG. 73 (d), respectively.

――― Example EX7_2 ――――
Example EX7_2 will be described.

  FIG. 78 is an operation flowchart of the variation effect content determination processing executed by the effect control unit 403 in response to the reception of the variation start command. However, FIG. 78 is an operation flowchart suitable for realizing the fixed effect restriction control, and is a part of the variable effect content determination processing in which attention is paid to the jackpot fixed effect and the lever probability effect that can be executed in the variable effect HE. It is a flowchart. Actually, various other processes not shown in FIG. 78 are included in the variable effect content determination process, but the description of the other processes will be omitted here. The variation effect content determination process of FIG. 78 includes the processes of steps S341 to S352. When the variable effect HE is executed according to the items selected, determined, and set in the processing of each step of FIG. 78, and the jackpot finalized effect and the lever certainty effect are determined to be executed, the process of each step of FIG. 78 is performed. In accordance with the items selected, determined, and set as described above, the jackpot finalizing effect and the lever certainty effect are executed in the variation effect HE.

  In the variation effect content determination process, when the variation start command is received, the effect control unit 403 analyzes the variation start command in step S341, and determines the result of the special figure determination included in the variation start command in step S342. Based on this, the variation effect pattern that defines the content of the variation effect HE is selected from the plurality of variation effect patterns stored in the variation effect pattern table. The variation effect HE based on the variation effect pattern selected here is executed. In the following step S343, the effect control unit 403 confirms whether or not the special drawing determination information JJ is a regular jackpot. When the special figure determination information JJ is a regular jackpot, it is determined that the leverage confirmation effect is not to be executed and then the process proceeds from step S343 to step S348, while otherwise (that is, the special figure determination information JJ). Is lost or the probability variation jackpot is won), the process proceeds from step S343 to step S344.

  In step S344, the effect control unit 403 performs the lever certainty effect execution determination processing for selecting and deciding whether or not the lever certainty effect is to be performed and, when performing the lever certainty effect, which type of lever certainty effect is to be performed. To do. The leverage certain effect execution determination processing in step S344 may be the same as the leverage certain effect execution determination processing in step S319 of FIG.

  It progresses to step S345 after step S344. In step S345, it is checked whether execution of the leverage certain effect has been determined. If it is determined that the leverage certain effect is to be executed, the process proceeds to step S346. If not, the process proceeds to step S348.

  In step S346, the effect control unit 403 sets any timing during the execution period of the variable effect HE as the execution timing TQ of the leverage definite effect while considering the selection result of the variable effect pattern. The timing TQ corresponds to the timing 4110 in FIG. 73 (d) or the timing 4220 in FIG. 75. After the process of step S346, the process proceeds to step S347.

Any timing during the execution period of the fluctuation effect HE can be set (determined) to the execution timing TQ of the leverage confirmation effect, but for example, a plurality of times can be set within the execution period of the fluctuation effect HE (that is, the fluctuation display period of the special symbol). The candidate timing may be set in advance, and any one of the plurality of candidate timings may be determined as the execution timing TQ of the lever certainty effect by lottery using the random number for effect.
More specifically, for example, when the special figure variation pattern (THp_c [2], THp_d [2]; see FIG. 51) associated with the execution of the SP reach effect is selected (see FIG. 41), the special symbol. Or, at the start of variation of the decorative design (immediately after the start), within the execution period of the pre-reach notice production, within the period after the execution of the successful tempai production and before the SP reach production is started, within the execution period of the SP reach mid production For example, one or more candidate timings may be set in advance, and the execution timing TQ of the lever certainty effect may be selected and determined from the plurality of candidate timings.
Further, for example, when the special figure variation pattern (THp_c [1], THp_d [1]; see FIG. 51) associated with the execution of the normal reach effect is selected (see FIG. 43), the variation of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. At the start (immediately after the start), during the execution period of the pre-reach notice production, after the execution of the tempai success production and before the start of the normal reach production, after the start of the normal reach production, the normal reach success production is executed. It suffices to set one or more candidate timings in advance, for example, within a period until the time, and select and determine the execution timing TQ of the lever certainty effect from the plurality of candidate timings.

  In step S347, the effect control unit 403 sets the period after the timing TQ in the execution period of the variable effect HE as the fixed effect executable period, and then proceeds to step S349. On the other hand, in step S348 that can be shifted from step S343 or S345, the effect control unit 403 sets the entire execution period of the variable effect HE to the fixed effect executable period, and then proceeds to step S349. However, in step S348, a specific period within the execution period of the variable effect HE may be excluded from the fixed effect executable period. The specific period to be excluded includes a period after the timing at which the first to third decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in a doublet or non-doublet pattern, such as a period immediately before the stop of variation of the special symbol.

  In step S349, the production control unit 403 confirms whether or not the special-drawing determination information JJ is a big hit. If the special figure determination information JJ is a big hit, the process proceeds from step S349 to step S350. However, if the special figure determination information JJ is a loss, it is determined that the big jackpot final effect is not executed. This completes the variable effect content determination processing.

  In step S350, the production control unit 403 performs a final production execution determination process for selecting and deciding whether or not to perform the big jackpot final production and, in the case of performing the big jackpot final production, what kind of big jackpot final production is to be performed. . The selection and determination method here may be the same as that described above. For example, according to the table 3100 of FIG. 57, whether or not to perform the jackpot finalization effect, and when performing the jackpot finalization effect, what kind of jackpot. Select and decide whether to perform the finalized effect. In the fixed effect execution determination processing in step S350, when it is determined to execute the super-certain accuracy effect, and when there are a plurality of types of super-accuracy effects that the effect control unit 403 can execute, which kind of super-accuracy effect is determined. It is also decided to execute the performance. For example, as shown in FIG. 53 and FIG. 54, a plurality of types of super certainty effects such as a third special character effect, a rainbow character effect, a rainbow CI effect, and a P-flash effect can be executed as the super certainty effect, so that the effect control unit can be executed. In the case where 403 is configured, it is also determined which kind of super certain effect is to be executed. The same applies to the simple win-win effect and the simple win-win effect.

  Even if it is determined to execute the jackpot confirmation effect, it is not determined until the execution timing of the jackpot confirmation effect at the stage of step S350. After the processing of step S350, the process proceeds to step S351.

  In step S351, it is checked whether or not it is determined to execute the jackpot confirmation effect in step S350. If it is determined in step S350 to execute the jackpot confirmation effect, the process proceeds to step S352, and if not. Ends the variable effect content determination processing.

  In step S352, the effect control unit 403 considers the selection result of the variable effect pattern and sets any of the timings belonging to the fixed effect executable period set in step S347 or S348 to the jackpot final effect execution timing TP. Set to. Similar to the setting method of the execution timing TQ of the lever certainty effect in step S346, for example, any one of a plurality of predetermined candidate timings may be set as the execution timing TP of the jackpot confirmed effect. However, candidate timings that do not belong to the fixed effect executable period are excluded from the candidates for the jackpot fixed effect execution timing TP. After the processing of step S352, the variation effect content determination processing ends.

  In the operation flowchart of FIG. 78, when it is determined to execute the leverage probabilistic effect, the fixed production effectable period is set after the execution timing TQ of the leverage probabilistic effect (in other words, the jackpot is confirmed before the timing TQ. By prohibiting the execution timing of the effect being set), the fixed effect restriction control is realized. When the process of step S352 is executed after the process of step S346, the timings TQ and TP correspond to the timings 4110 and 4120 of FIG. 73 (d), respectively.

――― Example EX7_3 ――――
Example EX7_3 will be described. When the production control unit 403 decides to execute the leverage certain effect on the special figure determination information JJ, various timings during the execution period of the variable production HE can be set as the execution timing TQ of the leverage certain production. .

  For example, it may be possible to perform the leverage confirmation effect at the same time as the start of the variable display of the first to third decorative symbols (thus substantially at the same time as the start of the variation of the special symbol). Further, for example (see FIG. 41), the lever certain effect may be executed in the pre-reach notice effect, the tempai twisting effect, the tempai success effect, or the development destination selection effect.

  Further, for example (see FIGS. 41 and 42), the lever certain effect may be executed during the execution period of the SP reach effect and before the SP reach success effect or the SP reach failure effect is executed. In the gaming machine 100, a plurality of types of SP reach effects can be executed, and a specific SP reach effect can be executed only when the special-drawing determination information JJ is a loss or if the probability variation jackpot is won. In other words, the specific SP reach effect itself functions as a leverage confirmation effect, or a development destination selection effect that suggests execution of a specific SP reach effect, or a title display effect of a specific SP reach effect as a leverage confirmation effect. Function.

――― Example EX7_4 ――――
Example EX7_4 will be described. The effect control unit 403 may realize the leverage certain effect using an arbitrary effect means as in the jackpot finalizing effect. For example, the lever confirmation effect may be realized by displaying an image for the confirmation confirmation effect on the image display unit 104 or outputting a sound for the confirmation confirmation reproduction from the speaker 115, or included in the representation light unit 116 or the panel lamp 135. The effect of causing the light emitting element to emit light in the light emission mode for the leverage confirmation effect may be made to function as the leverage confirmation effect. Is also good. Further, for example, a function of vibrating the effect button 121 may be provided, and an effect of vibrating the effect button 121 at a specific timing may be made to function as the lever-probable effect.

――― Example EX7_5 ――――
Example EX7_5 will be described. There are various lever certainty effects that can be executed at various timings during the variational effect HE as the lever certainty effects that can be executed by the effect control unit 403. There are various jackpot finalization effects that can be executed at various timings during the performance HE, but in Example EX7_5, an example of a combination of the lever certainty effect and the jackpot finalization effect executed in one variation effect HE will be described.

  In FIG. 79, it is assumed that the variable effect HE when the special figure determination information JJ is a big hit is the SP reach hit effect (FIG. 41), and under this assumption, as a pre-reach notice effect. The leverage confirmation effect using the image display (the leverage confirmation effect 4310 in FIG. 79) is executed, and then, the special CI effect 4360 (which functions as a jackpot finalization effect in the SP reach middle effect which is a main part of the SP reach effect). The effect of displaying a special cut-in image that can be displayed only when the jackpot is won is being executed.

  Since the special CI effect 4360 is an effect that can be executed only while the SP reach effect is being executed, and the pre-reach notice effect is a notice effect that is executed before the SP reach effect, before the reach after the special CI effect 4360 is executed. The leverage certain effect 4310 as the notice effect is not executed, and the special CI effect 4360 is not executed before the leverage certain effect 4310 as the pre-reach notice effect is executed.

  As the special CI effect 4360, there may be a plurality of types of special CI effects, and a first special CI effect that functions as a simple winning effect and a simple certainty effect according to the type of jackpot that the special drawing determination information JJ has won. Either the second special CI effect that functions as an effect or the third special CI effect that functions as a super-certain effect effect may be selectively executed.

  Although the lever certainty effect 4310 in the pre-reach notice effect shown in FIG. 79 is configured by displaying a predetermined character image and a predetermined character image, what kind of form is the lever certainty effect in the pre-reach notice effect? It may be a production.

  Referring to FIG. 80, for example, the predetermined zone effect may be the lever certain effect in the pre-reach notice effect. In this case, as a general rule, the effect control unit 403 may execute the predetermined zone effect as the pre-reach notice effect only when it is determined that the predetermined zone effect is not executed and the lever certain effect is executed.

  It is also possible to realize the leverage confirmation effect in the pre-reach notice effect by the step-up notice effect as shown in FIG. The step-up notice effect is composed of the first to fourth stage SU effects, the second-stage SU effect is executed after the first-stage SU effect, and then the third-step SU effect is executed. After that, the fourth stage SU effect is executed. However, the step-up notice production is completed by the first stage SU production, is finished by the first stage SU production and is completed by the second stage SU production, and is the first and second stage SU production. There are a case where the production is finished and the third stage SU production is finished, and a case where the first to fourth stage SU productions are all executed.

  In the first stage SU effect, the image display unit 104 displays an image 4312a of a first size showing a certain character. In the second stage SU effect, a second size image 4312b showing a character is displayed on the image display unit 104. In the third stage SU effect, a third size image 4312c showing a certain character is displayed on the image display unit 104. In the SU rendering of the fourth stage, the image 4312d of the fourth size showing a certain character is displayed on the image display unit 104. From the first size to the fourth size, the sizes increase in the order of the first, second, third, and fourth sizes. It should be noted that the images 4312a to 4312d may be different only in size, or the image contents themselves may be different from each other.

  The effect control unit 403 can perform the step-up notice effect based on the result of the special-drawing determination with respect to the special-drawing determination information JJ. At this time, the step-up notice effect that is executed up to the (i + 1) th stage SU effect The number of stages of the SU performance to be executed may be set such that the expectation degree of the jackpot is higher than the expectation degree of the jackpot of the step-up notice presentation that ends up to the i-th stage SU presentation. Furthermore, for example, if the special figure determination information JJ is a loss or if the fourth stage SU production can be executed only when the probability variation jackpot is won, the fourth stage SU production is a pre-reach notice production. It will function as a relevance confirmation production in.

  With reference to FIG. 82, a special background effect for displaying a special background image over the entire display area of the image display unit 104 may be used as the lever certain effect in the pre-reach notice effect. The special background effect may be performed after the tempai success effect and before the SP reach effect is started.

  In addition to this, it is also possible to realize the leverage confirmation effect in the pre-reach notice effect by a pseudo-reminder notice effect, a timer notice effect, a next notice effect, a special variation display of a decorative pattern, or the like.

  Reference is made to FIG. Also in FIG. 83, it is assumed that the variation effect HE when the special figure determination information JJ is a big hit is the SP reach hit effect (FIG. 41). Under this assumption, the image is displayed as the title display effect. The leverage confirmation effect using the display (the leverage confirmation effect 4330 in FIG. 83) is executed, and then, in the SP reach mid-stage production which is the main part of the SP reach production, the special CI presentation 4360 (big hit). The effect of displaying a special cut-in image that can be displayed only at the time of winning is executed. In the gaming machine 100, a plurality of types of SP reach effects can be executed, and a specific SP reach effect can be executed only when the special-drawing determination information JJ is a loss or if the probability variation jackpot is won. In other words, the title display effect that indicates that a specific SP reach effect (SP D reach in FIG. 79 (b)) is executed functions as a leverage definite effect.

  The special CI effect 4360 is an effect that can be executed only during the SP reach effect, which is the main part of the SP reach effect, and the title display effect is an effect that is executed before the execution of the SP reach effect (see FIG. 41). , The lever certain effect 4330 as the title display effect is not executed after the special CI effect 4360 is executed, and the special CI effect 4360 is executed before the lever certain effect 4330 as the title display effect is executed. There is no such thing.

――― Example EX7_6 ――――
Example EX7_6 will be described.

  Reference is made to FIG. For convenience of explanation, the term "special suggestion production" is introduced as a simple winning production, a simple certainty production, a super certain production, or a lever certain production. The following description of the special suggestion effect is applied individually to each of the simple hit effect, the simple certainty effect, the super certain effect, and the lever certain effect.

  As the special suggestion effect that can be executed by the effect control unit 403, there may be a plurality of types of special suggestion effects having different effect modes. Then, each of the plurality of types of special suggestion effects is classified into any of a situation-independent type, a notice effect type, a reach effect type, and a mid-reach effect effect type. That is, for example, as the super certain effects that can be executed by the effect control unit 403, there may be a plurality of types of super certain effects whose production modes are different from each other, and each of the plurality of types of super certain effects is a situation-independent system, a notice production system, It is classified as either a reach production system or a reach production system. The same applies to the simple hit production, the simple hit production, and the leverage hit production.

  The special suggestion effect classified into the situation-independent system can be executed at any timing during the execution period of the variable effect HE and under the situation where any effect is being executed. For example, in the simple winning effect, the simple certainty effect, and the super certainty effect classified into the situation-independent system, the first and second images that cause the image display unit 104 to display images representing the first, second, and third special characters, respectively. , The third special character effect (see FIGS. 54 (a) to (c)), and the relevance certain effect classified into the situation-independent system is the fourth that causes the image display unit 104 to display an image representing the fourth special character. It is a special character production. A certain rainbow image effect (see FIG. 53) may be a super certain effect that is classified into a situation-independent system.

  The special suggestion effect classified into the notice effect system is executed before the reach effect in the variable effect HE is executed. For example, the simple winning effect, the simple certainty effect, the super certainty effect, and the lever certain effect classified into the notice effect system are the serif notice effects that cause the first, second, third, and fourth special lines to appear, respectively. The serif advance notice effect is an effect in which a predetermined character is displayed on the image display unit 104 and the appearance of the character is expressed by using image display and voice output. Therefore, for example, in the dialogue announcement effect in which the first special dialogue appears, the appearance of the first special dialogue is expressed using image display and audio output. A certain rainbow image effect (see FIG. 53) may be a super certain effect that is classified as a notice effect system. For example, a serif advance notice effect accompanied by the display of a rainbow-colored character image corresponds to a super-certain effect effect classified into the notice effect system.

The special suggestion effect classified into the reach effect system is an effect that suggests specific contents depending on the type of the tempai success effect or the type of the reach effect executed in the variable effect HE. For example, the performance control unit 403 selects and executes any of a plurality of types of SP reach effects including the first to fourth special SP reach effects when executing the variable effects including the SP reach effects. Of these, the first to third special SP reach effects are executed only when the special figure determination information JJ is a big hit. Furthermore, the production control unit 403
1st special SP reach production so that the first special SP reach production may be executed regardless of whether the special figure determination information JJ is a big hit of any of the communication A, the communication B, and the special A to special D. Control whether or not to execute
When the special figure determination information JJ has won any of the special A to special D jackpots, the second special SP reach effect may be executed and the special figure determination information JJ is A or Whether or not the second special SP reach effect is executed is controlled so that the second special SP reach effect is not executed when the jackpot of the communication B is won.
When the special figure determination information JJ is a special B or special D jackpot, the third special SP reach effect may be executed, and the special figure determination information JJ is communication A, communication B, When the special A or special C jackpot is won, whether or not to execute the third special SP reach effect is controlled so that the third special SP reach effect is not executed.
Then, the first, second, and third special SP reach effects themselves, or effects (title display effects, etc.) that suggest that the first, second, and third special SP reach effects are executed, respectively. This corresponds to simple accurate production, simple certainty production, and super certainty production classified into the reach production system.
Further, the effect control unit 403 determines whether or not the fourth special SP reach effect is executed so that the fourth special SP reach effect is executed only when the special figure determination information JJ is a loss or if the probability variation jackpot is won. Control. Then, the fourth special SP reach effect itself or the effect (title display effect, etc.) that suggests that the fourth special SP reach effect is executed corresponds to the relevance effect effect classified into the reach effect system. become. It should be noted that the 3 tempai success effect and the 7 tempai success effect can also be considered to belong to the lever certain effect classified into the reach effect system. In connection with this, it is possible to consider that the 3 tempai-inspiring effect and the 7 tempo-inspiring effect belong to the relevance certain effect classified into the notice effect system.
A certain rainbow image effect (see FIG. 53) may be a super-certain effect effect classified into the reach effect system. For example, when the title display effect of the SP reach effect is performed using a rainbow-colored character image, the title display effect is equivalent to the super certain effect effect classified into the reach effect system regardless of the type of the SP reach effect. To do.

The special suggestion production classified into the mid-reach production system is executed in the mid-reach production or final winning production, which is a component of the SP reach production of the variable production HE (see FIG. 41). For example, the simple hit effect, the simple hit effect, the super hit effect, and the lever hit effect that are classified into the mid-reach effect type are the first special CI effect and the second special CI effect that display the first special cut-in image, respectively. The second special CI effect for displaying a special cut-in image, the third special CI effect for displaying a third special cut-in image, and the fourth special CI effect for displaying a fourth special cut-in image.
The first to third special CI effects are executed only when the special figure determination information JJ is a big hit. Furthermore, the production control unit 403
Execution of the first special CI effect so that the first special CI effect may be executed regardless of whether the special-drawing determination information JJ wins the big hits of the communication A, the communication B, and the special A to the special D. Control the presence or absence, also
When the special figure determination information JJ is a special jackpot of any of special A to special D, the second special CI effect may be executed, and the special figure determination information JJ is A or common. When the jackpot of B is won, whether or not to execute the second special CI effect is controlled so that the second special CI effect is not executed, and
When the special figure determination information JJ is a special B or special D jackpot, the third special CI effect may be executed, and the special figure determination information JJ is A, B, or special. Whether or not the third special CI effect is executed is controlled so that the third special CI effect is not executed when the jackpot of A or special C is won.
Then, the first, second, and third special CI effects correspond to the simple winning effect, the simple certainty effect, and the super certainty effect, respectively, which are classified into the reach-in-progress type.
Further, the effect control unit 403 controls whether or not to execute the fourth special CI effect so that the fourth special CI effect is executed only when the special image determination information JJ is a loss or if the probability variation jackpot is won. . Then, the fourth special CI effect corresponds to the lever certain effect that is classified into the in-reach effect effect system.
A certain rainbow image effect (see FIG. 53) may be a super-certain effect effect that is classified as a medium-reach effect effect system. For example, the rainbow CI effect shown in FIG. 54E can be used as the third special CI effect.

  In addition to this, there is a certainty effect (for example, 3 promotion effect or 7 promotion effect in the re-lottery effect; see FIG. 49) executed after the normal reach success effect or the SP reach success effect.

――― Example EX7_7 ――――
Example EX7_7 will be described. The example of special suggestion production belonging to the situation-independent system, the notice production system, the reach production system, or the reach production system described in Example EX7_6 (for example, the serif notice production) is only a very limited example. There are various concrete effects, and depending on the game state of the gaming machine 100, the type of effect to be executed and the suggested contents of the effect to be executed may change.

  With reference to FIG. 85, an effect (hereinafter, referred to as a game state dependent effect IE or abbreviated as effect IE) in which the suggestion content changes depending on the game state of the gaming machine 100 will be described. When the current game state is a low-probability non-electricity support game state (that is, when the special figure determination for the special figure determination information JJ is performed in the low-probability non-electricity support game state), the effect control unit 403 is a diagram. When the production IE is determined and controlled with the probability according to the table 4410 of 85 (a) in the variable production HE, and the current game state is the high-probability electric sapo game state (that is, in the high-probability electric sapo game state) When the special figure determination is performed on the special figure determination information JJ), the effect control unit 403 determines and controls whether or not to execute the effect IE in the variable effect HE with a probability according to the table 4420 of FIG. 85 (b). To do.

  In the low-probability non-electricity support game state according to the table 4410, the execution probability of the effect IE is a probability of less than 50% (here, 20%) when the special figure determination information JJ is a loss, and the special figure determination information JJ. When is a big hit of any one of A to D, A to B, and A to D, a probability of 50% or more (here, 70%), which is higher than when the special image determination information JJ is lost. To be done. For this reason, the production IE when the presence / absence of execution is controlled in the table 4410 functions as a high-expectation production that can be executed both in the case of a loss and in the case of a big hit (that is, compared to when the production IE is not executed). When the production IE is executed, the expectation of the jackpot is higher, or the expectation of the jackpot suggested by the presentation IE is higher than the winning probability of the jackpot). Furthermore, the production IE is not a lever-probable production because it is usually executed even when the jackpot is won.

When the table 4410 is used, the execution IE execution probability KKK _A1 when the special figure determination information JJ is a big hit of the communication A or the communication B, and the special figure determination information JJ are the special A or the special character. Performance IE execution probability KKK _A2 when the C jackpot is won, and performance IE execution probability KKK _A3 when the special figure determination information JJ is a special B or special D jackpot. They may be different from each other (for example, 0.5 <KKK _A1 <KKK _A2 <KKK _A3 ≦ 1).

  In the high-probability electric power support game state according to the table 4420, the execution probability of the production IE is a probability of less than 50% (here, 20%) when the special figure determination information JJ is a loss, and the special figure determination information JJ is When any of the special jackpots A to D is won, the probability is 50% or higher (here, 70%), which is higher than when the special figure determination information JJ is lost. Therefore, first, the effect IE when the presence or absence of the execution is controlled in the table 4420 functions as a high-expectation degree effect that can be executed at the time of losing or at the time of a big hit (that is, similarly to the case of following the table 4410 (that is, at the time of losing). , The expectation of the jackpot is higher when the production IE is executed than when the production IE is not executed, or the expectation of the jackpot suggested by the production IE is higher than the winning probability of the jackpot). However, in the high-probability electric power support game state according to the table 4420, when the special figure determination information JJ is a big hit of communication A or communication B, since the execution probability of the production IE is zero (that is, the production IE is Since it is controlled so as not to be executed), the production IE also functions as a reverence production.

When the table 4420 is used, the execution IE execution probability KKK _B2 when the special figure determination information JJ is a big hit of the special A or the special C and the special figure determination information JJ is the special B or the special figure. The execution IE execution probability KKK _B3 when the jackpot of D is won may be different from each other (for example, 0.5 <KKK _B2 <KKK _B3 ≦ 1).

  With reference to FIG. 86 (a), for example, the special background effect (FIG. 82) shown in the embodiment EX7_5 may be used as the game state dependent effect IE. In other words, in this case, the special background effect in the low-probability non-electric support game state does not function as the leverage confirmation effect, but merely functions as the high-expectation effect, whereas the special background effect in the high-probability electric support game state is It functions as a lever production.

  With reference to FIG. 86 (b), for example, the game state dependent effect IE may be realized by the step-up notice effect shown in the embodiment EX7_5. In this case, for example, the SU effect of the third stage may be regarded as an effect IE. Then, in the low-probability non-electricity support game state in which the table 4410 is used, the third stage SU production functions as a high-expectation production that can be executed at the time of a loss, at the time of a normal jackpot, and at the time of a probability variation jackpot. Although it does not function as a lever probability production, in the high-probability electric power support game state where the table 4420 is used, the third stage SU production can be executed both at the time of losing and at the time of probability variation jackpot, but usually at the time of jackpot. Sometimes it has a function as a lever production that is never executed.

  In addition, in the high-probability electric power support game state, the SU effect of the fourth stage may be made to function as a definite certain effect (simple certain sure effect or super certain sure effect). In order to realize this, in the high probability electric support game state, when the special figure determination information JJ is a loss or a normal jackpot, the SU effect of the fourth stage is not executed, and the special figure determination information It suffices that the SU effect in the fourth stage can be executed only when JJ has won the probability variation jackpot. At this time, in the high-probability electric power support game state, if the special figure determination information JJ can win the special B or special D jackpot, the fourth stage SU effect can be executed, The four-stage SU production will function as a super-accurate production. On the other hand, the SU production of the fourth stage in the low probability non-electric support game state does not function as a definite production, and can be executed at the time of a loss, a normal jackpot, or a definite variation jackpot. Functions as a production.

  There may be various concrete effect modes of the game state dependent effect IE, for example, a so-called group notice effect or a predetermined zone effect may be used as the effect IE, or red as shown in FIG. 20 (b). The CI effect may be used as the effect IE. Further, the specific type of SP reach effect may be the effect IE,

  In the low-probability electric power assisting game state (so-called time saving state), the effect presence / absence probability of effect IE may be controlled according to the table 4410, or the effect presence / absence probability of effect IE may be controlled according to the table 4420.

――― Example EX7_8 ――――
Example EX7_8 will be described.

  Referring to FIG. Of the plurality of types of SP reach effects that can be executed by the effect control unit 403, some of the SP reach effects may include the first half of the SP reach effects and the second half of the SP reach effects executed thereafter. In the example of FIG. 87, the SP reach effect is shown in which whether or not the game task of the main character defeating the enemy character is achieved using moving image display. In the SP reach effect, title display is performed. After the effect, first, the SP first half effect is executed. In the first half of the SP reach production, a state in which the main character tries to defeat the enemy character is depicted by a moving image display, and in many cases, this fails, and then the second half production of the SP is executed. In the SP second half effect, a state in which the main character tries again to try to defeat the enemy character is depicted by a moving image display, and the final winning effect is executed after the SP second effect (or in the final stage of the SP second effect). In FIG. 87, since the flow of the SP reach effect executed when the jackpot is won, the SP reach success effect is executed through the final winning effect.

  In the SP reach effect in which the SP reach first half effect is executed subsequently to the SP reach first effect, the main character may defeat the enemy character in the SP reach first effect stage, and at that time, the SP reach second effect. Is not executed, the SP reach success effect is executed subsequently to the SP reach first half effect.

  The variable production pattern that defines the execution of the SP reach production including the first half of SP reach production, the second half of SP reach production, and the success of SP reach production is called the variation production pattern per second half, and includes the first half production of SP reach and the successful production of SP reach. The variable effect pattern that defines the execution of the SP reach effect that does not include the latter half effect is referred to as the first half per-variation effect effect pattern.

Based on the result of the special figure determination with respect to the special figure determination information JJ, the effect control unit 403 selects the second half winning variation effect pattern and the first half winning variation effect pattern. Specifically, it may be performed as follows.
The effect control unit 403 may select the latter half winning variation effect pattern regardless of whether the special figure determination information JJ is winning the normal big hit or the probability variation big hit, and the special figure determining information is also selected. When JJ normally wins the jackpot, the first half hit variation effect pattern is not selected, and only when the special figure determination information JJ wins the probability variation big hit, the first half hit variation effect pattern may be selected. As described above, the variation effect pattern selection process may be executed. Then, the SP reach success effect in the first half per hit variation effect pattern functions as a definite accuracy effect. At this time, the first half winning variation effect pattern may be selected only when the special figure determination information JJ is a big hit of the special B or the special D. In this case, the first half winning The SP reach success production in the variation production pattern will function as a super-accurate production.

――― Example EX7_9 ――――
Example EX7_9 will be described. Any of a plurality of types of leverage confirmation effects that can be executed by the effect control unit 403 is executed according to the operation of the player on the operation means (here, the effect button 121 or the effect lever 127) provided in the gaming machine 100. It may be one. The lever certainty effect executed according to the operation of the player is particularly referred to as an operation-corresponding lever certainty effect.

  That is, for example, when the effect control unit 403 sets an operation valid period having a predetermined time length during the execution period of the variation effect HE according to a certain variation effect pattern, and a button operation is input within the operation valid period. , It is possible that an operation-compatible lever definite effect is performed in response to an input of a button operation. Due to the characteristics of the operation-compatible leverage definite production, when the special figure determination information JJ is normally a big hit, it seems that the operation-compatible leverage definite production is not executed in response to the input of the button operation. Under the condition that the special-drawing determination information JJ is won or lost in the probability variation jackpot, the operation-corresponding leverage confirmation effect is performed by a lottery with a probability of less than 100% in response to a button operation input. . At this time, as in the button effect of FIG. 16A, it is possible to perform a button operation prompting effect that prompts the player to input a button operation, but the operation is performed in a state where the button operation prompting effect is not executed. A back button method that receives an input of a button operation that triggers the execution of the leverage probabilistic effect may be adopted.

  Referring to FIG. 88, for example, the presence or absence of a button operation is monitored when the title display effect of the SP reach effect is being executed. The character image indicating the type of SP reach effect displayed in the title display effect is basically white. Then, if there is a button operation during the execution period of the title display effect, the button operation with a probability of less than 100% by lottery under the condition that the special figure determination information JJ has been won or lost in probability variation jackpot. In response to the input of, the character image of the title display effect is changed from white to red. This change to red corresponds to the operation-compatible lever definite effect. Even if there is a button operation during the execution period of the title display effect, the change to red is not always performed when the special figure determination information JJ normally wins the jackpot. If there is no button operation during the execution period of the title display effect, the color of the character image of the title display effect does not change.

  The specific content of the operation-relevant confirmation effect is not limited to the change of the character image to red, but is arbitrary. For example, instead of changing the character image to red, the effect of operating the movable accessory 130 in a predetermined mode It may be used as a lever-like production for operation. In addition, an operation valid period for executing the operation-corresponding lever certainty effect may be set when various timings and various effects are being performed.

Generalized, the following can be said.
The effect control unit 403 can set an operation valid period for executing the operation-relevant probability effect when a certain effect that constitutes the variable effect HE is being executed. At this time, the back button The method may be adopted. Then, when the button operation is performed while the specific effect is being executed, the effect control unit 403 selects 100 by lottery under the condition that the special figure determination information JJ is a loss or a probability variation jackpot. In response to the input of the button operation with a probability of less than%, the operation-compatible leverage confirmation effect is executed, and when the special-drawing determination information JJ normally wins the jackpot, the operation-compatible leverage confirmation effect is always not executed. .
The number of button operations for executing the operation-relevant probability production may be two or more. For example, a lottery is performed under the condition that the special figure determination information JJ is won or lost for a certain chance variation jackpot only after the button operation is input twice in accordance with the on-screen movement of the character displayed in the specific effect. Therefore, the operation-corresponding lever certainty effect may be executed with a probability of less than 100% in response to the input of the button operation.

  Not limited to the image display, the operation-relevant confirmation effect may be realized by outputting the sound for the operation-confirmed confirmation operation, or the light-emitting element included in the presentation light unit 116 or the panel lamp 135 may be used for the operation-confirmed confirmation operation. The effect of emitting light in the light emitting mode may be made to function as the operation-relevant confirmation effect, or the effect of operating the movable accessory 130 in the operation-relevant confirmation effect mode may be made to function as the operation-relevant confirmation effect. . Further, for example, when the function of vibrating the effect button 121 is provided, the effect of vibrating the effect button 121 may be made to function as an operation-compatible leverage definite effect.

――― Example EX7_10 ――――
Example EX7_10 will be described. Similar to the above-described operation-aware leverage production, any one of the plurality of types of jackpot finalization productions that can be executed by the production control unit 403 is an operation unit (here, the production button 121 or the production lever 127) provided in the gaming machine 100. May be executed in response to a player's operation with respect to the above, and this applies to each of the simple winning effect, the simple certainty effect, and the super certainty effect.

  The following is the generalization of the simple-winning-effect production executed according to the player's operation, which is generally called the operation-corresponding simple-winning presentation. The production control unit 403 can set the operation valid period for executing the operation-corresponding simple-probability production when a specific production that constitutes the variable production HE is being executed. At this time, the back button The method may be adopted. When the button operation is performed while the specific effect is being executed, the effect control unit 403 determines that the special figure determination information JJ is a jackpot of any one of the communication A, the communication B, and the combination A to D. Under the condition that you have won, there is a probability of less than 100% by lottery in response to the input of a button operation, and a simple winning effect corresponding to the operation is executed, and when the special figure determination information JJ is lost, the operation is always supported. The simple accurate production is not executed.

  The following can be said if the simple certainty effect that is executed according to the operation of the player is generalized by being called an operation corresponding simple certainty effect. The effect control unit 403 can set the operation valid period for executing the operation-corresponding simple certainty effect when a certain effect that constitutes the variable effect HE is being executed. At this time, the back button The method may be adopted. Then, when the button operation is performed while the specific effect is being executed, the effect control unit 403 determines that the special figure determination information JJ has won any of the special A to special D jackpots. In the bottom of the figure, the operation-corresponding simple certainty production is executed in response to the input of the button operation with a probability of less than 100% by the lottery, and whether the special figure determination information JJ is a loss or the jackpot of the communication A or communication B is won. If there is, the operation-adaptive simple certainty effect is always not executed.

  The following can be said if the super certainty effect executed according to the operation of the player is called an operation corresponding super certainty effect and is generalized. The production control unit 403 can set the operation valid period for executing the operation-corresponding super-probability production, when a specific production that constitutes the variable production HE is being executed. At this time, the back button The method may be adopted. Then, when the button operation is performed while the specific effect is being executed, the effect control unit 403, under the condition that the special figure determination information JJ is a special B or special D jackpot. With a probability of less than 100% by a lottery, in response to an input of a button operation, an operation-corresponding super-probable effect is executed, and whether the special drawing determination information JJ is a loss or a big hit of a communication A, a communication B, a special A or a special C. When winning, the operation-specific super-precision production is always not executed.

  The method for realizing the operation-corresponding simple-probability effect, the operation-corresponding simple-probability effect, and the operation-corresponding super-probability effect (such as which effect means is used) may be the same as those of the operation-corresponding lever probability effect shown in the embodiment EX7_9. . However, it is assumed that the operation-corresponding leverage probabilistic effect, the operation-corresponding simple-probability effect, the operation-corresponding simple-probability effect, and the operation-corresponding super-probabilistic effect are different from each other in specific performance modes.

――― Example EX7_11 ――――
Example EX7_11 will be described. In Example EX7_11, a reserved image or the like that can be displayed by the effect control unit 403 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 89, five positions (in other words, five display areas) HP _{0 to} HP ₄ are set in the lower area of the display area of the image display unit 104. For any integer i, position HP _{i + 1} is adjacent to the left of position HP _i . The effect control unit 403 can display one reserved image at each of the positions HP _{1 to} HP _4, and can display the pseudo reserved image at the position HP ₀ in the variable effect. The pseudo reserved image may also be referred to as the reserved image or the right image. The hold image and the pseudo hold image include the hold image and the pseudo hold image based on the satisfaction of the first start condition, and the hold image and the pseudo hold image based on the satisfaction of the second start condition. For the sake of convenience and clarity, it is assumed that the number U2 of pending information based on the satisfaction of the second starting condition is zero, and the number U1 of pending information based on the satisfaction of the first starting condition is 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4. I think there is.

  One reserved image has certain one special figure determination information stored in the special figure determination information storage area 413a, that is, special figure determination for the special figure determination information (special figure in special symbol processing It is an image showing that the right of (determination) is reserved. Performing special figure determination on the pending special figure determination information is expressed as "digestion". In addition, the special figure determination information or the suspended image that is suspended may be simply referred to as “suspended”.

Even after the special figure determination (special figure determination in the special symbol processing) is performed on one particular noticed special figure determination information, that is, the right of special figure determination for the particular noticed special figure determination information is consumed. After that, the image corresponding to the right can be displayed at the position HP ₀ , and the image is referred to as a pseudo hold image. The pseudo-holding image for the noticed special figure determination information is displayed at the position HP ₀ when the variation effect for the noticed special figure determination information is being performed, and before the variation effect is finished or when the variation effect is finished. It is erased (ie hidden) from position HP ₀ .

FIG. 90 shows a state in which the hold image is displayed at each of the positions HP _{1 to} HP ₄ and the pseudo hold image is displayed at the position HP ₀ when the variation effect is being performed. In the following, the reserved images displayed at the positions HP ₁ , HP ₂ , HP ₃ , and HP ₄ are referred to as 1st image, 2nd image, 3rd image, and 4th image, respectively. The retained images 1 to 4 may be referred to as the first to fourth retained images. Further, for convenience of description, the pseudo-hold image is also referred to as a zero image, and any one of the zero image to four image or the zero image to four image is collectively referred to as a x image. The symbol "X" in the term "preserved X-image" has a value of 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4.

In the image display unit 104, the reserved images are sequentially digested from the one displayed on the right side. More precisely, the special figure determination information corresponding to the reserved image displayed on the right side of the image display unit 104 is sequentially consumed. Therefore, for example, the first to fourth special figure determination information is acquired in the order of the first, second, third, and fourth special figure determination information by the sequential establishment of the first starting condition four times. Assuming that the first to fourth special figure determination information is stored in the figure determination information storage area 413a, the reserved images corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth special figure determination information are respectively stored. The 1st image, the 2nd image, the 3rd image, and the 4th image will be displayed. The effect control unit 403 additionally displays one hold image for any of the positions HP _{1 to} HP _{4 in} the hold increase processing executed when the hold increase command is received. When the hold increase command indicating that the number of hold information U1 has increased from (i-1) to i is received, one hold image is additionally displayed at the position HP _i in the hold increase processing (i is an integer). .

  Referring to FIG. 91, there are a plurality of aspects as the aspect X image, and the aspect X image is displayed in any of the plurality of aspects. The aspect of the protective X image herein refers to a display aspect of the protective X image. Here, it is considered that the plurality of modes are composed of six modes different from each other. The difference or change in the aspect in the X-ray image includes the difference or change in the color, shape, pattern, etc. of the X-ray image, but here, it is considered that the difference or change in the color corresponds to the difference or change in the aspect, and the above 6 One mode is referred to as a first to sixth color mode. Further, for the sake of concreteness of the description, the X-images of the first, second, third, fourth, fifth, and sixth color modes are respectively white X-images (images having colors based on white). ), A blue X image (an image having a color based on blue), a green X image (an image having a color based on green), a red X image (having a color based on red) Image), a gold X image (image having a color based on gold), and a rainbow X image (rainbow image).

  The effect control unit 403 determines the color mode of the reserved image corresponding to the noticed special figure determination information based on the result of the preliminary determination for the special figure determination information, and corresponds to the noticed special figure determination information. The color mode of the pseudo-hold image is determined based on the result of the special figure determination or the result of the preliminary determination for the special figure determination information. Of the white, blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow X images, the expectation degree of the jackpot associated with the X image is the lowest in the white X image, and white, blue, and It becomes higher in the order of green, red, gold, and rainbow X images. However, as will be described later, the expectation degree of the jackpot associated with the gold and rainbow X images can both be 100%.

  Therefore, for example, the blue X image suggests that the expectation of the jackpot of the special image determination information corresponding to the X image is higher than the white X image, and the green X image is It is suggested that the expectation of the jackpot of the special image determination information corresponding to the X image is higher than that of the blue X image, and the red X image corresponds to the X image. It is suggested that the expectation of the jackpot of the special use information is higher than that of the green X image, and the expectation of the big hit of the special image determination information corresponding to the X image of the gold is the red X It is suggested that it is higher than the X image.

For example, for one piece of special figure determination information, the result of pre-determination for the special figure determination information indicates a big hit, and the reserved image for the special figure determination information is a red and green reserved image. The probabilities are represented by v _R and v _G , respectively, and the result of the preliminary determination for the special figure determination information indicates a failure, and the reserved images for the special figure determination information are red and green reserved images. Are represented by r _R and r _G , respectively, the expectation of the jackpot suggested by the red reserved image is represented by “(100 × v _R / (r _R + v _R )) [%]” and The expectation of the jackpot suggested by the reserved image is represented by “(100 × v _G / (r _G + v _G )) [%]”, and the expectation of the jackpot of the former is higher than the expectation of the jackpot of the latter. As described above, based on the result of the preliminary determination, the effect control unit 40 3 determines the color mode of the reserved image. Although the relationship between the red and green reserved images has been described, the same applies to the relationship between arbitrary two-color reserved images associated with different jackpot expectations. It is also possible to display the reserved image of a certain color for one piece of special figure determination information, and then change the color of the reserved image in the direction of increasing the expectation of the jackpot. It is executed based on the result of.

Similarly, for example, for one piece of special figure determination information, the result of special figure determination or pre-determination for the special figure determination information indicates a big hit, and the pseudo-hold image for the special figure determination information is red. , The probability of becoming a green pseudo-holding image is represented by v _R 'and v _G ', respectively, and the result of the special image determination or the prior determination for the special image determination information indicates a gap and the special image determination information. When the probabilities of the pseudo-held image of the above are red and green pseudo-held images are represented by r _R 'and r _G ', respectively, the expectation of the jackpot suggested by the red pseudo-held image is "(100 x v _R ' / (R _R '+ v _R ')) [%] ", and the expectation of the jackpot suggested by the green pseudo-hold image is" (100 × v _G '/ (r _G ' + v _G ')) " [%] ”, The expectation of the big hit of the former is the expectation of the big hit of the latter The effect control unit 403 determines the color mode of the pseudo-holding image based on the result of the special drawing determination or the preliminary determination so that the image quality becomes higher. Although the relationship between the red and green pseudo-pending images has been described, the same applies to the relationship between any two-color pseudo-holding images associated with different jackpot expectations. It is also possible to display a pseudo-holding image of a certain color for one piece of special-drawing determination information, and then change the color of the pseudo-holding image in the direction of increasing the expectation of the jackpot. It is executed based on the result of special figure determination or prior determination.

――― Example EX7_12 ――――
Example EX7_12 will be described. In Example EX7_11, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the number U2 of holding information based on the establishment of the second starting condition is zero, but the gaming machine 100 can also display the holding image based on the establishment of the second starting condition. ing.

Here, in the low-probability non-electric power assisting game state, the retention X image indicating that the special figure determination information acquired based on the establishment of the first starting condition is stored in the special figure determination information storage area 413a is located. It is displayed on the HP _X and indicates that the special figure determination information acquired based on the establishment of the second starting condition is stored in the recording area 413a in the high-probability electric power support game state and the low-probability electric power support game state. It is assumed that the X image is displayed at the position HP _X (X is 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4).

That is, in the low-probability non-electric support game state, the first to fourth special figure determination information is the first, second, third, and fourth special figure determination information due to the sequential establishment of the first starting condition four times. Assuming that the special figure determination information storage area 413a stores the first to fourth special figure determination information, the first, second, third, and fourth special figure determinations are performed. As the reserved images corresponding to the usage information, the 1st image, the 2nd image, the 3rd image, and the 4th image are displayed at positions HP ₁ , HP ₂ , HP ₃ , and HP ₄ , respectively.
In the high-probability electric power support game state or the low-probability electric power support game state, the fifth to eighth special figure determination information is the fifth, sixth, seventh, and eighth special characteristics due to the sequential establishment of the second starting condition four times. Assuming that the figure determination information is acquired in the order and the fifth to eighth special figure determination information is stored in the special figure determination information storage area 413a, the fifth, sixth, seventh, As the reserved images corresponding to the 8 special figure determination information, the 1st image, the 2nd image, the 3rd image, and the 4th image are displayed at positions HP ₁ , HP ₂ , HP ₃ , and HP ₄ , respectively.

The coordinates of the position HP _X on the display screen of the image display unit 104, the shape of the retained X image, and the like are between the low-probability non-electricity support game state, the high-probability electricity support game state, and the low-probability electricity support game state. They may differ from each other, but here we ignore them. Also, in the low probability non-electric sapo game state, the hold information number U2 based on the establishment of the second start condition does not become zero, and based on the establishment of the first start condition in the high probability electric support game state or the low probability electric support game state. Occasionally, the number U1 of pending information does not become zero and a situation sometimes occurs, but such a situation is ignored here.

With reference to FIG. 92, a reserved image indicating that the special figure determination information JJ is stored in the storage area 413a is displayed as a stored X image at the position HP _X (where X is 1, 2, 3 or 4), or it is assumed that the pseudo-holding image corresponding to the special image determination information JJ is displayed as the held X image at the position HP _X (where X is 0). In FIG. 92, attention is paid only to the retained X image corresponding to the special image determination information JJ, and other reserved images are omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 93, how to properly use the first to sixth color modes in each game state will be described under this assumption.

How to properly use the first to sixth color modes in the low-probability non-electricity support game state will be described.
In the low-probability non-electricity support game state, the high-low relation among the first to sixth color modes of the expectation degree of the jackpot associated with the color mode of the X image is basically as described in Example EX7_11. Is. However, here, the display of the X-color holding X image in the low-probability non-electricity support game state functions as a simple winning effect, and the 6-color holding X-image in the low-probability non-electricity support game state is displayed. The display shall function as a simple and accurate production.
That is, in the low probability non-electric power support game state, less than 100% only when it is determined that the special figure determination information JJ has won the jackpot of A, B, and A to D With the predetermined probability of, the display mode of the protective X image corresponding to the special image determination information JJ can be set to the fifth color mode, and the special image determination information JJ is won in any one of special A to special D. Only when it is determined that the stored X image is displayed in the sixth color mode with a predetermined probability of less than 100%, which corresponds to the special image determination information JJ. In the low-probability non-electricity support game state, when the special figure determination information JJ is determined to be lost, the display mode of the protective X image corresponding to the special figure determination information JJ is the fifth color aspect and the sixth color aspect. However, when the special image determination information JJ is determined to be a normal jackpot, the display mode of the protective X image corresponding to the special image determination information JJ is set to the sixth color mode. There is nothing.

  In the low-probability non-electricity support game state, the special figure determination information JJ is also determined when the special figure determination information JJ is determined to have been won to any of the general A, general B and special A to special D jackpots. Even when it is determined that JJ is lost, the display mode of the protective X image corresponding to the special image determination information JJ may be the first color mode and the second color mode. In addition, the third color mode may be used and the fourth color mode may be used. However, as described in Example EX7_11, the expectation of the corresponding jackpot becomes higher in the order of the first, second, third, and fourth color modes, starting from the first color mode.

  It should be noted that the display of the held X image in the sixth color mode in the low-probability non-electricity support game state may be made to function as a super-probable effect. In this case, only when it is determined that the special figure determination information JJ is a special B or special D jackpot in the low-probability non-electric support game state, with a predetermined probability of less than 100%. The control for setting the display mode of the retained X image corresponding to the special image determination information JJ to the sixth color mode may be adopted.

How to properly use the first to sixth color modes in the high probability power support game state will be described.
In the high-probability electric power support game state, the level relationship between the first to sixth color modes of the jackpot expectation degree associated with the color mode of the X image is basically the same as described in Example EX7_11. is there. However, here, the display of the X image of the third color mode and the fourth color mode in the high-probability electric power support game state functions as a leverage confirmation effect, and the retention of the fifth color mode in the high-probability electric power support game state. It is assumed that the display of the X image functions as a simple certainty effect, and the display of the held X image in the sixth color mode in the high-probability electric power support game state functions as the super certainty effect.
That is, in the high-probability electric support game state, only when it is determined that the special figure determination information JJ is a big hit of any of special A to special D, with a predetermined probability of less than 100%, the special figure The display mode of the protective X image corresponding to the determination information JJ can be set to the fifth color mode, and only when it is determined that the special figure determination information JJ is a special B or special D jackpot. , With a predetermined probability of less than 100%, the display mode of the protective X image corresponding to the special image determination information JJ can be set to the sixth color mode. In the high-probability electric power support game state, when the special figure determination information JJ is determined to be lost, and when it is determined that the normal jackpot is won, the X image corresponding to the special figure determination information JJ The display mode is not set to the fifth color mode and the sixth color mode, and when the special figure determination information JJ is determined to be a special A or special C jackpot, the special figure determination information is displayed. The display mode of the stored X image corresponding to JJ is not set to the sixth color mode.

  In the high-probability electric power support game state, the special figure determination information JJ corresponds to the special figure determination information JJ even when it is determined that the information is lost, and when it is determined that the probability variation jackpot is won. The display mode of the retained X image may be the third color mode or the fourth color mode, but when it is determined that the special figure determination information JJ is normally a jackpot, the special figure determination information is displayed. The display mode of the retained X image corresponding to JJ is not the third color mode or the fourth color mode. For this reason, in the high-probability electric power support game state, the display of the storage X image in the third color mode or the fourth color mode functions as a leverage confirmation effect.

  In the high-probability electric power support game state, even if it is determined that the special figure determination information JJ is a big hit in any of the communication A, the communication B, and the special A to special D, the special figure determination information JJ Even when is determined to be a loss, the display mode of the protective X image corresponding to the special image determination information JJ may be the first color mode and the second color mode. However, as described in Example EX7_11, the expectation of the corresponding jackpot becomes higher in the order of the first, second, third, and fourth color modes, starting from the first color mode.

  How to properly use the first to sixth color modes in the low-probability electric support game state (so-called time saving state) may be the same as the different usage methods of the first to sixth color modes in the low-probability non-electric support game state. The same method may be used as the proper usage of the first to sixth color modes in the high probability power support game state.

  The effect of setting the display mode of the reserved image corresponding to the special image determination information JJ to any one of the second to sixth color modes is based on the result of the preliminary determination to the special image determination information JJ, and the special image determination information JJ. Is a kind of pre-reading notice effect that is executed before the variable display of the special symbol is started (in other words, before the special symbol determination is performed on the special symbol determination information JJ). In addition to the display of the reserved image, the pre-reading notice effect based on the result of the pre-judgment to the special image determination information JJ can be used to perform the lever-like production, the simple-probability production, the simple-probability production, and the super-probability production for the special-drawing determination information JJ. It may be realized.

  For example, when the special figure determination information JJ is acquired based on the establishment of the first or second start condition, an image display other than the reserved image or a specific sound is performed based on the result of the preliminary determination for the special figure determination information JJ. It is also possible to realize the leverage confirmation production, the simple confirmation production, the simple confirmation production, or the super confirmation production by the look-ahead notice production based on the output of.

――― Example EX7_13 ――――
Example EX7_13 will be described. If the special figure determination information JJ is a loss or if it is determined by the special figure determination or pre-determination that the winning combination is a probability variation jackpot, the probability of executing the leverage confirmation effect for the special figure determination information JJ. , It is better to increase in the high-probability electric sapo game state than in the low-probability non-electric sapo game state, and may be increased in the high-probability electric sapo game state than in the low-probability electric sapo game state.

  That is, for example, in the high-probability electric power support game state, if the special figure determination information JJ is a loss or if it is determined by the special figure determination that the winning is a probability variation jackpot, the lever definite production in the variation production HE ( For example, the leverage confirmation effect RK of FIG. 73 (c) is executed with the first leverage confirmation execution probability (for example, 5%), and is a special figure in the low-probability non-electric support game state or the low-probability electric support game state. When it is determined by the special drawing determination that the determination information JJ is a loss or that the player has won the probability variation jackpot, the leverage confirmation effect (for example, the leverage confirmation effect RK in FIG. 73 (c)) is included in the variation effect HE. The probability of execution of the leverage probability effect (appearance probability) is determined by a lottery using a random number for performance so that the second probability of probability execution is lower than the first probability of probability execution (0.5%, for example). ) Should be controlled. The same applies to the reversible confirmation production by the look-ahead notice production.

  Whether or not a jackpot occurs in the low-probability gaming state is an important concern of the player, while in the high-probability gaming state, whether or not a probability variation jackpot occurs is an important concern of the player. . Therefore, by increasing the appearance frequency of the Lever certainty effect in the high-probability game state rather than in the low-probability game state, it is possible to effectively increase the tension and interest of the game in the high-probability game state.

――― Example EX7_14 ――――
Example EX7_14 will be described. With reference to FIG. 74, in the case where the jackpot finalization effect is executed, the leverage certainty effect restriction control that prevents the leverage certainty effect RK from being executed after the jackpot finalization effect is described above, and with reference to FIG. 75, The definite production limit control that prevents the jackpot definite production from being executed before the lever definite production RK is executed in the case where the leverage definite production RK is executed has been described above.

  However, the effect control unit 403 is capable of executing a plurality of types of leverage confirmation effects as well as a plurality of types of jackpot confirmation effects, and in all combinations of the leverage confirmation effects and jackpot confirmation effects, the leverage confirmation effect restriction control. And the fixed effect limitation control is not always applied.

That is, the leverage probability effect restriction control and the confirmed effect restriction control are applied to the first combination of the leverage probability effect and the jackpot final effect, and the leverage probability effect and the jackpot final effect are applied to the second combination. The effect limit control and the fixed effect limit control are not applied.
Therefore, when the jackpot confirmation effect according to the first combination is executed, the leverage confirmation effect according to the first combination is not executed after the jackpot confirmation effect is executed, and the leverage confirmation effect according to the first combination is not performed. When is executed, the jackpot finalization effect related to the first combination is not executed before the execution of the lever certain effect.
On the other hand, in the case where the jackpot confirmation effect related to the second combination is executed, the leverage confirmation effect related to the second combination may be executed after the jackpot confirmation effect is executed. When the effect is executed, the jackpot finalizing effect according to the second combination may be executed before the execution of the lever certain effect.

  Some examples of combinations belonging to the first combination have already been shown with reference to FIGS. 79 and 83, so here, examples of combinations belonging to the second combination will be given.

  Typically, for example, a reserved image of a sixth color mode (rainbow color) is displayed as a reserved image corresponding to the special figure determination information JJ, and then, some kind of lever is displayed in the variation effect HE for the special figure determination information JJ. There may be a case where the definite production is executed. Further, for example, a jackpot finalization effect (P flash effect or P siren effect) including the output of a specific sound is executed at the same time as the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and then some leverage confirmation effect is executed during the variable display of the special symbol. It is possible that

  As described above, there may be a case where the leverage certain effect limiting control and the finalized effect limiting control are not applied, but the present invention is one of the combinations of the certainty confirming effect and the jackpot finalizing effect that can be executed by the effect control unit 403. The game machine to which the leverage certain effect limit control and the fixed effect limit control are applied only in the combination of.

  This will be further explained. The jackpot finalization effect and the lever certainty effect (hereinafter referred to as the jackpot finalization effect and the lever certainty effect according to the first combination in which the leverage certainty effect restriction control and the certainty effect restriction control are applied to the plurality of jackpot finalization effects and the plurality of leverage certain effects that can be executed by the gaming machine 100 , Jackpot finalization effect Xa and leverage confirmation effect Ya) and a second combination to which the leverage confirmation effect restriction control and the confirmation effect restriction control are not applied, the jackpot confirmation effect and the leverage confirmation effect (hereinafter, jackpot confirmation effect Xb and the lever confirmation effect). Probability production Yb)). The effects Xa, Ya, Xb, and Yb here are based on the result of the special drawing determination with respect to the special drawing determination information JJ, and in the variable effect HE (during the period of the variable display of the special symbol with respect to the special drawing determination information JJ). It can be executed.

The jackpot confirmation effect Xa may belong to any of a simple winning effect, a simple certainty effect, and a super certainty effect. As the jackpot finalization effect Xa, there may be a jackpot finalization effect Xa1 that functions as a simple winning effect, a jackpot finalization effect Xa2 that functions as a simple certainty accuracy effect, and a jackpot finalization effect Xa3 that functions as a super certainty effect.
The jackpot confirmation effect Xb may belong to any of a simple winning effect, a simple certainty effect, and a super certainty effect. As the jackpot finalization effect Xb, there may be a jackpot finalization effect Xb1 which functions as a simple winning effect, a jackpot finalization effect Xb2 which functions as a simple certainty effect, and a jackpot finalization effect Xb3 which functions as a super certain effect.

  The leverage confirmation effect control and the confirmation effect control are applied to the jackpot confirmation effect Xa and the leverage confirmation effect Ya, and the effect control unit 403 determines that the jackpot confirmation effect Xa is executed in the variable effect HE. In a case where the lever certainty effect Ya is not executed after the execution of Xa and the lever certainty effect Ya is executed in the variation effect HE (when it is decided to execute the lever certainty production Ya in the variation effect content determination processing). In), the jackpot finalizing effect Xa is not executed before the lever certainty effect Ya is executed.

  For example (see FIG. 84), when the jackpot finalization effect Xa is a simple winning effect, a simple certainty effect or a super certainty effect (for example, the first, second or third special CI effect) that belongs to the reach medium effect system, a notice effect is produced. The lever certain effect belonging to the system (for example, the serif advance notice effect that causes the fourth special dialog to appear) functions as the lever certain effect Ya. In addition, what has been described above as the jackpot final effect and the lever probability effect to which the lever probability effect limit control and the final effect limit control are applied correspond to the jackpot final effect Xa and the lever probability effect Ya (see FIGS. 79 and 83, etc.). ).

  The leverage confirmation effect control and the confirmation effect control are not applied to the jackpot confirmation effect Xb and the leverage confirmation effect Yb, and the effect control unit 403 determines the jackpot when executing the jackpot determination effect Xb in the variable effect HE. The lever certainty effect Yb may be executed (executable) after execution of the effect Xb, and when the lever certainty effect Yb is executed in the variable effect HE (when the lever certainty effect Yb is changed in the variable effect content determination process, In some cases (when it is decided to execute), the jackpot confirmation effect Xb is executed (executable) before the lever certain effect Yb is executed.

  For example (see FIG. 84), the jackpot finalization effect Xb is a simple winning effect, a simple certainty effect or a super certain effect (for example, a serif advance notice effect in which a first, second or third special line appears) belonging to the notice effect system. At this time, the lever certainty effect (for example, the fourth special CI effect) that belongs to the medium reach production system functions as the certainty certainty effect Yb. Further, for example, when the jackpot confirmation effect Xb is a P flash effect or a P siren effect that is executed at the same time as the start of the variation of the special symbol for the special symbol determination information JJ, all the leverage confirmation that can be performed after the variation of the special symbol is started. The productions, for example, the relevance certain productions that belong to the notice production system (for example, the serif notice production that causes the fourth special dialogue to appear) and the relevance productions that belong to the mid-reach production system (for example, the fourth special CI production) are defined as the relevance productions Yb. Will work.

  The effect control unit 403 executes only the effect Xa among the effects Xa, Ya, Xb, and Yb in the variable effect content determination process based on the variation start command including the result of the special figure determination for the special figure determination information JJ. In the case of deciding, in the case of deciding only execution of the effect Ya, in the case of deciding execution of both the effects Xa and Ya, in the case of deciding only execution of the effect Xb, and in the case of deciding only execution of the effect Yb. There is a case where it is decided to execute both the effects Xb and Yb, and a case where it is decided not to execute all the effects Xa, Ya, Xb and Yb, and the variable effect HE according to the decided contents is executed.

  Then, for example, the special figure determination information JJ has been won as a jackpot, and a simple winning effect, a simple certainty effect, or a super certainty effect (for example, the first, second or third special CI effect) that belongs to the reach-in-reproduction system is a big hit. If it is decided to execute as a final production, and if it is decided to execute a lever probable production belonging to the notice production system (for example, a serif notice production that causes the fourth special dialogue to appear) as a leverage probable production, these jackpots decided to be executed are confirmed. The effect and the sure probability effect will function as the jackpot finalizing effect Xa and the sure probability effect Ya. In the time series, the jackpot final production that belongs to the mid-reach production system is not executed after the jackpot confirmation production that belongs to the announcement production system, and the jackpot that belongs to the mid-reach production system is confirmed before the leverage production that belongs to the announcement production system. This is because the production is never executed.

Further, for example, the special figure determination information JJ is a big hit, and a simple winning effect, a simple certainty effect, or a super certainty effect belonging to the notice effect system (for example, a serif notice for causing the first, second, or third special lines to appear) If it is determined that the effect) is executed as the jackpot finalization effect, and that the lever certain effect belonging to the mid-reach effect system (for example, the fourth special CI effect) is executed as the leverage certain effect, the jackpot determined to be executed is determined. The effect and the sure probability effect function as the jackpot finalizing effect Xb and the sure effect Yb. This is because the execution timing of the jackpot finalization production belonging to the notice production system is a timing before the execution timing of the leverage certain production belonging to the medium production system for reach.
Similarly, for example, the special figure determination information JJ has been won as a jackpot, and it is determined that the P flash effect or the P siren effect is executed as a jackpot finalized effect at the same time when the variation of the special symbol for the special figure determination information JJ starts. When it is decided to execute the lever definite production belonging to the notice production system (for example, the serif preliminary production that makes the fourth special dialogue appear) or the lever definite production belonging to the mid-reach production system (for example, the fourth special CI production) as the definite production. The jackpot finalization effect and the lever certainty effect determined to be executed will function as the jackpot finalization effect Xb and the leverage certainty effect Yb.

  Except that the leverage confirmation effect control and the final production restriction control are not applied, the matters described above in the seventh embodiment (excluding the description in Example EX7_14) or the matters described below for the jackpot fixed production and the leverage production. As long as there is no contradiction, may be applied to the jackpot finalization effect Xb and the lever certainty effect Yb.

――― Example EX7_15 ――――
Example EX7_15 will be described. The production control unit 403 may operate in any of a plurality of modes including a normal mode and a premium up mode. The mode in which the effect control unit 403 actually operates is called an operation mode. In the initial state of the gaming machine 100, the operation mode of the effect control unit 403 is the normal mode.

  When the predetermined mode setting condition is satisfied, the effect control unit 403 can accept the mode setting operation by the player and set the operation mode to any one of the plurality of modes based on the mode setting operation. When the special symbol is in the variable stop period and is not during the jackpot game, and the number of held information U1 and U2 are both 0, the mode setting condition is satisfied. It may be considered that the mode setting condition is satisfied in the so-called customer waiting state. The mode setting condition may be satisfied even in a part of the variable display period of the special symbol. The mode setting operation is accepted by the effect button 121 and the cross key 122.

  When the special drawing determination information JJ has won the big hit of any of the communication A, the communication B, and the special A to the special D, the effect control unit 403 executes the simple winning effect for the special drawing determination information JJ. Whether or not to decide is determined by a lottery using a random number for production, and when the special figure determination information JJ has won any of the special A to special D jackpots, the special figure determination information JJ is Whether or not to execute the simple certainty effect is determined by lottery using a random number for effect, and when the special figure determination information JJ is a special B or special D jackpot, the special figure determination information is obtained. Whether or not to execute the super-accurate production for JJ is determined by lottery using random numbers for production, but the probability that these jackpot finalized productions (simple winning production, simple certainty production, super-probable production) are usually executed. The mode and the premier up mode are different from each other. This will be described in detail.

In the low-probability non-electric power support game state or the low-probability electric power support game state, the special figure determination information JJ is a low probability case CS _A1 that has been selected as a jackpot of the communication A, communication B and special A to special D. Think In the low-probability case CS _A1, the effect control unit 403 sets the probability that the simple winning effect is executed with respect to the special drawing determination information JJ (for example, the probability that the simple winning effect is executed in the variable effect HE) to the premier up mode. In the case of being set to, the first definite system up control may be performed to make the operation mode higher than in the case of being set to the normal mode.
Consider the low-probability case CS _{A2 in} which the special figure determination information JJ wins any of the special jackpots A to D in the low-probability non-electricity support game state or the low-probability electric support game state. In the low accuracy case CS _A2, the effect control unit 403 sets the probability that the simple certainty effect is performed on the special figure determination information JJ (for example, the probability that the simple certainty effect is executed in the variable effect HE) to be the premier up mode. In the case of being set to, the second definite system up control may be performed to make the operation mode higher than in the case of being set to the normal mode.
Consider a low-probability case CS _{A3 in} which the special figure determination information JJ wins the special B or special D jackpot in the low-probability non-electrical support game state or the low-probability electric support game state. In the low accuracy case CS _A3, the effect control unit 403 sets the probability of executing the super-accuracy effect to the special figure determination information JJ (for example, the probability of executing the super-accuracy effect in the variable effect HE) in the premier up mode. In the case of being set to, the third definite system up control may be performed to make the operation mode higher than in the case of being set to the normal mode.

Consider a high-probability case CS _{B1 in} which the special figure determination information JJ wins any of the big hits of the common A, the common B, and the special A to the special D in the high probability electric support game state. The effect control unit 403 in the highly accurate case CS _B1 does not perform the above-described first fixed system up control (however, a modification that allows it to be performed is also possible).
Consider a high-probability case CS _{B2 in} which the special figure determination information JJ wins any of the special A to special D jackpots in the high-probability electric power support game state. The effect control unit 403 in the highly accurate case CS _B2 may perform the above-described second fixed system up control.
Consider a high-probability case CS _{B3 in} which the special-drawing determination information JJ wins the special B or special D jackpot in the high-probability electric power support game state. The effect control unit 403 in the highly accurate case CS _B3 may perform the above-described third fixed system up control.

  When the operation mode of the effect control unit 403 is set to the normal mode, each control related to the effect described above in the seventh embodiment and each control related to the effect described in each embodiment other than the seventh embodiment are performed. It is realized (however, it may be realized when the operation mode of the effect control unit 403 is set to the premier mode).

  The lever certainty effect restriction control and the confirmed effect restriction control described in the seventh embodiment can be applied to all the embodiments other than the seventh embodiment.

<< Eighth Embodiment >>
An eighth embodiment of the gaming machine 100 will be described.

  Referring back to FIG. In the eighth embodiment as well, unless otherwise specified, the special figure variation pattern determination is performed using the special figure variation pattern table 2300 shown in FIG. 51. When the special figure determination information JJ is a special B or special D jackpot, the special figure variation patterns THp_d [1] to THp_d [Nd] are determined by the special figure variation pattern determination for the special figure determination information JJ. Any one of them will be selected, and Nd may be 3 or more, but here, the special figure variation patterns THp_d [1] and THp_d [2] of the special figure variation patterns THp_d [1] to THp_d [Nd] are selected. ]] In the simplest case, “Nd = 2” may be set.

  Referring to FIG. In the eighth embodiment, when the special B or special D jackpot is won, the execution probability of the premiere effect (in other words, the execution ratio) is determined in consideration of the variation time of the special symbol. The premiere effect is a jackpot confirmed effect that has a special effect mode that is executed only when the special B or special D jackpot is won, and is an effect that belongs to the above-described super certainty effect.

  Specifically, the effect control unit 403 may execute the premier effect on the special figure determination information JJ only when the special figure determination information JJ is a special B or special D jackpot. (For example, the premiere effect may be executed in the variable effect HE). When the special drawing determination information JJ is lost or if the special A, normal B, special A and special C jackpot is won, the effect control unit 403 responds to the special drawing determination information JJ. The premiere effect is not executed (for example, the probability that the premier effect is executed in the variable effect HE is zero).

When the special figure determination information JJ is a special B or special D jackpot, the probability that the premium effect is executed for the special figure determination information JJ (for example, the premium effect is executed in the variable effect HE). The probability of being performed is represented by KP (see FIG. 94). The production control unit 403 variably controls this probability KP in consideration of the variation time of the special symbol defined in the variation production pattern selected by the main control unit 401. Specifically, paying attention to the special figure variation patterns THp_d [1] and THp_d [2], when the special figure variation pattern THp_d [1] is selected, the premium effect is executed for the special figure determination information JJ. that the probability KP expressed in KP _S, the probability KP which premier effect is performed on special symbol determination information JJ when JP diagram fluctuation pattern THp_d [2] is selected represented by KP _L, "1 ≧ KP _S > KP _L ≧ 0 ″ is satisfied. At this time, _"KP S = 1" may be used as the, in addition to the _"KP S = 1" or instead of _"KP S = 1", may be _"KP L = 0". Selection of Specific numerical example, the probability KP _S indicating the execution ratio of the premier effect at the time of selection of Japanese Figure variation pattern THp_d [1] together with is set to 80%, especially view change patterns THp_d [2] probability KP _L indicating the execution ratio of the premium presentation effects in time is set to 30%.

  Referring to FIG. 95, that is, when the special drawing determination information JJ is a big hit of special B or special D, a relatively short change time is selected by the main control unit 401 as the change time of the special symbol and The effect control unit 403 controls execution / non-execution of the premier effect through a lottery related to the effect control so that the premier effect is more easily executed when the determined variation time is relatively longer than when the selected and determined time. To do. In the example shown in FIG. 95, the premium effect is the third special character effect (see FIGS. 53 and 54 (c)), but any effect belonging to the super certain effect can be used as the premium effect.

  The special B or special D jackpot is the most preferable jackpot for the player, and at the time of winning the special B or special D jackpot, it takes enough time to stir up the game to see if such a jackpot will occur. In most cases, a long-time special figure variation pattern capable of executing the SP reach effect is selected in order to raise the excitement. For example, when the special B or special D jackpot is won, the selection probability TKd [2] of the long-time special figure fluctuation pattern THp_d [2] is the short-term special figure fluctuation pattern THp_d [1] selection probability. It is set to several times to several tens times TKd [1] (see FIG. 51).

  Further, among the special figure fluctuation patterns corresponding to the execution of the reach effect, the short time special figure fluctuation pattern is associated with the normal reach effect, while the long time special figure fluctuation pattern is associated with the SP reach effect. The expectation degree of the jackpot (for example, 1%) corresponding to is set to be sufficiently smaller than the expectation degree of the jackpot (for example, 30%) corresponding to the SP reach effect. For this reason, the player tends to disregard the normal reach effect by thinking that the normal reach effect will not be a big hit, and further, the reach effect executed at the time of the most preferable special B or special D big hit. It is speculated that he thinks that there will be no normal reach production.

  As described above, the case where the jackpot game by the jackpot of the special B or the special D is executed via the normal reach effect is a rare case, while the jackpot winning probability of the special B or the special D is not high. The premiere effect is not executed unless it is determined that the premiere effect is to be executed after the special B or special D jackpot is won. Therefore, the premier effect itself is a rare effect.

  In the present embodiment, in consideration of these, in a rare case where the jackpot game by the jackpot of the special B or the special D is executed via the normal reach production, the rare premier production is easily executed. As a result, when you experience the rare pattern of being a special B or special D jackpot via the normal reach production, it is more likely that you will be able to watch the rare premier production as well, which gives the player a triple pleasure (special B or special D). It is possible to feel the joy of hitting the jackpot, the joy of being able to experience the rare production pattern, and the joy of watching the rare premiere production.

  In addition, since the SP reach production has a high expectation of a big hit, when the SP reach production is executed, the player "will the premium production come out?" I think that there is a lot of thoughts about it (maybe because I am prepared for the appearance of the premiere production), so even if the premiere production actually appears, I do not often feel a big surprise. Conceivable. On the other hand, since the normal reach production has a low expectation of a big hit, when the normal reach production is executed, the player "will the premium production come out?" It is unlikely that you will have a feeling that "maybe", and in such a case, if you make the premiere production easy to appear and actually make the premiere production appear, it will give a great surprise to the player. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the game to a great extent in combination with the joy of the special B or special D jackpot game being played.

  The eighth embodiment includes the following Examples EX8_1 to EX8_8, and in Examples EX8_1 to EX8_8, detailed contents and modifications regarding the matters described above in the eighth embodiment will be described. The matters described above in the eighth embodiment are applied to the following Examples EX8_1 to EX8_8 as long as there is no particular description and there is no contradiction, and in each of Examples EX8_1 to EX8_8, there is a contradiction with the matters described above in the eighth embodiment. As for matters to be done, the description in each example has priority. Further, as long as there is no contradiction, the matters described in any of the embodiments EX8_1 to EX8_8 can be applied to any other embodiment (that is, implementation of any two or more of a plurality of embodiments). It is possible to combine examples).

――― Example EX8_1 ――――
Example EX8_1 will be described.

  FIG. 96 is an operation flowchart of the fluctuating effect content determination processing executed by the effect control unit 403 in response to the reception of the fluctuation start command. However, FIG. 96 is a flowchart of a part of the fluctuating effect content determination processing focusing on the jackpot finalizing effect (including the premier effect) that can be executed in the fluctuating effect HE. Although various other processes not actually shown in FIG. 96 are included in the variable effect content determination process, the description of the other processes will be omitted here. The change effect content determination process of FIG. 96 includes the processes of steps S411 to S417. When the variable effect HE is executed according to the items selected, determined, and set in the processing of each step of FIG. 96 and the execution of the jackpot finalized effect (including the premier effect) is determined, each of the steps of FIG. 96 is executed. According to the items selected, determined, and set in the process, the jackpot finalized effect (including the premier effect) is executed in the variable effect HE.

  In the fluctuation effect content determination process, when the fluctuation start command is received, the effect control unit 403 analyzes the fluctuation start command in step S411, and in step S412, the special figure determination result included in the fluctuation start command is obtained. Based on this, the variation effect pattern that defines the content of the variation effect HE is selected from the plurality of variation effect patterns stored in the variation effect pattern table. The variation effect HE based on the variation effect pattern selected here is executed. In the following step S413, the effect control unit 403 confirms whether or not the special figure determination information JJ is a special B or special D jackpot, and the special figure determination information JJ is a special B or special D jackpot. If the special figure determination information JJ is not a special B or special D jackpot, the process proceeds to step S416.

In step S414, the effect control unit 403 performs a premium effect execution determination process for determining whether to perform a premium effect. In this premiere effect execution determination process, according to the above-mentioned gist, when the special figure variation pattern that defines the variation time of the relatively short special symbol is selected, the variation time of the relatively long special symbol is defined. Premier production is executed by lottery using random numbers for production so that the probability of executing the premiere production (in other words, the execution ratio of the premiere production) is higher than when the special figure variation pattern is selected. Decide whether or not. When paying attention to the special figure variation patterns THp_d [1] and THp_d [2] (see FIG. 51), it is determined in the premiere effect execution determination processing that the premier effect is to be executed when the pattern THp_d [1] is selected. The probability of being performed is “KP _S ”, and the probability of being determined to execute the premiere effect is “KP _L ” when the pattern THp_d [2] is selected, and the probability KP _S is the probability as described above. It is higher than KP _L (see Figure 94).

  When it is determined to execute the premier effect, the premier effect execution determination process also determines which kind of premier effect is to be executed and at which timing.

  With reference to FIG. 97, the effect control unit 403 is capable of executing a plurality of types of premier effects having different effect modes, and when it is determined to execute the premier effect, a random number for effect is generated in the premier effect execution determination processing. Which premier effect is to be executed is selected and determined by the lottery used, and further, at which timing in the variable effect HE, the premier effect decided to be executed is also determined.

For example, a plurality of candidate timings are set in advance within the execution period of the variation effect HE (that is, the variation display period of the special symbol), and any one of the plurality of candidate timings is selected by a lottery using a random number for production, and the premier It may be determined as the performance execution timing.
More specifically, for example, when the special figure variation pattern THp_d [2] associated with the execution of the SP reach effect is selected (see FIG. 41), at the start of variation of the special symbol or the decorative symbol (immediately after the start). , One or more candidate timings during the execution period of the pre-reach notice production, after the execution of the successful tempai production and before the start of the SP reach production, during the execution period of the production during SP reach, etc. It suffices to set them and select and decide the execution timing of the premier effect from the plurality of candidate timings.
Further, for example, when the special figure fluctuation pattern THp_d [1] associated with the execution of the normal reach effect is selected (see FIG. 43), when the special symbol or the decorative symbol starts to change (immediately after the start), the pre-reach notice effect is reached. 1 within the execution period of, the period after the success of the tempai success and until the normal reach production is started, the period after the start of the normal reach production and before the execution of the normal reach success production, and so on. The above candidate timings may be set, and the execution timing of the premier effect may be selected and determined from among the plurality of candidate timings.

  After the processing of step S414, the process proceeds to step S415. In step S415, it is confirmed whether or not it is determined to execute the premier effect in step S414. When it is determined that the premier effect is to be executed, the variable effect content determination processing is ended. When the execution of the premier effect is determined, the effect control unit 403 executes the premier effect of the type determined by itself at the timing determined by the effect in the variable effect HE. If it is not determined in step S414 to execute the premium effect, the process proceeds from step S415 to step S417.

  In step S416 that can be shifted from step S413, the effect control unit 403 confirms whether or not the special-drawing determination information JJ is a big hit. When the special figure determination information JJ is a big hit, the process proceeds from step S416 to step S417. However, when the special figure determination information JJ is a loss, it is determined that the big hit finalizing effect is not executed. The variation effect content determination processing ends.

  In step S417, the effect control unit 403 performs a finalized effect execution determination process for selecting and deciding whether or not to perform the big hit finalized effect and, in the case of performing the big hit finalized effect, which kind of big hit finalized effect to perform. . The selection and determination method here may be the same as that described above. For example, according to the table 3100 of FIG. 57, whether or not to perform the jackpot finalization effect, and when performing the jackpot finalization effect, what kind of jackpot. Select and decide whether to perform the finalized effect.

However, the transition from the operation of steps S413 and S416 to step S417 via step S416 is limited to the jackpot winning of communication A, communication B, special A or special C. For this reason, in step S417, which transitions via step S416, execution of the simple winning effect or simple certainty effect may be determined, but execution of the premier effect (super certainty effect) is not determined. In addition, in step S417 which shifts via step S415, the process of step S417 is controlled so that it is not determined that the premium effect (super-certain accuracy effect) is to be executed as the jackpot finalizing effect (( For example, when using the table 3100 of FIG. 57, the probability KA ₁₂ is set to zero).

  When it is determined in the finalized production execution determination process in step S417 that the simple winning production is to be executed, and there are a plurality of types of simple winning productions that the production control unit 403 can execute, which type of simple winning production is performed. It is also decided to execute the performance. For example, as shown in FIG. 53, in the case where the effect control unit 403 is configured to be able to execute a plurality of types of simple winning effects such as the first special character effect and the P-siren effect, as the simple winning effect. It is also determined which kind of simple winning effect is to be executed. The same applies to the simple definite production.

  When it is determined in step S417 that the jackpot finalization effect is to be performed, the execution timing of the jackpot finalization effect is also determined in step S417. Similar to the method of determining the execution timing of the premier effect in step S414, for example, any one of a plurality of predetermined candidate timings may be determined as the execution timing of the jackpot confirmation effect. After the processing of step S417, the variation effect content determination processing ends. When the execution of the jackpot confirmation effect is determined in step S417, the effect control unit 403 executes the jackpot confirmation effect of the type determined by itself at the timing determined by itself in the variable effect HE.

  In FIG. 98, in the variable effect HE by the SP reach hit effect based on the selection of the special figure change pattern THp_d [2], it is determined that the third special character effect is executed as the premier effect within the execution period of the SP reach effect. The flow of production when the player plays is shown.

  In FIG. 99, when it is determined to execute the third special character effect as the premier effect within the execution period of the normal reach effect in the variable effect HE with the normal reach hit effect based on the selection of the special figure fluctuation pattern THp_d [1], The flow of the production of is shown.

  In the production example of FIG. 98 and FIG. 99, after 2 tempai success productions are executed as tempai success productions, after 7 promotion productions in the re-lottery production, the 1st to 3rd decorative symbols are booked in the mode of the 7th It is stopped. In the variable effect HE when the premiere effect is executed, even if the tempe success effect is not 7 tempe success effects, there is a probability of 100% or less than 100% but close to 100% with a re-lottery effect. It is advisable to carry out the promotion effect and to permanently stop and display the first to third decorative symbols in the seventh zoro mode. As a result, the emotions that have risen in the premiere production can be further excited. However, in the variable effect HE when the premier effect is executed, the tempe success effect may be set to 7 tempe success effect with a certain probability.

  Further, in the example productions of FIGS. 98 and 99, the premier production is executed during the execution period of the reach production (SP reach production, normal reach production), but the execution timing of the premier production is variable production. Arbitrary timing during the execution period of HE (for example, at the start of the variation of the decorative pattern, the timing during the execution period of the pre-reach notice effect, or after the execution of the tempai success effect and before the reach effect is started. Timing).

  Incidentally, as described above with reference to FIG. 47, when the first to third decorative patterns are aligned in a zigzag pattern (in other words, the first to third decorative patterns are first zigzag patterns) The display positions and display sizes of the first and second decorative symbols (when the temporary stop display is performed) are different between the SP reach hit effect and the normal reach hit effect. In other words, in the SP reach hit production, the first to third decorative designs are aligned in a zigzag pattern in the SP reach success production, but at that time, the first and second decorative designs are small in size in the image display unit. It is displayed in the upper left corner area and the upper right corner area (display areas 2121 and 2122 in FIG. 47) of the entire display area 104. On the other hand, in the normal reach success production, the first to third decorative designs are aligned in a zigzag pattern in the normal reach success production, and at that time, the first and second decorative designs are large in size and all displayed on the image display unit 104. It is displayed near the center of the area (display areas 2111 and 2112 in FIG. 47). The display position and the display size of the third decorative symbol when the first to third decorative symbols are aligned in a zigzag pattern may be different between the SP reach hit effect and the normal reach hit effect.

  Further, the execution time of the normal reach effect is shorter than the execution time of the SP reach effect, and therefore, the first to third decorative patterns are the normal reach success effect from the time when the tempai success effect is performed in the variable effect HE by the normal reach hit effect. The time until it is aligned with the common numerical design is the same numerical design as the 1st to 3rd decorative designs in the SP reach success production from the time when the tempai success production is performed in the variable production HE by the SP reach reach production. It is shorter than the time to align, and the time from the start of normal reach production to the normal reach success production in the variation production HE by normal reach hit production until the first to third decorative designs are aligned with a common numerical design is SP. Fluctuating production by reach per hit SP reach from the start of SP reach production in HE Kou first, second and third decorative design is shorter than the time until it is flush by a common numerical symbol in production.

――― Example EX8_2 ――――
Example EX8_2 will be described. As described in the embodiment EX8_1, in the premiere effect execution determination processing in step S414 of FIG. 96, when it is determined that the premier effect is to be executed, it is also determined which premier effect is to be executed from a plurality of types of premier effects. To do. When determining the type of premier effect to be executed, the variation time of the special symbol defined by the selected special symbol variation pattern may be considered.

  This will be described with reference to FIG. Now, it is assumed that the effect control unit 403 is capable of executing a plurality of types of premier effects including the first to third premier effects. Each of the plurality of types of premier productions belongs to the super-probability production, and the production mode of the premier productions is different between the plurality of types of premiere productions. In the premium effect execution determination processing in step S414 of FIG. 96, when it is determined to execute the premium effect, the type of the premium effect to be executed may be selected and determined according to the table 5210 shown in FIG.

That is, when it is determined to execute the premier effect, in the premier effect execution determination processing according to the table 5210, when the comparatively short time special figure variation pattern THp_d [1] associated with the execution of the normal reach effect is selected. , The first premiere effect is selected with a probability KL ₁ , the second premier effect is selected with a probability KL ₂ , the third premier effect is selected with a probability KL ₃ , and When the comparatively long time special figure variation pattern THp_d [2] associated with the execution of the SP reach effect is selected, the first premium effect is selected with the probability KL ₄ as the premium effect to be actually executed. , The second premiere effect is selected with a probability KL ₅ , and the third premier effect is selected with a probability KL ₆ .

What should be noted here is that “KL ₃ = 0” and “1> KL ₆ > 0” are set. That is, when the special figure variation pattern THp_d [1] is selected, the third premiere effect is not executed, and when the special figure variation pattern THp_d [2] is selected, the third premiere effect is executed. It may be done. Each of the probabilities KL ₁ , KL ₂ , KL ₄ and KL ₆ is greater than zero.

When there are three types of premier productions that the production control unit 403 can execute, “KL ₁ + KL ₂ + KL ₃ = 1” and “KL ₄ + KL ₅ + KL ₆ = 1” should be satisfied. The probabilities KL ₁ , KL _2, and KL ₃ are 50%, 50%, and 0%, respectively, and the probabilities KL ₄ , KL _5, and KL ₆ are 30%, 30%, and 40%, respectively. However, there may be four types of premium effects that the effect control unit 403 can execute.

When the special figure variation pattern THp_d [1] for a relatively short time is selected, it is difficult to insert the premiere effect that is executed over a relatively long time into the variation effect HE because the variation time is short. . From this viewpoint, a table 5210 as shown in FIG. 100 is adopted. That is, here, it is assumed that the third premiere effect is a premier effect that is executed over a longer time than the first premier effect and the second premier effect. Therefore, the special figure variation pattern THp_d [ When 1] is selected, it is difficult to insert the third premiere effect into the variable effect HE. Therefore, “KL ₃ = 0” is set. On the other hand, when the special figure variation pattern THp_d [2] for a relatively long time is selected, it is easy to insert the third premium effect into the variation effect HE. Therefore, “KL ₆ > 0” is set.

As shown in FIG. 100, the probabilities KL ₁ , KL _2, and KL ₃ are 50%, 50%, and 0%, respectively, and the probabilities KL ₄ , KL _5, and KL ₆ are 30%, 30%, and 40%, respectively. In this case, when the special figure variation pattern THp_d [1] of a relatively short time is selected, the premier effect (first and second premium effects) that can be executed and the special figure variation pattern THp_d [2 of a relatively long time are available. ] When the special effect variation pattern THp_d [1] is selected, the premier effects (first to third premier effects) that can be executed are duplicated. You may make it and the special effect fluctuating pattern THp_d [2] and the premier production executable when not selected mutually overlap.

With reference to FIG. 101, in order to realize this, for example, the probabilities KL ₁ , KL _2, and KL ₃ are set to 100%, 0%, and 0%, respectively, and the probabilities KL ₄ , KL _5, and KL ₆ are set to 0, respectively. %, 50%, 50% may be used.

――― Example EX8_3 ――――
Example EX8_3 will be described. The normal reach hit production is not executed when the special figure determination information JJ is a big hit of any one of the regular A, regular B, special A and special C, and the special figure determination information JJ is special. It may be executed only when the jackpot of B or special D is won. In this case, the normal reach winning effect itself suggests that the special B or special D jackpot is won.

In order to realize this (see FIG. 51), simply set “Nb = Nc = Nd = 2” and then “TKb [1] = TKc [1] = 0”, “TKb [2]”. = TKc [2] = 1 ”and“ 1> TKd [2]> TKd [1]> 0 ”.
Alternatively, for example, each of Nb, Nc, and Nd may be 3 or more, but in this case, “TKb [1] = TKc [1] = 0”, “TKb [2]> 0”, and “TKc [2 ]> 0 ”and“ 1> TKd [2]> TKd [1]> 0 ”, and the normal reach hit effect is executed only when the special figure variation pattern THp_d [1] is selected.

  As a result, when a rare and surprising production in which the patterns are aligned in the normal reach production that the player has little expectation, a special value (special B or special D jackpot) is set in accordance with the rarity. Game) will be given to the player. By configuring the gaming machine 100 in this way, it is expected that the player's interest in the normal reach effect will be increased even a little, and the boring of the game under the situation where only the unexpected effect such as the normal reach effect occurs. It is possible to alleviate this (it is possible to keep the player feeling a certain amount of tension even under such circumstances).

  Alternatively, the normal reach hit effect is not executed when the special figure determination information JJ is a big hit of the communication A or the communication B, and the special figure determination information JJ is one of special A to special D. It may be executed only when the jackpot is won. In this case, it is suggested that the normal reach winning effect itself wins one of the special jackpots A to D.

In order to realize this (see FIG. 51), simply set “Nb = Nc = Nd = 2” and then “TKb [1] = 0”, “TKb [2] = 1”, “ 1> TKc [2]> TKc [1]> 0 ”and“ 1> TKd [2]> TKd [1]> 0 ”.
Alternatively, for example, each of Nb, Nc, and Nd may be 3 or more, but in this case, “TKb [1] = 0”, “TKb [2]> 0”, “1> TKc [2]> TKc. [1]> 0 ”and“ 1> TKd [2]> TKd [1]> 0 ”, and normal reach hit effect only when either of the special figure variation patterns THp_c [1] and THp_d [1] is selected. Should be executed.

――― Example EX8_4 ――――
Example EX8_4 will be described. Although the method of setting “1 ≧ KP _S > KP _L ≧ 0” has been described with reference to FIG. 94 and the like, “1 ≧ KP _L > KP _S ≧ 0 by reversing the magnitude relationship between the probabilities KP _S and KP _L. It is also possible to say. Then, when the special figure determination information JJ is a big hit of the special B or the special D, when the relatively long variation time is selected and determined by the main control unit 401 as the variation time of the special symbol, it is better. The premiere effect is more easily executed than when the relatively short variation time is selected and determined.

――― Example EX8_5 ――――
Example EX8_5 will be described. When it is determined that the premium effect is executed for the special-drawing determination information JJ, the premium effect is executed only once for the special-drawing determination information JJ, and the premium effect is not executed more than once. You can

――― Example EX8_6 ――――
Example EX8_6 will be described.

  Referring to FIG. 102, if it is determined that the premium effect is performed on the special figure determination information JJ, the premium effect may be performed on the special figure determination information JJ multiple times. That is, for example, when it is determined to execute the premium effect for the special figure determination information JJ, in the variable effect HE for the special figure determination information JJ, the first premiere effect is executed as the pre-reach notice effect, and then, The second premiere effect may be executed during the execution period of the reach effect (normal reach effect or SP reach effect). It is also possible to execute the premium effect three or more times for the special figure determination information JJ. When a plurality of premier effects are executed with respect to the special-drawing determination information JJ, the plurality of premier effects are performed after the i-th premier effect and the i-th premier effect. And the second premiere production (i is an arbitrary natural number).

  At this time, the i-th premiere effect and the (i + 1) -th premiere effect may be effects in the same effect mode (for example, both may be the third special character effects).

  Alternatively, the i-th premiere effect and the (i + 1) -th premier effect may be different effects. Although related to this, when the i-th premiere effect and the (i + 1) th premiere effect are executed, the i-th premiere effect and the (i + 1) th premier effect are the same effect modes. May be prohibited (that is, both may be prohibited from being the third special character effect).

When the i-th premier effect and the (i + 1) th premier effect are effects different from each other, the i-th premier effect and the (i + 1) th premier effect use a common effect means. There may be two premiere effects that are executed by using.
That is, for example, the i-th premiere effect may be the third special character effect and the (i + 1) -th premier effect may be the rainbow image effect (see FIGS. 53 and 54). In this case, the image display unit 104 is used as a common effect means.

  When the i-th premiere effect and the (i + 1) th premiere effect are two premier effects that are executed using a common effect means, the i-th premier effect execution period and the (i + 1) -th time There may be a case where the execution period of the premier effect is overlapped, and in this case, the former premier effect and the latter premier effect are executed at the same time. As a specific example, a form in which the third special character effect and the rainbow image effect are simultaneously executed is conceivable.

When the i-th premier effect and the (i + 1) th premier effect are effects different from each other, the i-th premier effect and the (i + 1) th premier effect require different effect means. There may be two premiere effects that are executed by using. As a result, compared to the case where the i-th premiere effect and the (i + 1) th premiere effect are realized by the common effect means, it is possible to give the player the satisfaction that the completely different premier effects can be viewed. . The effect control unit 403 may prohibit that the i-th premier effect and the (i + 1) th premier effect are realized by using a common effect means (that is, the i-th premier effect is After the execution is performed using the specific rendering means, the (i + 1) th premier rendering may not be executed using the specific rendering means).
That is, for example, the i-th premiere effect may be the third special character effect and the (i + 1) -th premier effect may be the P flash effect (see FIGS. 53 and 54). In this case, the i-th premiere effect is realized by using the image display unit 104, and the (i + 1) -th premier effect is built in the speaker 115 and the operation handle 119 which are different from the image display unit 104. It is realized by using a light emitting element. Further, in the case of using a production effect in which the production light unit 116 provided on the door frame 12 emits rainbow colors is used as a premier production, the image display unit 104 realizes the i-th premiere production, and The (i + 1) th premiere effect may be an effect in which the effect light unit 116 emits rainbow colors.

  When the i-th premier effect and the (i + 1) th premier effect are two premier effects that are executed using mutually different effect means, the i-th premier effect execution period and the (i + 1) -th time There may be a case where the execution period of the premier effect is overlapped, and in this case, the former premier effect and the latter premier effect are executed at the same time. As a specific example, a form in which the rainbow image effect and the P-flash effect are simultaneously executed can be considered.

――― Example EX8_7 ――――
Example EX8_7 will be described.

  Referring to FIG. 103, when it is determined to execute the premium effect for the special-drawing determination information JJ, the simple winning effect or the simple certainty effect is first executed for the special-drawing determining information JJ, and then the super-realistic effect is performed. It may be possible to execute a premier production belonging to the definite production. That is, for example, when it is determined to execute the premium effect for the special figure determination information JJ, in the variable effect HE for the special figure determination information JJ, the simple winning effect or the simple certainty effect is executed as the pre-reach notice effect, After that, the premiere effect may be executed during the execution period of the reach effect (normal reach effect or SP reach effect). This makes it possible to realize a flow of production in which the player's joy is divided into two stages and expanded, and the game can be greatly enlivened.

――― Example EX8_8 ――――
Example EX8_8 will be described. There are actually many special figure fluctuation patterns that can be selected when the special figure determination information JJ has won the special B or special D jackpot. There are a plurality of combinations of a special figure variation pattern that defines a relatively long variation time and a special figure variation pattern that defines a relatively short variation time.

  When the special figure determination information JJ is a special B or special D jackpot, a comparatively long special figure variation pattern THp_d [2] and a relatively short special figure variation pattern are selected. Although the method of making the execution probability (execution ratio) of the premier effect different when THp_d [1] is selected has been described, the method is not necessarily applicable to all of the plurality of combinations, and only a part of the combinations. The present invention also includes a form to which the method applies.

<< 9th Embodiment >>
A ninth embodiment of the gaming machine 100 will be described. The ninth embodiment includes the matters described in the eighth embodiment, and the matters described in the eighth embodiment may be applied to the ninth embodiment as long as there is no contradiction. In the ninth embodiment, the description in the ninth embodiment is prioritized with respect to the matters inconsistent with the matters described in the eighth embodiment. The ninth embodiment is characterized by the control relating to the number of executions of the premium effect.

  The ninth embodiment includes the following examples EX9_1 to EX9_10. As long as there is no contradiction, the matters described in any one of the embodiments EX9_1 to EX9_10 can be applied to any other embodiment (that is, any two or more embodiments among a plurality of embodiments). It is also possible to combine).

――― Example EX9_1 ――――
Example EX9_1 will be described.

  FIG. 104 is an operation flowchart of the fluctuating effect content determination processing executed by the effect control unit 403 in response to receiving the fluctuation start command. However, FIG. 104 is a flowchart of a part of the fluctuating effect content determination processing focusing on the jackpot finalizing effect (including the premier effect) that can be executed in the fluctuating effect HE. Although various other processes not actually shown in FIG. 104 are included in the variable effect content determination process, the description of the other processes will be omitted here. The variation effect content determination process of FIG. 104 includes each process of steps S511 to S520. When the variable effect HE is executed according to the items selected, determined, and set in the processing of each step of FIG. 104 and the execution of the jackpot finalized effect (including the premium effect) is determined, According to the items selected, determined, and set in the process, the jackpot finalized effect (including the premier effect) is executed in the variable effect HE.

  In the variation effect content determination process, when the variation start command is received, the effect control unit 403 analyzes the variation start command in step S511, and in step S512, the special figure determination result included in the variation start command is obtained. Based on this, the variation effect pattern that defines the content of the variation effect HE is selected from the plurality of variation effect patterns stored in the variation effect pattern table. The variation effect HE based on the variation effect pattern selected here is executed. In the following step S513, the effect control unit 403 confirms whether or not the special figure determination information JJ is a special B or special D jackpot, and the special figure determination information JJ is a special B or special D jackpot. When the special figure determination information JJ is not a special B or special D jackpot, the process proceeds to step S519.

In step S514, the effect control unit 403 performs a premium effect execution presence / absence determination process for determining whether or not to perform a premium effect. The determination method in this premium effect execution presence / absence determination processing is a method for determining whether or not to perform the premium effect described in the eighth embodiment (for example, a method for determining whether or not to perform the premium effect in step S414 of FIG. 96). Can be the same as. More specifically, for example, in step S514, when a special figure variation pattern that defines a relatively short variation time is selected as the variation time of the special symbol, a special figure that defines a relatively long variation time is selected. Whether or not to execute the premium effect by lottery using random numbers for effect, so that the probability of executing the premium effect (in other words, the execution rate of the premium effect) is higher than when the variation pattern is selected. decide. When paying attention to the special figure variation patterns THp_d [1] and THp_d [2] (see FIG. 51), if the premium effect is executed when the pattern THp_d [1] is selected in the premium effect execution presence / absence determination process. The probability to be determined is “KP _S ”, and the probability to be determined to execute the premiere effect is “KP _L ” when the pattern THp_d [2] is selected, and “1 ≧ KP _S > KP _L ≧”. It is set to 0 ".

However, it is also possible to reverse the magnitude relation between the probabilities KP _S and KP _L so that “1 ≧ KP _L > KP _S ≧ 0”. Then, when the special symbol determination information JJ is a big hit of the special B or the special D, when the variation time of the relatively long special symbol is selected and determined by the main control unit 401, it is relatively shorter. The probability that the premiere effect will be executed (in other words, the execution rate of the premier effect) will be higher than when the variation time of the special symbol is selected and determined.

  Further, for example, in the premium effect execution presence / absence determination processing in step S514, whether or not to perform the premium effect may be determined regardless of the variation time of the special symbol. That is, for example, when attention is paid to the special figure variation patterns THp_d [1] and THp_d [2] (see FIG. 51), in step S514, the special figure variation patterns THp_d [1] and THp_d [are set for the special figure determination information JJ. Regardless of which of 2) is selected, it may be determined that the premium effect is executed with a predetermined probability (for example, with a probability of 30%), and the premium effect is not executed with the remaining probability. good.

  In step S515 following the process of step S514, it is checked whether or not it is determined to execute the premiere effect in step S514. If it is determined to execute the premier effect, the process proceeds to step S516 while executing the premier effect. Then, if not determined, the process proceeds to step S520.

  In step S516, the production control unit 403 performs a premier production execution count determination process for determining how many times the premiere production is to be executed for the special figure determination information JJ. In the process of step S516, the variation time of the special symbol defined by the special figure variation pattern selected for the special figure determination information JJ is considered.

  Refer to FIG. In the premium effect execution count determination process in step S516, the effect control unit 403 determines the number of executions of the premium effect according to the table 5510 held by itself.

In the premium effect execution count determination process according to the table 5510, the effect control unit 403
When the special figure fluctuation pattern THp_d [1] associated with execution of the normal reach effect is selected, the number of times of execution of the premier effect is set to 1 with probability KP _S1 , KP _S2 , and KP _{S3, respectively} . Decided twice, three times,
When the special figure variation pattern THp_d [2], which is associated with the execution of the SP reach effect, is selected, the number of times of execution of the premier effect is set with the probabilities KP _L1 , KP _L2 , and KP _L3 , respectively. Decided once, twice, and three times.

Here, “KP _S1 + KP _S2 + KP _S3 = 1” and “KP _L1 + KP _L2 + KP _L3 = 1”, and the probabilities KP _S1 , KP _S2 , KP _L1 , KP _L2, and KP _L3 are each 0. Although it has a large value, the probability KP _S3 is zero. Specifically, for example, the probabilities KP _S1 , KP _S2 , and KP _S3 are 50%, 50%, and 0%, respectively, and the probabilities KP _L1 , KP _L2 , and KP _L3 are 30% and 30%, respectively. % And 40%. Therefore, when the special figure variation pattern THp_d [1] is selected for the special figure determination information JJ, the upper limit number of premier effects that can be executed for the special figure determination information JJ is 2. When the special figure variation pattern THp_d [2] is selected for the figure determination information JJ, the upper limit number of premier effects that can be executed for the special figure determination information JJ is three.

Further, in the table 5510, the probabilities KP _S1 to KP _S3 and KP _L1 to satisfy “(KP _S1 × 1 + KP _S2 × 2 + KP _S3 × 3)” <“(KP _L1 × 1 + KP _L2 × 2 + KP _L3 × 3)”. KP _L3 may be defined. As a result, in step S516, the average number of executions of the premium effect determined to be executed is when the special figure variation pattern THp_d [2] is selected more than when the special figure variation pattern THp_d [1] is selected. It becomes larger in the direction of. However, “(KP _S1 x1 + KP _S2 x2 + KP _S3 x3)”> “(KP _L1 x1 + KP _L2 x2 + KP _L3 x3)” or “(KP _S1 x1 + KP _S2 x2 + KP _S3 x3)” = “(KP _L1 × 1 + KP _L2 × 2 + KP _L3 × 3) ”is also possible.

Further, regarding the probabilities KP _S1 and KP _S2 , “KP _S1 > KP _S2 ”, “KP _S1 <KP _S2 ”, or “KP _S1 = KP _S2 ” may be used. Of the probabilities KP _{L1 to} KP _L3 , the probability KP _L1 may be the maximum, the probability KP _L2 may be the maximum, and the probability KP _L3 may be the maximum.

  In step S517 following step S516, a premium effect execution type determination process for determining the type of premier effect that is actually executed is performed. As described above, the effect control unit 403 can execute a plurality of types of premier effects having different effect modes, and in step S517, which premier effect is to be executed by lottery using the effect random numbers. Select and decide. When it is determined that the premier effect is to be executed a plurality of times, the types of the premier effect are selected and determined respectively.

  In step S518 subsequent to step S517, a premium effect execution timing determination process for determining the execution timing of the premium effect is performed. When it is determined that the premier effect is executed a plurality of times, the execution timings of the premier effect are selected and determined respectively. Timings different from each other may be selected and determined as execution timings of a plurality of premier effects.

For example, a plurality of candidate timings (here, three or more candidate timings) are set in advance within the execution period of the variable effect HE (that is, the variable display period of the special symbol), and one of the plurality of candidate timings is effected. For each premiere effect to be executed, it may be determined as the execution timing of the premier effect by lottery using a random number for use.
For example, when the special figure fluctuation pattern THp_d [2] associated with the execution of the SP reach effect is selected (see FIG. 41), when the special symbol or the decorative symbol starts to change (immediately after the start), the pre-reach notice effect is reached. Within the execution period of, after the execution of the tempai success production, until the SP reach production is started, within the execution period of the production during SP reach, etc., one or more candidate timings are set, respectively. From among the plurality of candidate timings, the execution timing of the premium effect may be selected and determined for each premium effect to be executed.
In addition, for example, when the special figure fluctuation pattern THp_d [1] associated with the execution of the normal reach effect is selected (see FIG. 43), when the special symbol or the decorative symbol starts changing (immediately after the start), the pre-reach notice effect is reached. During the execution period of, the time period after the successful execution of the temporary reach effect and before the normal reach effect is started, the time period after the start of the normal reach effect and before the execution of the normal reach success effect, and so on. It suffices to set the above candidate timings and select and determine the execution timing of the premier effect for each premier effect to be executed from the plurality of candidate timings.

  After the processing of step S518, the variable effect content determination processing ends. When the execution of the premier effect is determined to be performed once or more, the effect control unit 403 determines the number of times of the type that the effect control unit 403 has determined at the timing determined by itself in the variable effect HE. Perform a premiere production.

  In step S519 which can be shifted from step S513, the effect control unit 403 confirms whether or not the special-drawing determination information JJ is a big hit. If the special figure determination information JJ is a big hit, the process proceeds from step S519 to step S520. However, if the special figure determination information JJ is a loss, it is determined that the big jackpot final effect is not executed. The variation effect content determination processing ends.

In step S520, the effect control unit 403 performs a finalized effect execution determination process for selecting and deciding whether or not to perform the big hit finalized effect and, in the case of performing the big hit finalized effect, which type of big hit finalized effect to perform. . The selection and determination method here may be the same as that described above. For example, according to the table 3100 of FIG. 57, whether or not to perform the jackpot finalization effect, and when performing the jackpot finalization effect, what kind of jackpot. Select and decide whether to perform the finalized effect. However, the transition from the operation of steps S513 and S519 to step S520 via step S519 is limited to the case of the jackpot winning of the regular A, regular B, special A and special C. For this reason, in step S520, which shifts via step S519, execution of the simple winning effect or simple certainty effect may be determined, but execution of the premier effect (super certainty effect) is not determined. In addition, in step S520 that shifts via step S515, the process of step S520 is controlled so that it is not determined that the premium effect (super-probability effect) is to be executed as the jackpot finalized effect ( For example, when using the table 3100 of FIG. 57, the probability KA ₁₂ is set to zero).

  When it is determined in the finalized production execution determination processing in step S520 that the simple winning production is to be executed, and there are a plurality of types of simple winning productions that the production control unit 403 can execute, which type of simple winning production is performed. It is also decided to execute the performance. For example, as shown in FIG. 53, in the case where the effect control unit 403 is configured to be able to execute a plurality of types of simple winning effects such as the first special character effect and the P-siren effect, as the simple winning effect. It is also determined which kind of simple winning effect is to be executed. The same applies to the simple definite production.

  When it is determined in step S520 that the jackpot finalization effect is to be performed, the execution timing of the jackpot finalization effect is also determined in step S520. Similar to the method of determining the execution timing of the premier effect in step S514, for example, any one of a plurality of predetermined candidate timings may be determined as the execution timing of the jackpot confirmation effect. After the processing of step S520, the variation effect content determination processing ends. When the execution of the jackpot confirmation effect is determined in step S520, the effect control unit 403 executes the jackpot confirmation effect of the type determined by itself in the variation effect HE at the timing determined by the effect controller HE.

  FIG. 106 shows an example of the flow of effects when it is determined to execute three premier effects in the variable effect HE by the SP reach per effect based on the selection of the special figure fluctuation pattern THp_d [2]. In the example production of FIG. 106, when the two tempai success productions are executed as the tempai success productions, the P flash production is executed as the first premiere production, and then, the second premiere is formed by being inserted in the SP reach mid production. A third special character effect is executed as an effect, and then a rainbow button display effect is executed as a third premiere effect in the final winning effect (this third premiere effect may be a rainbow lever display effect). .

  FIG. 107 shows an example of the flow of effects when it is determined to execute the two-time premier effect in the variable effect HE by the normal reach hit effect based on the selection of the special figure fluctuation pattern THp_d [1]. In the example of production of FIG. 107, when the second tempe success production is executed as the tempo success production, the P flash production is executed as the first premiere production, and then the third special production is performed as the second premiere production in the normal reach production. Character production is being executed.

  In each of the effect examples of FIGS. 106 and 107, the first to third decorative symbols are permanently stopped and displayed in the form of the 7th zoro after 7 promotion effects in the re-lottery effect. In the variable effect HE when one or more premier effects are executed, even if the tempe success effect is not 7 tempe success effects, there is a probability of 100% or less than 100%, but with a probability close to 100%, the re-lottery is performed. It is advisable to perform 7 promotion effects in the effect, and to stop and display the first to third decorative symbols in the form of the 7th bit. As a result, the emotions that have risen in the premiere production can be further excited. However, in the variable effect HE when one or more premier effects are executed, the tempe success effect may be 7 tempe success effects with a certain probability.

  Since the special B or special D jackpot is the most preferable jackpot for the player, the player is pleased to execute the premiere effect in which the special B or D jackpot (10R probability variation jackpot) is assured. In addition, since the probability of winning the special B or special D jackpot is not high and the premium effect is not executed unless it is decided to execute the premium effect after winning the special B or special D jackpot, the premium effect is rare. It is a production. With the advent of a rare production that promises a 10R probability jackpot, it is believed that the player's mood will be greatly enhanced.

  When a special B or special D jackpot is won, when a relatively short fluctuation time is selected, the jackpot game is started in a short time from the start of fluctuation, so that the waiting time is much less for players who are looking forward to the jackpot game. I can't feel that there is (waiting time until the jackpot game starts). On the other hand, when a relatively long variation time is selected, the jackpot game does not start for a relatively long time, and some players may feel the waiting time is boring. In consideration of this, in the present embodiment, when the comparatively long fluctuation time is selected when the special B or special D jackpot is won, the execution limit of the premium effect is higher than when the comparatively short fluctuation time is selected. Increase the number of times. As a result, when a relatively long variation time is selected, the rare premiere effect can be executed more times, and the appearance of the rare premier effect makes the waiting time for the jackpot game boring. It is possible to have fun without having to.

――― Example EX9_2 ――――
Example EX9_2 will be described. In Example EX9_1, instead of the processing of steps S514 to S516 of FIG. 104, the premium effect execution determination processing that summarizes the processing of steps S514 to S516 may be executed.

  108, that is, the premiere effect execution determination processing according to the table 5520 that summarizes the processing of steps S514 to S516 may be performed. In Example EX9_2, when it is confirmed in step S513 in FIG. 104 that the special figure determination information JJ is a special B or special D jackpot, the premium effect execution determination process according to the table 5520 is executed, When it is determined in the premiere effect execution determination process that one or more premier effects are to be executed, the process proceeds to step S517, but when it is determined that the premier effect is not to be executed in the premier effect execution determination process, the process proceeds to step S520. I will proceed.

In the premium effect execution determination processing according to the table 5520, the effect control unit 403,
When the special figure variation pattern THp_d [1] associated with the execution of the normal reach effect is selected, it is determined that the premium effect is not executed with the probability KP _S0 , while the probabilities KP _S1 and KP are determined. _{In S2} and KP _S3 , the number of executions of the premiere effect is determined to be 1, 2, and 3, respectively,
When the special figure variation pattern THp_d [2] that is associated with the execution of the SP reach effect is selected, it is determined that the premiere effect is not executed with the probability KP _L0 , while the probability KP _L1 is determined. In KP _L2 and KP _L3 , the number of executions of the premiere effect is determined to be 1, 2, and 3, respectively.

Here, "KP _S0 + KP _S1 + KP _S2 + KP _S3 = 1" and "KP _L0 + KP _L1 + KP _L2 + KP _L3 = 1", and the probabilities KP _{S0 to} KP _S2 and KP _{L0 to} KP _{L3 respectively.} Although it has a larger value, the probability KP _S3 is zero. Specifically, for example, the probabilities KP _S0 , KP _S1 , KP _S2 , and KP _S3 are respectively 50%, 20%, 30%, and 0%, and the probabilities KP _L0 , KP _L1 , KP _L2 , and KP _L2 . _L3 is 50%, 15%, 15%, and 20%, respectively. Therefore, when the special figure variation pattern THp_d [1] is selected for the special figure determination information JJ, the upper limit number of premier effects that can be executed for the special figure determination information JJ is 2. When the special figure variation pattern THp_d [2] is selected for the figure determination information JJ, the upper limit number of premier effects that can be executed for the special figure determination information JJ is three.

Further, in the table 5520, the probabilities KP _S1 to KP _S3 and KP _L1 to satisfy “(KP _S1 × 1 + KP _S2 × 2 + KP _S3 × 3)” <“(KP _L1 × 1 + KP _L2 × 2 + KP _L3 × 3)”. KP _L3 may be defined. As a result, the average number of executions of the premier effect when the special figure change pattern THp_d [2] is selected is higher than the average number of executions of the premier effect when the special figure change pattern THp_d [1] is selected. . However, "(KP _S1 x1 + KP _S2 x2 + KP _S3 x3)">"(KP _L1 x1 + KP _L2 x2 + KP _L3 x3)" or "(KP _S1 x1 + KP _S2 x2 + KP _S3 x3)" = " (KP _L1 × 1 + KP _L2 × 2 + KP _L3 × 3) ”is also possible.

Regarding the probabilities KP _S0 and KP _L0 , “KP _S0 > KP _L0 ”, “KP _S0 <KP _L0 ”, or “KP _S0 = KP _L0 ” may be used.
Further, regarding the probabilities KP _S1 and KP _S2 , “KP _S1 > KP _S2 ”, “KP _S1 <KP _S2 ”, or “KP _S1 = KP _S2 ” may be used. Among the probabilities KP _{S0 to} KP _S2 , the probability KP _S0 may be the maximum, the probability KP _S1 may be the maximum, and the probability KP _S2 may be the maximum. Among the probabilities KP _{L0 to} KP _L3 , the probability KP _L0 may be maximum, the probability KP _L1 may be maximum, the probability KP _L2 may be maximum, and the probability KP _L3 is maximum. May be

――― Example EX9_3 ――――
Example EX9_3 will be described. According to the table 5510 of FIG. 105 and the table 5520 of FIG. 108, the upper limit number of executions of the premier effect is two or three, but these numerical values are merely examples.

That is, when the special figure change pattern THp_d [1] is selected for the special figure determination information JJ, the special figure is higher than the upper limit number UL _{S of the} premier effects that can be executed for the special figure determination information JJ. As long as the upper limit number UL _L of the premier effect executable for the special figure determination information JJ is larger when the special figure variation pattern THp_d [2] is selected for the determination information JJ, the upper limit number UL is set. _S and UL _L are arbitrary. The upper limit number UL _S may be 1, or 3 or more. The upper limit number UL _L may be 2, or 4 or more.

――― Example EX9_4 ――――
Example EX9_4 will be described. When it is determined that the premium effect is executed a plurality of times for the special drawing determination information JJ, the method (see FIG. 100) shown in Example EX8_2 is adopted as a method of determining the type of the premium effect for each time. Is also good. In this case, the type of the premiere effect for each time is determined in accordance with the variation time of the special symbol defined by the selected special symbol variation pattern.

――― Example EX9_5 ――――
Example EX9_5 will be described. In Example EX9_5, a plurality of premieres including the i-th premiere effect and the (i + 1) -th premier effect executed after the i-th premier effect with respect to the special map determination information JJ. It is premised that an effect is executed (where i is an arbitrary natural number).

  At this time, the i-th premiere effect and the (i + 1) -th premiere effect may be effects in the same effect mode (for example, both may be the third special character effects).

  Alternatively, the i-th premiere effect and the (i + 1) -th premier effect may be different effects. Although related to this, when the i-th premiere effect and the (i + 1) th premiere effect are executed, the i-th premiere effect and the (i + 1) th premier effect are the same effect modes. May be prohibited (that is, both may be prohibited from being the third special character effect).

When the i-th premier effect and the (i + 1) th premier effect are effects different from each other, the i-th premier effect and the (i + 1) th premier effect use a common effect means. There may be two premiere effects that are executed by using.
That is, for example, the i-th premiere effect may be the third special character effect and the (i + 1) -th premier effect may be the rainbow image effect (see FIGS. 53 and 54). In this case, the image display unit 104 is used as a common effect means.

  When the i-th premiere effect and the (i + 1) th premiere effect are two premier effects that are executed using a common effect means, the i-th premier effect execution period and the (i + 1) -th time There may be a case where the execution period of the premier effect is overlapped, and in this case, the former premier effect and the latter premier effect are executed at the same time. As a specific example, a form in which the third special character effect and the rainbow image effect are simultaneously executed is conceivable.

When the i-th premier effect and the (i + 1) th premier effect are effects different from each other, the i-th premier effect and the (i + 1) th premier effect require different effect means. There may be two premiere effects that are executed by using. As a result, compared to the case where the i-th premiere effect and the (i + 1) th premiere effect are realized by the common effect means, it is possible to give the player the satisfaction that the completely different premier effects can be viewed. . The effect control unit 403 may prohibit that the i-th premier effect and the (i + 1) th premier effect are realized by using a common effect means (that is, the i-th premier effect is After the execution is performed using the specific rendering means, the (i + 1) th premier rendering may not be executed using the specific rendering means).
That is, for example, the i-th premiere effect may be the third special character effect and the (i + 1) -th premier effect may be the P flash effect (see FIGS. 53 and 54). In this case, the i-th premiere effect is realized by using the image display unit 104, and the (i + 1) -th premier effect is built in the speaker 115 and the operation handle 119 which are different from the image display unit 104. It is realized by using a light emitting element. Further, in the case of using a production effect in which the production light unit 116 provided on the door frame 12 emits rainbow colors is used as a premier production, the image display unit 104 realizes the i-th premiere production, and The (i + 1) th premiere effect may be an effect in which the effect light unit 116 emits rainbow colors.

  When the i-th premier effect and the (i + 1) th premier effect are two premier effects that are executed using mutually different effect means, the i-th premier effect execution period and the (i + 1) -th time There may be a case where the execution period of the premier effect is overlapped, and in this case, the former premier effect and the latter premier effect are executed at the same time. As a specific example, a form in which the rainbow image effect and the P-flash effect are simultaneously executed can be considered.

――― Example EX9_6 ――――
Example EX9_6 will be described. When the SP reach effect is executed in the variable effect HE and the premium effect is executed one or more times for the special drawing determination information JJ, the last premium effect is executed in the final winning effect in the SP reach effect. Is also good. That is, for example, as the final premiere effect, the rainbow button display effect or the rainbow lever display effect may be executed as the winning operation effect in the SP reach effect. Alternatively, the rainbow CI effect may be the operation corresponding effect executed in response to the input of the button operation or the lever operation in the winning operation effect of the SP reach effect, and the rainbow CI effect may be the final premier effect.

  Also in the normal reach effect, the final winning effect and the winning operation effect similar to those in the SP reach effect may be performed immediately before the normal reach success effect or the normal loss failure effect. When the normal reach effect is executed in the variable effect HE and the premier effect is executed one or more times for the special figure determination information JJ, the final premier effect is executed in the final winning effect in the normal reach effect. Is also good. That is, for example, as the final premiere effect, the rainbow button display effect or the rainbow lever display effect may be executed as the winning operation effect in the normal reach effect. Alternatively, the rainbow CI effect may be the operation corresponding effect executed in response to the input of the button operation or the lever operation in the winning operation effect of the normal reach effect, and the rainbow CI effect may be the final premier effect.

――― Example EX9_7 ――――
Example EX9_7 will be described.

  When it is determined to execute the premium effect one or more times for the special drawing determination information JJ, the simple winning result or the simple certainty effect is first executed for the special drawing determination information JJ, and then once or more. It may be possible to execute the premiere production of. That is, for example, when it is determined that the premium effect is executed once or more for the special figure determination information JJ, in the variable effect HE for the special figure determination information JJ, the simple winning effect or the simple certainty effect is used as the pre-reach notice effect. After that, the premiere effect may be executed one or more times during the execution period of the reach effect (normal reach effect or SP reach effect). This makes it possible to realize a flow of production in which the player's joy is divided into two stages and expanded, and the game can be greatly enlivened.

  In addition, when it is determined that the premium effect is performed a plurality of times for the special figure determination information JJ, after performing one or more premier effects for the special figure determination information JJ, a simple accurate effect or a simple effect is performed. It is also possible to execute the sure effect and then execute the remaining number of premier effects. That is, for example, when it is determined to execute the premier effect for the special figure determination information JJ a plurality of times, in the variable effect HE for the special figure determination information JJ, one or more premier effects are performed as the pre-reach notice effect. After that, the simple winning production or the simple certainty production is executed at the same time as the tempai success production, and thereafter, the premiere production for the remaining number of times may be executed during the execution period of the reach production (normal reach production or SP reach production). Is also good.

――― Example EX9_8 ――――
Example EX9_8 will be described. With reference to FIG. 105 and the like, when the special figure variation pattern THp_d [1] is selected for the special figure determination information JJ, the upper limit number UL of the premium effects executed for the special figure determination information JJ Compared with _S , the upper limit number UL _L of the premiere effect executed for the special figure determination information JJ when the special figure variation pattern THp_d [2] is selected for the special figure determination information JJ Although the method of increasing the value has been described, the opposite control may be performed (that is, “UL _S > UL _L ” may be satisfied).

――― Example EX9_9 ――――
Example EX9_9 will be described. The gaming machine 100 is provided with a plurality of effect means such as the image display section 104, the effect light section 116, and the movable accessory 130, but the special figure determination information is a special B or special D jackpot. When the premiere effect is performed in the variable effect HE, the jackpot finalizing effect may be superposed in a superimposed manner so that the fancy of the effect increases with time in the variable effect HE.

  Referring to FIG. 109, for example, it is determined that the special figure determination information is a special B or special D jackpot, the special figure change pattern THp_d [2] is selected, and three premiere effects are performed. In this case, the following flow effect HE can be performed. That is, the premiere effect in which the color of the character image displayed in the title display effect of the SP reach effect is iridescent is performed. As a result, the player is convinced that the special B or special D jackpot is generated. After that, in the final winning effect, a premium effect is performed by a rainbow button display effect. The player's mood further rises because the iridescent operation effect is generated following the iridescent title display effect. When the player operates a button, in the SP reach success effect, in addition to the execution of the upper gimmick effect by the operation of the upper gimmick 130U, a rainbow background effect in which the background portion of the image display unit 104 is rainbow colored. (One of the premiere effects) is executed in a superimposed manner, and at the same time, a rainbow lamp effect in which the frame lamp section of the gaming machine 100 is caused to emit rainbow colors is also executed in an overlapping manner. That is, it is expected that the jackpots will be boosted by using the three effect means of the upper gimmick 130U, the image display unit 104, and the frame lamp unit, and the degree of excitement of the player will be further increased.

――― Example EX9_10 ――――
Example EX9_10 will be described. There are actually many special figure fluctuation patterns that can be selected when the special figure determination information JJ has won the special B or special D jackpot. There are a plurality of combinations of a special figure variation pattern that defines a relatively long variation time and a special figure variation pattern that defines a relatively short variation time.

  When the special figure determination information JJ is a special B or special D jackpot, a comparatively long special figure variation pattern THp_d [2] and a relatively short special figure variation pattern are selected. Although the method of making the upper limit execution frequency of the premier effect different depending on when THp_d [1] is selected has been described, the method is not necessarily applicable to all of the plurality of combinations, and the method is applicable only to some combinations. The present invention also includes forms in which

<< 10th Embodiment >>
A tenth embodiment of the gaming machine 100 will be described. In the tenth embodiment, in particular, the relationship between the rainbow image effect using the image display unit 104 and the rainbow lamp effect using the frame lamp unit will be described.

  As described above with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54, the rainbow image effect is an effect of displaying an image including seven colors forming the rainbow color on the image display unit 104. The seven colors forming the iridescent color are red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo and purple. However, there are various views on the definition of the rainbow color including the number of constituent colors of the rainbow color, and the rainbow color in the present invention includes the rainbow color in each view.

  A block 160 shown in FIG. 110A represents a frame lamp unit provided in the gaming machine 100. The frame lamp section 160 includes an effect light section 116 provided in the frame section of the gaming machine 100. The frame portion of the gaming machine 100 includes an inner frame 11 and a door frame 12 (see FIGS. 1 and 2). The rainbow lamp effect is an effect in which the light emitting elements forming the frame lamp section 160 emit light in seven colors forming the rainbow.

  FIG. 110B simply shows the positional relationship among the game board 101, the image display section 104, and the light emitting elements that form the frame lamp section 160. In FIG. 110 (b), a plurality of elements 160E represent a plurality of light emitting elements forming the frame lamp section 160. The light-emitting elements forming the frame lamp section 160 include light-emitting elements (light-emitting elements arranged at positions surrounding the game board 101) arranged outside the game board 101 as seen by the player, and thus the game board 101. The light emitting element (the light emitting element arranged at a position surrounding the image display unit 104) arranged outside the image display unit 104 fitted in the central portion of the. The type of light emitting element forming the frame lamp section 160 is arbitrary, and is composed of, for example, an incandescent lamp or an LED (light emitting diode). In the rainbow lamp presentation, the seven colors forming the rainbow color may be colored simultaneously by the plurality of light emitting elements forming the frame lamp section 160, or the emission colors of the respective light emitting elements forming the frame lamp section 160 are switched. Therefore, the seven colors forming the rainbow color may be developed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds). Further, in the rainbow lamp effect, the board lamp 135 provided on the game board 101 may also emit and emit light in seven colors forming the rainbow color.

  The rainbow image effect and the rainbow lamp effect are both big hit confirmation effects that can be executed in the variable effect HE, but their roles are different from each other. That is, (see FIG. 53), the rainbow image production functions as a super-certain production that suggests that the special image determination information JJ (see FIG. 17) is a special B or special D jackpot. The lamp effect functions as a simple certainty effect effect that suggests that the special drawing determination information JJ has been won in any one of special effects A to special D. Therefore, the rainbow lamp effect is executed regardless of whether the special A or special C jackpot game is executed or the special B or special D jackpot game is executed based on the result of the special figure determination for the special figure determination information JJ. However, the rainbow image effect is executed only when the jackpot game of the special B or the special D is executed based on the result of the special figure determination with respect to the special figure determination information JJ, and the special figure determination information It is not executed when the special jackpot game of special A or special C is executed based on the result of the special figure determination for JJ. When the jackpot game of the communication A or the communication B is executed based on the result of the special drawing determination for the special drawing determination information JJ, neither the rainbow lamp effect nor the rainbow image effect is executed (however, the rainbow lamp effect can be executed. Deformation is also possible, which will be described later).

  The effect that suggests and fuels whether or not it is a big hit, which is a serious concern of the player, is mainly realized through image display of the image display unit 104 capable of various effect expressions. Therefore, the image display unit 104 is arranged in front of the player so that the player who is seated facing the gaming machine 100 while holding the operation handle 119 can easily see the image display contents. Play the game while paying the highest attention to the displayed contents. In other words, the attention of the player who is seated facing the gaming machine 100 is mainly directed to the display content of the image display unit 104 rather than the light emission content of the frame lamp unit 160.

  Since the light emitting element of the frame lamp unit 160 is located outside the line of sight of the player who is gazing at the image display unit 104, it is difficult for the player to notice the presence or absence of light emission or the color of light emitted by the frame lamp unit 160. A person who is a person other than a player who plays a game and is located around the gaming machine 100 (hereinafter referred to as an observer; for example, in which gaming machine in the gaming facility where the gaming machine 100 is installed, let's play the game) It is easier for a person (walking while thinking) to visually recognize the frame lamp 160 provided in the frame section than the image display section 104 in a recessed position inside the frame section of the gaming machine 100.

  On the other hand, "rainbow color" is a color that is extremely pleasing to the player, which suggests at least some jackpot confirmation. When the "rainbow color" occurs in the image display on the image display unit 104, which is most noticed by the player, the value of the "rainbow color" becomes low when the number of obtained rounds is small, and the "rainbow color" is generated. The effect of maximizing the player's mood is reduced. For this reason, the effect (that is, the rainbow image display) by the "rainbow color" image display is made to function as a super certain effect that can appear only when the special B or special D is a big hit.

  However, if the "rainbow color" is allowed to appear only when the special B or special D is a big hit, the appearance frequency of the "rainbow color" is inevitably low. If the frequency of occurrence of "rainbow color" can be made higher than the frequency of jackpot occurrences of special B or special D, and if it can be appealed to the observer, "the gaming machine 100 that looks over there is often a big hit. Since it is like this, it is expected that the observer will be motivated to play, such as "I want to play a game with that gaming machine 100 next time," and the island or gaming facility where the gaming machine 100 is installed is generally It is hoped that the environment will be energized and a pleasant environment will be created for both players and observers.

  In consideration of this, while the rainbow image effect can be executed only when the special B or special D big hit occurs, the rainbow lamp effect is not limited to when the special B or special D big hit occurs. It can be executed even when a big hit occurs. This maximizes the value of the “rainbow color” in the image display that the player pays attention to, and maximizes the mood of the player when the “rainbow color” image appears, and the “rainbow” in the frame lamp section 160. It is expected that the appeal effect to the observer will be improved by increasing the frequency of occurrence of "color".

  Further, when the special B or special D jackpot is won, it is possible to execute both the rainbow image effect and the rainbow lamp effect, but at this time, the rainbow image effect is performed before the rainbow lamp effect is performed. A preceding method and a rainbow lamp preceding method of performing a rainbow image presentation after performing a rainbow lamp presentation can be considered.

  Since the gaming machine 100 is a device provided for the enjoyment of the player, when the improvement of the interest of the player and the effect of appealing to the observer are compared, the improvement of the interest of the player should be prioritized. Therefore, when the execution condition of the rainbow image production is satisfied, first perform the rainbow image production to provide joy to the player, and after that, perform the rainbow lamp production to additionally aim at appealing to the observer. Is considered to be appropriate. Further, when the rainbow lamp effect is performed first, the player's consciousness of the effect by the image is deviated to the frame lamp section 160, and the rainbow image effect that should provide the player with the greatest joy is provided. May be overlooked (you may lose your greatest pleasure). Therefore, it is desirable to use the rainbow image preceding method.

  As shown in FIG. 111, that is, when the special image determination information JJ is a special B or special D jackpot, both the rainbow image effect and the rainbow lamp effect are performed on the special image determination information JJ. In that case (for example, when performing both the rainbow image effect and the rainbow lamp effect during the variable display of the special symbol for the special symbol determination information JJ), first, the rainbow image effect is performed, and then the rainbow lamp is performed. It is desirable to perform an effect, which makes it possible to maximize the effect of enhancing the player's interest and at the same time enhance the effect of appealing to the observer.

  The tenth embodiment includes the following examples EX10_1 to EX10_11, and in examples EX10_1 to EX10_11, detailed contents and modifications regarding the matters described above in the tenth embodiment will be described. The matters described above in the tenth embodiment are applied to the following Examples EX10_1 to EX10_11 as long as there is no particular description and there is no contradiction, and in each of Examples EX10_1 to EX10_11, there is a contradiction with the matters described above in the tenth embodiment. As for matters to be done, the description in each example has priority. Also, as long as there is no contradiction, the matters described in any of the embodiments EX10_1 to EX10_11 can be applied to any other embodiment (that is, implementation of any two or more of a plurality of embodiments). It is possible to combine examples).

――― Example EX10_1 ――――
Example EX10_1 will be described.

  FIG. 112 is a diagram showing a rear configuration of the gaming machine 100. A main control board 301, a payout control board 302, a power supply board 304, an effect control board 320, an information terminal board 491, and the like are provided on the back surface of the gaming machine 100, and commercial AC power is supplied to the power supply board 304. A power plug 304a for this purpose and a power switch (not shown) are provided.

  FIG. 113 is a configuration block diagram of the gaming machine 100 focusing on the board configuration. The gaming machine 100 is provided with an image control board 330, a general-purpose board 340, and a lamp control board 350 in addition to the main control board 301, the payout control board 302, the power supply board 304, and the effect control board 320 described above. A drive device 360 is also provided. Although various components are connected to each board shown in FIG. 113, only some of the components connected to each board are shown in FIG. 113 (that is, the main control board 301, for example). Starting ports SW 414a and 414b and the like (see FIG. 2) are connected to each of them, but their illustration is omitted in FIG. 113).

  Each component mounted on the main control board 301 constitutes the main control unit 401 in FIG. Each component mounted on the payout control board 302 constitutes the prize ball control unit 402 of FIG. The effect control unit 403 of FIG. 2 is configured by the components mounted on the effect control board 320, the image control board 330, the general-purpose board 340, and the lamp control board 350. The power supply board 304 generates DC power from commercial AC power supplied through the power plug 304a, and supplies the DC power to each board in the gaming machine 100 as drive power.

  On the effect control board 320, a sub CPU (Central Processing Unit) 321, a sub ROM (Read Only Memory) 322, and a sub RAM (Random Access Memory) 323 are mounted. On the image control board 330, an image control CPU 331 having a built-in image control RAM 331a, an image control ROM 332, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 333, a CGROM 334, a VRAM 335, a crystal oscillator 336, and a sound control circuit 337 are mounted. The sub CPU 431 of FIG. 2 is configured to include the CPUs 321 and 331 in the board configuration of FIG. 113, the sub ROM 432 of FIG. 2 is configured to include the ROM 322, 332, and 334 of the board configuration of FIG. 113, and the sub RAM 433 of FIG. It can be considered that the substrate configuration of FIG. 113 is configured to include the RAMs 323, 331a and 335.

  The main control board 301 and the payout control board 302 are connected to each other in such a manner that bidirectional communication is possible between them. The effect control board 320 is connected to the main control board 301 in a form that allows only one-way communication from the main control board 301 to the effect control board 320. The effect control board 320 and the image control board 330 are connected to each other in a form that enables bidirectional communication between them. The effect control board 320 and the lamp control board 350 are also connected to each other in such a manner that bidirectional communication is possible between them.

  The sub CPU 321 is stored in the sub ROM 322 based on the command transmitted from the main control board 301 (that is, the main control unit 401) and the operation input to the effect button 121, the cross key 122, and the effect lever 127. The program is read out to perform arithmetic processing, and based on the arithmetic processing, a predetermined command (production specifying command, lamp driving command, etc. described later) is transmitted to the image control board 330 or the lamp control board 350. The sub RAM 323 functions as a data work area during the arithmetic processing of the sub CPU 321.

  For example, when the sub CPU 321 in the effect control board 320 receives the fluctuation start command including the result of the special figure determination from the main control board 301, the content of the received fluctuation start command is analyzed and the image display unit 104, the speaker 115, A command for causing each effect means including the effect light unit 116, the panel lamp 135, the frame movable accessory 117, and the panel movable accessory 130 to execute a predetermined effect (for example, various effects configuring the variable effect HE) (described later). Production designation command, lamp drive command, etc.) is generated. Then, the predetermined command is realized by transmitting the generated command to the image control board 330 or the lamp control board 350.

  The sub ROM 322 of the effect control board 320 stores a program for effect control, data and tables necessary for realizing various effects. For example, a variation effect pattern table for determining a variation effect pattern based on a variation start command received from the main control board 301, or a decorative symbol determination table for determining a combination of the first to third decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed. Etc. are stored in the sub ROM 322. The sub CPU 321 of the effect control board 320 uses these tables to generate a command for executing a predetermined effect and transmits the command to the image control board 330 or the lamp control board 350.

  The command generated by the effect control board 320 includes an effect designation command transmitted from the effect control board 320 to the image control board 330.

  The image control board 330 is connected to the speaker 115 and is also connected to the image display section 104 via the general-purpose board 340, and a predetermined image is displayed on the image display section 104 based on the effect designation command from the effect control board 320. An image display process for displaying and a voice output process for outputting a predetermined sound from the speaker 115 are executed.

  In the image control board 330, the image control CPU 331 generates a display list that defines the content of the image to be displayed on the image display unit 104 based on the effect designation command received from the effect control board 320, and the generated display list. Then, a drawing command including "" is transmitted to the VDP 333. The image control RAM 331a functions as a data work area during the arithmetic processing of the image control CPU 331, and temporarily stores the data read from the image control ROM 332.

  The VDP 333 is a video processing circuit that can display images (also referred to as effect images) that form various effects using a plurality of frames (also referred to as frame images). The VDP 333 generates each frame image using the material image data stored in the CGROM 334 based on the drawing command received from the image control CPU 331, and causes the image display unit 104 to continuously display the generated plurality of frame images. Image data (video signal) for transmitting the image data to the image display unit 104 via the general-purpose board 340. As a result, on the image display unit 104, a moving image composed of a plurality of time-series frame images generated by the VDP 333 is displayed as an effect image. However, the effect image displayed on the image display unit 104 also includes a still image.

  The CGROM 334 includes a flash memory, an EEPROM, an EPROM, a mask ROM, and the like, and stores image data and the like, which is a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 pixels × 32 pixels), in a compressed form. The VRAM 335 is used by the VDP 333 as a work area for generating a frame image. The crystal oscillator 336 outputs a pulse signal to the VDP 333 about every 16.6 milliseconds, and the VDP 333 divides this pulse signal to generate a clock, a synchronization signal, etc. for performing an appropriate image display. To be done.

  The general-purpose board 340 is provided between the image control board 330 and the image display unit 104 and converts image data into an appropriate image format. That is, the general-purpose board 340 has a bridge function of converting the image data from the VDP 333 into image data of an image format corresponding to the performance of the image display unit 104, for example, SXGA (1280 dots × 1080 dots) 19 The difference in resolution between when an inch liquid crystal display device is connected as the image display unit 104 and when an XGA (1024 dots × 768 dots) 17 inch liquid crystal display device is connected as the image display unit 104 is absorbed. The general-purpose board 340 may be omitted.

 Further, the effect designation command transmitted from the effect control board 320 to the image control board 330 may include a command for instructing the speaker 115 to output a predetermined sound. A sound control circuit 337 for outputting sound from the speaker 115 is connected to the image control CPU 331, and the image control CPU 331 issues an instruction to output a predetermined sound from the speaker 115 based on the effect designation command. The sound based on the effect designation command is output from the speaker 115 through the transmission to the speaker 115.

  The command generated by the performance control board 320 includes a lamp drive command transmitted from the performance control board 320 to the lamp control board 350. To the lamp control board 350, the production light unit 116 and the board lamp 135 that form the frame lamp section 160 (see FIG. 110) are connected, and the frame movable accessory 117 and the board movable board are provided via the production drive device 360. The accessory 130 is also connected. The lamp driving command is a command for designating the presence / absence of light emission of each light emitting element forming the effect light unit 116 and the panel lamp 135, and the emission color when the light is emitted, and the operation of the frame movable accessory 117 and the panel movable accessory 130 It includes a command for specifying the presence / absence and the operation mode when operating. The lamp control board 350 controls the light emission of each light-emitting element of the effect light unit 116 and the panel lamp 135 and the drive control of the frame movable accessory 117 and the panel movable accessory 130 based on the lamp drive command, whereby the lamp drive command. According to the designated contents of (1), light emission of the effect light unit 116 and the panel lamp 135 and driving of the frame movable accessory 117 and the panel movable accessory 130 are realized. A lamp control CPU and the like (not shown) for performing the light emission control and the drive control are mounted on the lamp control board 350. The effect drive device 360 is composed of a driver circuit for driving a motor and a solenoid incorporated in the frame movable accessory 117 and the board movable accessory 130.

  FIG. 114 is an operation flowchart of the variation effect content determination processing executed by the sub CPU 321 in response to the reception of the variation start command. However, FIG. 114 is a flowchart of a part of the fluctuating effect content determination processing focusing on the jackpot finalizing effect that can be executed in the fluctuating effect HE. Although various other processes not actually shown in FIG. 114 are included in the variable effect content determination process, the description of the other processes will be omitted here. The variation effect content determination process of FIG. 114 includes the processes of steps S611 to S618. When the variable effect HE is executed according to the items selected, determined, and set in the processing of each step of FIG. 114, and the execution of the jackpot finalized effect is determined, selection and determination are performed in the processing of each step of FIG. 114. The jackpot confirmation effect is executed in the variable effect HE according to the set items.

  In the variation effect content determination process, the sub CPU 321 first analyzes the variation start command in step S611, and determines the content of the variation effect HE based on the result of the special figure determination included in the variation start command in step S612. The variation effect pattern is selected from a plurality of variation effect patterns stored in the variation effect pattern table. The variation effect HE based on the variation effect pattern selected here is executed. In subsequent step S613, the sub CPU 321 confirms whether or not the special-drawing determination information JJ is a big hit. When the special figure determination information JJ is a big hit, the process proceeds from step S613 to step S614. However, when the special figure determination information JJ is a loss, it is determined that the big hit finalizing effect is not executed. The variation effect content determination processing ends.

  In step S614, the sub CPU 321 performs a finalizing effect execution determination process for selecting and deciding whether or not to perform the big hit finalizing effect and, in the case of performing the big hit finalizing effect, to select and determine which kind of big hit finalizing effect to perform. The selection and determination method here may be the same as that described above. For example, according to the table 3100 of FIG. 57, whether or not to perform the jackpot finalization effect, and when performing the jackpot finalization effect, what kind of jackpot. Select and decide whether to perform the finalized effect. “Selecting which kind of jackpot finalization effect is to be performed” in step S614 is a selection of which kind of jackpot finalization effect, simple winning effect, simple certainty effect, or premier effect is to be performed. The premiere effect is a jackpot confirmed effect that has a special effect mode that is executed only when the special B or special D jackpot is won, and corresponds to the above-described super certainty effect. After the processing of step S614, the process proceeds to step S615.

  In step S615, it is checked whether or not it is determined in step S614 that the premium effect is to be executed. If it is determined that the premium effect is to be executed in step S614, the process proceeds to step S616, and if not, the step is performed. Proceed to S617. In step S616, the sub CPU 321 sets a premier production execution instruction command, which is a command for instructing execution of the premier production, in the sub RAM 323, and ends the variable production content determination processing.

  In step S617, it is checked whether or not it has been determined in step S614 that a jackpot finalization effect other than the premium effect (that is, a simple winning effect or a simple certainty effect) is to be executed, and in step S614, a jackpot finalizing effect other than the premium effect is executed. If so, the process proceeds to step S618, while if not, the variation effect content determination process ends. In step S618, the sub CPU 321 sets, in the sub RAM 323, a non-premium finalized effect execution instruction command that is a command for instructing execution of the jackpot finalized effect (big hit finalized effect other than the premium effect) determined to be executed in step S614. , The change effect content determination processing ends. If the setting process of step S616 or S618 is not performed, the jackpot confirmation effect is not executed in the variable effect HE.

  The premium effect execution instruction command or the non-premier final effect effect instruction command set in the sub RAM 323 in step S616 or S618 is transmitted to the image control CPU 331 in a state of being included in the effect specification command, or is converted into a lamp drive command. It is transmitted to the lamp control board 350 in the included state.

  In the present embodiment, in particular, attention is paid to the premier effect by image display as the premier effect instructed to be executed by the premier effect execution instruction command, and the premier effect when it is decided to execute the premier effect in step S614 is by the image display. Suppose it is a premiere production. When it is determined in step S614 that the premiere effect by image display is to be executed, the execution timing of the premier effect is not determined in the stage of step S614 (however, the execution timing of the premier effect is determined in the stage of step S614. Deformation to determine is also possible). When it is determined in step S614 that a jackpot finalization effect other than the premium effect by image display is to be executed, the timing of executing the jackpot finalization effect may be determined in the step of step S614.

Figure 115 is a diagram showing the flow of command and signals in the case CS _P which is determined to perform the premium effect on time series. However, FIG. 115 is a diagram paying attention to the flow of commands and signals related to the jackpot finalization effect, and in reality, commands and signals not shown in FIG. 115 are also exchanged. The same applies to FIGS. 116 to 118 described later.

The timings at which the fluctuation start command and fluctuation stop command are transmitted from the main control board 301 to the sub CPU 321 are represented by t _S and t _E, respectively. Timings t _S and t _{E respectively} correspond to the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol for the special symbol determination information JJ and the end timing of the variable display of the special symbol (that is, the variation stop timing of the special symbol). Timing _{t P1, t P2, t P3} and _{t P4} which are described later, a timing earlier than and timing _{t E} or after the than the timing _{t S.} For any integer i, the timing t _{P (i + 1)} is the timing after the timing t _Pi . The variation effect HE is executed between the timings t _S and t _E. For convenience of description, since the description with reference to FIG. 115 is ended up to timing t _P4 , FIG. 115 does not show the exchange of signals or commands after timing t _P4 , except for the fluctuation stop command.

In case CS _P, upon determining that the sub CPU321 executes the premium effect by fluctuation effect contents determination process receives the change start command, at the timing _{t P1,} rendering specifying command 6210 containing the premium presentation effects execution instruction command from the sub CPU321 It is transmitted to the image control CPU 331. The time length between the timings t _S and t _P1 is short enough to be ignored as compared with the time length between the timings t _S and t _E.

  Upon receiving the effect designation command 6210, the image control CPU 331 executes a premium effect type / timing determination process 6220 (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as a process 6220) that determines which image display the premium effect is to be executed at which timing. To do. Here, for the sake of concrete description (see FIGS. 53 and 54), when the effect designation command 6210 is received, the image control CPU 331 causes the image control CPU 331 to correspond to the first premiere effect, that is, the third special character effect and the second premier effect. It is assumed that any one of the rainbow CI effect and the special telop effect corresponding to the third premiere effect is selected using the random number for effect generated by itself (see the lower side of FIG. 115). . In the process 6220, along with the selection, it is determined at which timing during the execution period of the variable effect HE, the selected premium effect is executed. Of the third special character effect, the rainbow CI effect, and the special telop effect, only the rainbow CI effect belongs to the rainbow image effect.

Here, it is assumed that it is determined to execute the selected premiere effect at timing t _P2 . The result of the variation effect pattern selection processing in step S612 of FIG. 114 is shared between the sub CPU 321 and the image control CPU 331. In the premier effect type / timing determination processing, the special figure determination information JJ is used as necessary. The selected variation effect pattern may be taken into consideration. For example (see FIG. 41 and FIG. 43), the reach production (during the execution period of the pre-reach notice production, after the execution of the tempai success production and before the start of the reach production (normal reach production or SP reach production)) The timing t _P2 is set during the execution period of the normal reach effect or the SP reach effect). In the case where the variable effect HE including the SP reach effect is executed, it is preferable that the timing before the final winning effect is executed is set to the timing t _P2 .

The image control CPU 331 waits for the display of the image representing the premier effect (hereinafter referred to as the premier image) until the timing t _P2 set in the process 6220 arrives, and at the timing t _P2 , issues the premier image drawing command 6230 to the VDP 333. Send. The drawing command 6230 is a command for instructing drawing of an image representing the premier effect selected in the process 6220. The VDP 333 generates image data for displaying the premier image on the image display unit 104 based on the received drawing command 6230 and transmits the image data to the image display unit 104. As a result, immediately after the timing t _P2, the image representing the premier effect selected in the process 6220 (here, the image representing the third special character effect, the rainbow CI effect, or the special telop effect) is displayed on the image display unit 104. Will be done. The premier image displayed in the third special character effect, the premier image displayed in the rainbow CI effect, and the premier image displayed in the special telop effect are respectively the third special character image, the rainbow CI image, and the special telop. This is referred to as an image (see the lower side of FIG. 115). The third special character image, the rainbow CI image, and the special telop image correspond to the first, second, and third premier images, respectively.

When the drawing of the premier image based on the drawing command 6230 is completed at timing t _P3 , the VDP 333 transmits a drawing completion signal 6240 indicating that the drawing is completed to the image control CPU 331. The drawing of an image by the VDP 333 is not limited to a premier image, and means that image data representing the image is created (in other words, written) in the VRAM 335 as drawing data. The drawing data created in the VRAM 335 is output to the image display unit 104 via the VDP 333 when the V blank signal described later is generated, and is displayed as an image on the image display unit 104. Since the V blank signal is periodically generated about every 16.6 milliseconds, it is understood that the premier image is displayed substantially at the timing t _P3 . The display of the premier image continues for a certain period of time. Therefore, the display of the premier image is started from the timing t _P3 and the premier image is hidden after a predetermined time (the drawing command 6230 is defined so as to be so). The premier image may be a still image or a moving image.

  The control performed by the image control CPU 331 and the VDP 333 described above will be described more specifically.

  First, the VRAM 335 connected to the VDP 333 is a storage unit for temporarily storing various data necessary for outputting an image to the image display unit 104. The VRAM 335 includes a volatile semiconductor memory that requires external power supply to retain the memory, and in detail, an SDRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, the present invention is not limited to the SDRAM, and another RAM such as a DRAM, an SRAM, or a dual port RAM may be used. The VRAM 335 is used for both reading and writing when used in the gaming machine 100. The VRAM 335 may be built in the VDP 333.

  Referring to FIG. 115-1 (a), the VRAM 335 is provided with a frame buffer BF in which drawing data is created by the VDP 333. The VDP 333 uses the image data read from the CGROM 334 to create drawing data for one frame (image data representing one frame image) in the frame buffer BF. The drawing data for one frame refers to the data necessary to display the image at one update timing in the configuration in which the image on the image display unit 104 is updated at a predetermined update timing.

  Here, the frame buffer BF is provided with a plurality of frame regions. Specifically, the frame buffer BF is provided with a first frame area Fa and a second frame area Fb. Each of these frame areas is set to have a capacity capable of storing drawing data for one frame. Specifically, each of the frame areas Fa and Fb includes a number of unit areas corresponding to the number of pixels forming the display area of the image display unit 104 (for example, the display area of the image display unit 104). The number of unit areas is obtained by multiplying the number of pixels forming the pixel by a predetermined magnification). Each unit area has a storage capacity capable of storing data for specifying which color is displayed. More specifically, the image display unit 104 adopts a full color system, and 256 colors can be set for each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) in each pixel. Correspondingly, in each unit area, one byte (8 bits) is allocated to each color of RGB. That is, each unit area has a storage capacity of at least 3 bytes.

  Referring to FIG. 115-1 (b), since the first frame area Fa and the second frame area Fb are provided, display on the image display unit 104 using drawing data created in one frame area. In the period in which is executed, drawing data (that is, drawing) scheduled to be displayed in the other frame area in the future (usually the next frame) is created (ie, drawing). That is, the double buffer method is adopted as the frame buffer BF. In FIG. 115-1 (b), the drawing data created in the first frame area Fa and the second frame area Fb is shown in the areas Fa and Fb as an image shown by the drawing data for convenience of illustration. ing.

  The VDP 333, based on the pulse signal specified by the crystal oscillator 336 for each about 16.6 milliseconds (more precisely, “1000/60” milliseconds), outputs the first frame area Fa and the first frame area Fa for each about 16.6 milliseconds. A V blank signal for permitting switching of the second frame region Fb is generated and output to the image control CPU 331. Therefore, except for the occurrence of irregular events such as processing omission, normally, there is one reception of the V blank signal, and the switching between the first frame region Fa and the second frame region Fb, that is, the frame region targeted for display. And a frame area to be drawn (that is, a frame area in which drawing is executed) are switched, so that an image for one frame is drawn and the display is updated. That is, from 1000 milliseconds ÷ about 16.6 milliseconds (correctly “1000/60” milliseconds) = 60, 60 frames of images are drawn and the display is updated in 1 second. . The period corresponding to one frame coincides with the generation period (“1000/60” milliseconds) of the V blank signal.

  In addition to the V blank signal, the VDP 333 also transmits a drawing completion signal to the image control CPU 331 at the time when the creation (drawing) of the drawing data according to the drawing command received from the image control CPU 331 is completed. . The drawing completion signal is transmitted every time drawing of one frame is completed.

  Upon receiving the V blank signal, the image control CPU 331 sets the frame area to be displayed and the frame area to be drawn (that is, the frame area in which drawing is to be performed) to the first frame area Fa and the second frame area Fb. V interrupt processing for switching between is executed. The VDP 333 has a processing speed capable of completing drawing for one frame during the V blank signal generation cycle (about 16.6 milliseconds). The VDP 333 may start writing necessary drawing data to a frame area which is a new drawing target in the V interrupt processing, triggered by the execution of the V interrupt processing. The switching between the first frame area Fa and the second frame area Fb by the V interrupt processing is performed when not only reception of the V blank signal but also reception of two signals of the V blank signal and the drawing completion signal can be confirmed. It is good also as a structure performed in.

  The image control CPU 331 can count the number of times the V blank signal is received starting from an arbitrary timing. An area provided in the image control CPU 331 for storing the count value of the number of times of receiving the V blank signal is called a frame counter. The image control CPU 331 can recognize based on the count value of the frame counter whether or not the timing for drawing and displaying a specific image has arrived. Regarding the premier effect, the image control CPU 331 monitors whether or not the execution timing of the premier effect determined in the process 6220 (see FIG. 115) has arrived, based on the count value of the frame counter.

For example, it is assumed that in processing 6220, it is decided to display the rainbow CI image as a pre-reach notice effect. In this case, more specifically, the execution period of the pre-reach notice effect is the display period of the frame image of the 60th frame to the 660th frame from the variation start timing t _S , and in process 6220, the rainbow CI image is displayed. It is assumed that the timing is determined to be the 300th frame from the fluctuation start timing t _S. Then, the image control CPU 331 resets the count value of the frame counter at the fluctuation start timing t _S (that is, after substituting zero for the counter value), and then counts the number of times the V blank signal is received, and the count value is 298. When the count value is 299, it is determined that the drawing command to be transmitted to the VDP 333 in the next frame is a drawing command for instructing the drawing of the rainbow CI image. It is determined that it is time to display. According to these determination results, the image control CPU 331 transmits a drawing command instructing drawing of the rainbow CI image based on the count value so that the rainbow CI image is displayed at the 300th frame from the fluctuation start timing t _S. You just have to control the timing.

When the image control CPU 331 receives the V blank signal and the drawing completion signal 6240 for a predetermined number of times NQ from the time when the drawing command 6230 for the premier image is transmitted, the image control CPU 331 receives the premiere effect execution completion report signal 6250 at timing t _P4 . Is transmitted to the sub CPU 321. In the signal 6250, information indicating which type of premiere effect has been executed (that is, which one of the three types of premier images, which is the third special character image, the rainbow CI image, and the special telop image, is displayed. Information indicating whether or not) is included. The predetermined number of times NQ is arbitrary as long as the number of times is 2 or more. By receiving the V blank signal and the drawing completion signal 6240 a plurality of times, it is possible to control that the premier image is continuously displayed for a plurality of frames. It can be recognized by the CPU 331. In many cases, an arbitrary effect image including the premier image is continuously displayed for two or more frames for a plurality of frames, so that the player can recognize that the effect image is displayed. There is.

  When the premier image is drawn and displayed, an image not belonging to the premier image (a background image, an image of a decorative pattern, etc.) is usually drawn and displayed together with the premier image. In other words, the drawing and displaying of the premier image is specifically understood as drawing and displaying an image (frame image, effect image) including the premier image.

Figure 116 of the casing CS _P which is determined to perform the premium effect, is a diagram showing the flow of command and signals in the case CS _P1 rainbow CI image is selected and displayed as the premier image on time series. After the fluctuation start command is received, the command 6210 is transmitted / received at timing t _P1 , the process 6220 is executed, the command 6230 is transmitted / received at timing t _P2 , and the signal 6240 is transmitted / received at timing t _P3 , and then at timing t _P4 . flow of transmission and reception of signals 6250 is performed Te is the same between the case CS _P and the case _{CS P1.} However, referring in particular by numeral "6250a" signal 6250 in the case _{CS P1.}

In case _{CS P1,} performing a rainbow CI effect premier demonstration is selected and determined in the processing 6220. Therefore, the drawing command 6230 of the rainbow CI image representing the rainbow CI effect is transmitted and received at the timing t _{P2, the} rainbow CI image is drawn by the VDP 333, and the rainbow CI image is substantially displayed on the image display unit 104 from the timing t _P3. Will be displayed. Based on the drawing command 6230, when the rainbow CI images are displayed for the number of frames corresponding to the value of NQ, at timing t _P4 , the premiere effect execution including the information indicating that the rainbow CI image is displayed as the premier image is executed. The completion report signal 6250a is transmitted from the image control CPU 331 to the sub CPU 321.

Sub CPU321 receives the signal 6250A, in response to the reception, at a timing _{t P5,} transmits a lamp driving command 6260 that instructs the execution of the rainbow lamp effect to the lamp control board 350. The interval between the timings t _P4 and t _P5 may be short so that the timings t _P4 and t _P5 can be regarded as substantially the same, or the timing when a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed from the timing t _P4 is the timing t _P5 . It may be. The timing t _P5 is arbitrary as long as it is after the timing t _P4 and before the timing t _E.

When the lamp control board 350 receives the lamp drive command 6260 instructing the execution of the rainbow lamp effect, the lamp control board 350 executes the rainbow lamp effect in accordance with the instruction. Rainbow lamp effect is started immediately after receiving the command 6260. The lamp control board 350 may perform the rainbow lamp effect based on the command 6260 for a certain period of time, or the lamp control board 350 receives a lamp drive command from the sub CPU 321 to instruct execution end of the rainbow lamp effect. The rainbow lamp effect may be continuously executed until it reaches the end. The sub CPU 321 issues, for example, a lamp drive command to the lamp control board 350 to instruct the end of execution of the rainbow lamp effect at a timing at which the first to third decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a zigzag pattern based on the reception of the fluctuation stop command. By transmitting, it is possible to end the rainbow lamp effect at that timing. Thus, in the case CS _P1, rendering continued rainbow CI image over a plurality of frames, in response to the displayed, so that the rainbow lamp demonstration is performed. It can also be said that the image control CPU 331 executes the rainbow lamp effect in response to receiving the V blank signal a plurality of times (NQ times) after transmitting the drawing command 6230 for drawing the rainbow CI image.

Figure 117, of the case CS _P which is determined to perform the premium effect, is a diagram showing the flow of command and signals in the case CS _P2 to the third special character image is selected and displayed as the premier image on time series . After the fluctuation start command is received, the command 6210 is transmitted / received at timing t _P1 , the process 6220 is executed, the command 6230 is transmitted / received at timing t _P2 , and the signal 6240 is transmitted / received at timing t _P3 , and then at timing t _P4 . flow of transmission and reception of signals 6250 is performed Te is the same between the case CS _P and the case _{CS P2.} However, referring in particular by numeral "6250B" signal 6250 in the case _{CS P2.}

In case _CSP2 , it is selected and determined in process 6220 to execute the third special character effect as a premier effect. Therefore, the drawing command 6230 of the third special character image representing the third special character effect is transmitted / received at the timing t _P2 , the VDP 333 draws the third special character effect, and the image display unit 104 is substantially started from the timing t _P3. Will display the third special character image. When the third special character effect is displayed for the number of frames corresponding to the value of NQ based on the drawing command 6230, at timing t _P4 , information indicating that the third special character image is displayed as a premier image is included. The premium effect execution completion report signal 6250b is transmitted from the image control CPU 331 to the sub CPU 321.

Sub CPU321, when receiving a signal 6250b is different from the case _{CS P1} in FIG. 116, does not transmit the lamp driving command 6260 that instructs the execution of the rainbow lamp effect to the lamp control board 350. Therefore, in case _CSP2 , the rainbow lamp effect is not executed between the timings t _S and t _E. Cases special telop image is selected and displayed as the premier image is also the same as the case CS _P2.

FIG. 118 is a diagram chronologically showing the flow of commands and signals in a case CS _Q in which only the rainbow lamp effect is executed without executing the big hit finalizing effect by image display as the big hit finalizing effect. Case CS is a case where the non-premium finalized effect execution instruction command for instructing execution of the rainbow lamp effect is set in the sub RAM 323 in step S618 through steps S614, S615, and S617 of FIG. 114. It corresponds to _Q. Effects by case _CS P, _{CS P1} and _{CS P2} in FIG. 115 to FIG 117, but is performed only when the special symbol determination information JJ is won jackpots of Japanese B or JP D, in FIG. 118 effects by case CS _Q, even when the special symbol determination information JJ is won jackpots of Japanese B or JP D, when the special symbol determination information JJ is winning jackpot Special a or JP C Can also be performed.

In case CS _Q, the sub CPU321 determines to execute the rainbow lamp effect by fluctuation effect contents determination process receives the change start command, the sub CPU321, at execution timing of rainbow lamp effect also determined, to determine the timing, A lamp drive command 6360 including a non-premium finalized effect execution instruction command for instructing execution of a rainbow lamp effect is transmitted to the lamp control board 350. The execution timing of the rainbow lamp effect is arbitrary as long as it is a timing before the transmission / reception timing t _E of the fluctuation stop command.

  Upon receiving the lamp drive command 6360, the lamp control board 350 executes the rainbow lamp effect according to the instruction. The rainbow lamp effect is started immediately after receiving the command 6360. The lamp control board 350 may perform the rainbow lamp effect based on the command 6360 for a certain period of time, or the lamp control board 350 receives a lamp drive command from the sub CPU 321 to instruct execution end of the rainbow lamp effect. The rainbow lamp effect may be continuously executed until it reaches the end. The sub CPU 321 issues, for example, a lamp drive command to the lamp control board 350 to instruct the end of execution of the rainbow lamp effect at a timing at which the first to third decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a zigzag pattern based on the reception of the fluctuation stop command. By transmitting, the rainbow lamp effect can be ended at that timing.

  As can be seen from the flow of the effect in FIGS. 116 and 117, in the embodiment EX10_1, when the image control CPU 331 determines to display the premier image (rainbow CI image in FIG. 116) having a rainbow color, the determination is made. A premier image having a rainbow color is drawn on the basis of the displayed image and displayed on the image display unit 104, and the lamp control board 350 (or A rainbow lamp effect is produced in which the rainbow color is emitted and emitted in cooperation with the sub CPU 321 and the lamp control board 350.

  When a premier image suggesting that the special B or special D jackpot is most preferred for the player is displayed, the joy of the player is aroused at once, but the premier image having a rainbow color as the premier image. When a rainbow lamp effect is produced by emitting light of a rainbow color when the is displayed, the rainbow color on the image display unit 104, which the player was gazing at, is displayed on the periphery (in the frame portion of the gaming machine 100). It is possible to give the player an impression as if it spreads and propagates to the provided light emitting element). As a result, it is expected that the joy of displaying the premier image having a rainbow color will be further increased, and thus the interest of the game will be improved.

  The display of the "premier image having a rainbow color" is a premier effect, and here, for the sake of concrete description, the rainbow CI image is taken as an example of the "premium image having a rainbow color". The rainbow-colored premier image "may be a display image in any rainbow image effect (rainbow character effect, rainbow background effect, rainbow button display effect, rainbow lever display effect, etc .: FIG. 53 and FIG. 54). . That is, the effect of displaying the "premier image having a rainbow color" refers to the rainbow image effect.

Note that in the case _{CS P1} in FIG. 116, the case where the command 6260 in response to receiving the signal 6250a is not transmitted from the sub CPU321 to the lamp control board 350 (i.e. case rainbow lamp effect is not executed) is, albeit rarely However, it may be possible.

――― Example EX10_2 ――――
Example EX10_2 will be described. It is also possible to modify the rainbow lamp effect to function as a simple accurate effect. In the deformation effect due to the case CS _Q in FIG. 118, that the special symbol determination information JJ is passing A, it may also be performed while winning in any of the jackpot through B and JP A~ especially D Become.

――― Example EX10_3 ――――
Example EX10_3 will be described. The role of the rainbow lamp effect may be changed depending on the gaming state of the gaming machine 100.

  That is, in the case where the current game state is the low-probability non-electricity support game state (that is, when the special figure determination for the special figure determination information JJ is performed in the low probability non-electricity support game state), the rainbow lamp effect In the case where the current game state is the high-probability electric power support game state (that is, when the special map determination is performed for the special map determination information JJ in the high probability power support game state), The rainbow lamp effect may function as a simple and accurate effect.

  That is, when the special figure determination for the special figure determination information JJ is performed in the low-probability non-electricity support game state, the special figure determination information JJ is one of communication A, communication B, and special A to special D. Even if the jackpot is won, the rainbow lamp effect may be executed in the variable effect HE, while the special figure determination is performed on the special figure determination information JJ in the high probability electric support game state. In such a case, the rainbow lamp effect may be executed in the variable effect HE only when the special figure determination information JJ has won any of the special effects A to D. Therefore, the rainbow lamp effect may not be executed in the variable effect HE when the special figure determination information JJ is a big hit of the communication A or the communication B). At this time, in the low-probability electric sapo game state (so-called time saving state), the rainbow lamp effect may be made to function as a simple accurate direct effect as in the low-probability non-electric sapo game state, or as the high-probability electric sapo game state. Similarly, the rainbow lamp effect may be made to function as a simple and accurate effect.

――― Example EX10_4 ――――
Example EX10_4 will be described. In any case where the rainbow lamp effect is executed, including the case CS _{P1 in} FIG. 116 and the case CS _{Q in} FIG. 118, a lamp drive command for instructing execution of the rainbow lamp effect (command 6260 in the case CS _{P1 in} FIG. 116, command 6360 in case CS _Q in FIG. 118), may be transmitted from the sub CPU321 to the lamp control board 350 at a predetermined rainbow ramp start timing.

  The rainbow lamp start timing is the execution start timing of the SP reach success effect or the timing during execution of the SP reach success effect when the variable effect HE including the SP reach effect is executed (see FIG. 41). Alternatively, the timing may be regarded as the timing at which the SP reach success effect is executed (started to be executed) in response to a predetermined operation being input to the operating means in the winning operation effect. When a predetermined operation is input to the operation means in the winning operation effect, it means that a button operation is input to the effect button 121 if the winning operation effect is a button effect, and if the winning operation effect is a lever effect. It indicates that the lever operation is input to the production lever 127. Similarly, the rainbow lamp start timing is the execution start timing of the normal reach success effect or the timing during execution of the normal reach success effect when the variable effect HE including the normal reach effect is executed (see FIG. 43). Is also good.

  When the lamp control board 350 receives the lamp drive command instructing the execution of the rainbow lamp effect at the rainbow lamp start timing, the lamp control board 350 starts executing the rainbow lamp effect in response to the reception. The time from the reception timing of the lamp drive command instructing the execution of the rainbow lamp effect to the execution start timing of the rainbow lamp effect is sufficiently short, and therefore, the rainbow lamp is the transmission / reception timing of the lamp drive command instructing the execution of the rainbow lamp effect. It may be understood that the start timing and the actual execution start timing of the rainbow lamp effect are substantially the same. Therefore, for example, when the rainbow lamp effect is executed, and in response to "a predetermined operation is input to the operation means in the winning operation effect, the SP reach success effect is executed (execution is started). It can be said that the rainbow lamp effect is executed (execution start) in response to the input of the predetermined operation when the "timing" corresponds to the rainbow lamp start timing.

  The lamp control board 350 may continuously execute the rainbow lamp effect until it receives a lamp drive command from the sub CPU 321 that instructs the end of execution of the rainbow lamp effect. The sub CPU 321 issues, for example, a lamp drive command to the lamp control board 350 to instruct the end of execution of the rainbow lamp effect at a timing at which the first to third decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a zigzag pattern based on the reception of the fluctuation stop command. By transmitting, the rainbow lamp effect can be ended at that timing. Alternatively, the lamp control board 350 may continuously execute the rainbow lamp effect until it receives from the sub CPU 321 a lamp drive command instructing to execute the big hit opening lamp effect accompanying the start of the big hit game. Sub CPU321, for example, after the stop display of the first to third decorative symbols in the form of double eyes based on the reception of the variation stop command, at the timing when the jackpot game is started, the execution of the jackpot opening lamp effect By transmitting the instructed lamp drive command to the lamp control board 350, the rainbow lamp effect can be ended at that timing. Alternatively, the lamp control board 350 may continuously execute the rainbow lamp effect until it receives a fluctuation stop command (or a command corresponding to the fluctuation stop command) from the sub CPU 321. For example, the sub CPU 321 transmits the fluctuation stop command received from the main control unit 401 to the lamp control board 350 as it is (or after the lamp control board 350 formally converts it into a command that can grasp the fluctuation stop). , The rainbow lamp effect can be ended at that timing. Alternatively, the lamp control board 350 may end the rainbow lamp effect after a predetermined time has elapsed after starting the execution of the rainbow lamp effect, regardless of the command from the sub CPU 321. Further, the start and end of execution of the rainbow lamp effect may be determined or determined by the sub CPU 321 based on the count value of the frame counter updated by the image control CPU 331.

  Alternatively, if the lamp control board 350 starts executing the rainbow lamp effect during the variable display of the special symbol for the special symbol determination information JJ, the special symbol is displayed in the mode showing the result of the special symbol determination for the special symbol determination information JJ. The rainbow lamp effect may be continuously executed even after is displayed as a stop, for example, the rainbow lamp effect may be continuously executed even during the jackpot game OU (see FIG. 17B).

  It should be noted that it is possible to adopt the first rainbow lamp control method that causes the rainbow lamp effect to function as a simple and accurate effect without depending on the gaming state of the gaming machine 100. At the time of adopting the first rainbow lamp control method, The rainbow lamp effect may be executed as follows.

That is, in the first rainbow lamp control method, the special figure determination is performed on the special figure determination information JJ in the low-probability non-electricity support game state, the high-probability electricity support game state, or the low-probability electricity support game state, and for the special figure determination When the information JJ wins any of the special jackpots A to D, the rainbow image effect and the rainbow lamp effect are different regardless of whether or not the rainbow image effect is executed in the variation effect HE. Regardless of whether or not the jackpot confirmation effect is executed, the sub CPU 321 always or less than 1 but with a high probability close to 1 performs lamp control of a lamp drive command for instructing execution of the rainbow lamp effect at the rainbow lamp start timing. It may be transmitted to the substrate 350, and thereby the execution of the rainbow lamp effect may be started from the rainbow lamp start timing. The end timing of the rainbow lamp effect is as described above.
According to this, in the low-probability non-electric support game state, the high-probability electric support game state or the low-probability electric support game state, the special map determination for the special figure determination information JJ is performed and the special figure determination information JJ is special. When the B or special D jackpot is won, the rainbow image effect may or may not be executed in the variable effect HE, but in any case, it is always or less than 1, but to 1. With a high probability, the rainbow lamp effect is executed from the rainbow lamp start timing (for example, the timing at which the SP reach success effect is executed in response to a predetermined operation being input to the operating means in the winning operation effect). become,
In the low-probability non-electric sapo game state, the high-probability electric sapo game state, or the low-probability electric sapo game state, the special figure determination for the special figure determination information JJ is performed and the special figure determination information JJ is the special A or the special C. When the jackpot is won, the rainbow image effect is not executed in the variable effect HE, but it is always or less than 1 but with a high probability close to 1 (for example, the winning operation). The rainbow lamp effect is executed from the timing at which the SP reach success effect is executed in response to a predetermined operation being input to the operation means in the effect.

In the first rainbow lamp control method, the special figure determination is performed on the special figure determination information JJ in the low-probability non-electricity support game state, the high-probability electricity support game state, or the low-probability electricity support game state, and the special figure determination information When JJ wins the special B or special D jackpot and is determined to execute the rainbow image effect, as a typical flow of the effect, the rainbow image effect is executed in the variable effect HE including the SP reach effect. After that, the final winning effect accompanied by the winning operation effect is executed, and the rainbow lamp effect is executed from the timing when the SP reach success effect is executed in response to the predetermined operation being input to the operating means in the winning operation effect. .
In the first rainbow lamp control method, the special figure determination is performed on the special figure determination information JJ in the low-probability non-electricity support game state, the high-probability electricity support game state, or the low-probability electricity support game state, and the special figure determination information When JJ wins the special A or special C jackpot, a typical flow of the effect is a final effect involving a winning operation effect without executing the rainbow image effect in the variable effect HE including the SP reach effect. The winning effect is executed, and the rainbow lamp effect is executed from the timing when the SP reach success effect is executed in response to the predetermined operation being input to the operating means in the winning operation effect.

  In the first rainbow lamp control method, a low-probability non-electric support game state, a high-probability electric support game state, or a low-probability electric support game is performed in order to make the rainbow lamp production function as a simple certainty production without depending on the game state of the gaming machine 100. In the state, the special figure determination is performed on the special figure determination information JJ, and the special figure determination information JJ is a winning jackpot of the communication A or the communication B and the special figure determination information JJ is lost. At times, the sub CPU 321 does not transmit a lamp drive command instructing execution of the rainbow lamp effect to the lamp control board 350 so that the rainbow lamp effect is not executed in the variable effect HE.

  Alternatively, a second rainbow lamp control method is adopted that causes the rainbow lamp effect to function as a simple certainty effect in the low-probability non-electric support game state, while causing the rainbow lamp effect to function as a simple certainty effect in the high-probability electric support game state. Alternatively, when the second rainbow lamp control method is adopted, the rainbow lamp effect may be executed as follows.

That is, in the second rainbow lamp control method, the special figure determination for the special figure determination information JJ is performed in the low-probability non-electricity support game state, and the special figure determination information JJ is through A, through B, and special A to special D When any one of the jackpots is won, whether or not another jackpot confirmation effect is executed regardless of whether or not the rainbow image effect is executed in the variable effect HE and is different from the rainbow image effect and the rainbow lamp effect. Regardless of whether or not, the sub CPU 321 transmits a lamp drive command instructing execution of a rainbow lamp effect to the lamp control board 350 at a rainbow lamp start timing with a high probability of being always or less than 1 but close to 1. The rainbow lamp effect may be started from the rainbow lamp start timing. The end timing of the rainbow lamp effect is as described above.
According to this, when the special figure determination information JJ is performed in the low probability non-electric support game state and the special figure determination information JJ is a special B or special D jackpot, Although the rainbow image effect may or may not be executed in the variable effect HE, in any case, the rainbow lamp start timing (for example, the winning operation effect is always or less than 1 but with a high probability close to 1). The rainbow lamp effect is executed from the timing at which the SP reach success effect is executed in response to the predetermined operation being input to the operation means at.
When the special figure judgment for the special figure judgment information JJ is made in the low probability non-electricity support game state and the special figure judgment information JJ is a jackpot of the general A, general B, special A or special C. Does not execute the rainbow image effect in the variable effect HE, but always or with a high probability of being less than 1 but close to 1, a rainbow lamp start timing (for example, a predetermined operation is operated in the winning operation effect). The rainbow lamp effect is executed from the timing when the SP reach success effect is executed in response to the input to the means).

In the second rainbow lamp control method, the special figure determination for the special figure determination information JJ is performed in the low-probability non-electricity support game state, and the special figure determination information JJ wins the special B or special D jackpot and the rainbow. When it is determined to execute the image effect, as a typical flow of the effect, in the variable effect HE including the SP reach effect, the final winning effect accompanied by the winning operation effect is executed after the rainbow image effect is executed, The rainbow lamp effect is executed from the timing when the SP reach success effect is executed in response to a predetermined operation being input to the operation means in the operation effect.
In the second rainbow lamp control method, the special figure determination for the special figure determination information JJ is performed in the low-probability non-electricity support game state, and the special figure determination information JJ is of A, B, A or C. When the jackpot is won, as a typical flow of the effect, in the variable effect HE including the SP reach effect, the final win effect accompanied by the win operation effect is executed without executing the rainbow image effect, and the win operation is performed. The rainbow lamp effect is executed from the timing when the SP reach success effect is executed in response to a predetermined operation being input to the operation means in the effect.

  In the second rainbow lamp control method, in order to make the rainbow lamp effect function as a simple winning effect in the low-probability non-electric support game state, the special-drawing judgment for the special-drawing judgment information JJ is performed in the low-probability non-electric support game state. In addition, when the special image determination information JJ indicates a loss, the sub CPU 321 issues a lamp drive command instructing execution of the rainbow lamp effect so that the rainbow lamp effect is not executed in the variable effect HE. Do not send to.

Further, in the second rainbow lamp control method, the special figure determination for the special figure determination information JJ is performed in the high-probability electric power support game state, and the special figure determination information JJ is won in any one of special A to special D. While performing, regardless of whether or not the rainbow image effect is executed in the variable effect HE and whether or not another jackpot confirmation effect different from the rainbow image effect and the rainbow lamp effect is executed, With a high probability of being less than 1 but close to 1, the sub CPU 321 transmits a lamp drive command for instructing execution of a rainbow lamp effect to the lamp control board 350 at the rainbow lamp start timing, whereby the rainbow lamp start timing is started. You may start the performance. The end timing of the rainbow lamp effect is as described above.
According to this, when the special figure determination for the special figure determination information JJ is performed in the high-probability electric power support game state and the special figure determination information JJ is a special B or special D jackpot, The rainbow image effect may or may not be executed in the variable effect HE, but in any case, the rainbow lamp start timing (for example, in the winning operation effect is always or less than 1 but with a high probability close to 1). The rainbow lamp effect is executed from the timing at which the SP reach success effect is executed in response to the predetermined operation being input to the operation means.
In the high-probability electric power support game state, when the special figure determination for the special figure determination information JJ is made and the special figure determination information JJ is a special A or special C jackpot, Although the rainbow image effect is not executed, the rainbow lamp start timing (for example, when a predetermined operation is input to the operating means in the winning operation effect is always or less than 1 but with a high probability close to 1). In response, the rainbow lamp effect is executed from the timing at which the SP reach success effect is executed).

In the second rainbow lamp control method, the special figure determination for the special figure determination information JJ is performed in the high-probability electric power support game state, and the special figure determination information JJ wins the special B or special D jackpot and the rainbow image. When it is decided to execute the effect, as a typical flow of the effect, in the variable effect HE including the SP reach effect, the final winning effect accompanied by the winning operation effect is executed after the rainbow image effect is executed, and the winning operation. The rainbow lamp effect is executed from the timing when the SP reach success effect is executed in response to a predetermined operation being input to the operation means in the effect.
In the second rainbow lamp control method, when the special figure determination for the special figure determination information JJ is performed in the high-probability electric power support game state, and the special figure determination information JJ is a special A or special C jackpot. As a typical flow of the effect, in the variable effect HE including the SP reach effect, the final winning effect accompanied by the winning operation effect is executed without executing the rainbow image effect, and a predetermined operation is performed in the winning operation effect. The rainbow lamp effect is executed from the timing when the SP reach success effect is executed in response to the input to the operation means.

  In the second rainbow lamp control method, in order to make the rainbow lamp effect function as a simple certainty effect in the high-probability electricity support game state, the special figure determination is performed on the special figure determination information JJ in the high probability electricity support game state, and , When the special figure determination information JJ is a big hit of the communication A or the communication B and when the special figure determination information JJ is lost, the rainbow lamp effect is not executed in the variation effect HE. As described above, the sub CPU 321 does not transmit the lamp drive command instructing the execution of the rainbow lamp effect to the lamp control board 350.

When the second rainbow lamp control method is adopted, the rainbow lamp effect may be made to function as a simple accurate effect effect in the low-probability electric power support game state (so-called time saving state). In this case, when the special figure determination for the special figure determination information JJ is made in the low probability electric support game state, and the special figure determination is made for the special figure determination information JJ in the low probability non-electric support game state. In this case, common control may be performed regarding presence / absence of execution and execution timing control for the rainbow lamp effect.
Alternatively, when the second rainbow lamp control method is adopted, the rainbow lamp effect may be made to function as a simple certainty effect in the low-probability electric power support game state (so-called time saving state). In this case, when the special figure determination for the special figure determination information JJ is performed in the low-probability electric support game state, and the special figure determination is performed for the special figure determination information JJ in the high-probability electric support game state. At this time, it is sufficient to perform common control for the presence / absence of execution and the execution timing control for the rainbow lamp effect.

――― Example EX10_5 ――――
Example EX10_5 will be described. Includes a case CS _Q Case CS _P1 and Figure 118 in FIG. 116, in any case rainbow lamp demonstration is executed, a rainbow ramp start timing of the above, the special symbol or first to a mode indicating the winning jackpot The timing may be the same as the timing when the three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, or may be a timing slightly later than that timing.

  In the case where this method is adopted, for example, when the fluctuating effect HE including the SP reach effect is executed and it is determined to perform the rainbow image effect (see FIG. 41), during the execution period of the fluctuating effect HE. After the rainbow image effect is performed at any timing, through the final winning effect accompanied by the winning operation effect, the special symbol and the first to third decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a mode that indicates a big hit. The rainbow lamp effect is executed in synchronization with the display timing or slightly later than the stop display timing.

Alternatively, for example, when the variable effect HE including the SP reach effect is executed and it is determined to execute the rainbow button display effect or the rainbow lever display effect as the rainbow image effect (see FIG. 41, FIG. 53, and FIG. 54), the winning or losing After the rainbow button display effect or the rainbow lever display effect is performed in the final winning effect accompanied by the operation effect, the special symbol and the first to third decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a mode showing a big hit, and the stop display The rainbow lamp effect is executed in synchronization with the timing or slightly later than the timing of the stop display.
Even when there is a considerable time difference between the execution of the rainbow image effect and the execution of the rainbow lamp effect as in the present Example EX10_5, the sub CPU 321 causes the lamp control board 350 to execute the rainbow lamp effect. It is assumed that the premium effect execution completion report signal 6250 is received from the control CPU 331.

――― Example EX10_6 ――――
Example EX10_6 will be described. The tenth embodiment is particularly suitable for combination with the above-described sixth embodiment, and as long as there is no contradiction, all the matters described in the sixth embodiment can be applied to the tenth embodiment. An example according to Example 1 will be described as Example EX10_6.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 55, there are a button effect and a lever effect as the operation effects, but the jackpot expectation level associated with the lever effect is higher than the jackpot expectation level associated with the button effect. In other words, it suggests that the lever effect has a higher expectation of a big hit than the button effect. In order to realize this, the sub CPU 321 relates to the operation effect executed in the variable effect HE, and when the special figure determination information JJ is a big hit, the lever effect rather than the button effect as the operation effect. Is selected and executed, and when the special figure determination information JJ is out of order, the button effect is selected and executed more easily than the lever effect as the operation effect. Good.

  The sub CPU 321 performs a winning operation effect selection process for selecting and determining the type of winning operation effect (see FIG. 41 or FIG. 42) executed in the final stage of the SP reach effect, before the winning operation effect. May be executed in consideration of whether or not was executed. Similar to the sixth embodiment, the jackpot finalizing effect executed before the execution of the winning operation effect is particularly referred to as a prior jackpot finalizing effect. Among the prior jackpot finalizing effects, a simple winning effect, a simple certainty effect, and a super certainty effect. The certainty productions are particularly referred to as a prior simple accurate production, a prior simple certainty production, and a prior super certainty production, respectively.

  In Example EX10_6, it may be understood that the pre-super-precision operation is equivalent to the rainbow image effect executed before the winning operation effect, or includes the rainbow image effect executed before the winning operation effect. .

The winning operation effect selection process in the example EX10_6 may be executed according to the table 3200 of FIG. 58 described in the sixth embodiment. Then,
When the special figure determination information JJ has won the special B or special D jackpot, the case in which the super-precision operation is executed in advance (corresponding to KB ₁₀ ) is better than the case in which the super-precision operation is not executed in advance. Also, there is a high probability that the winning operation effect will be a lever effect (in other words, the latter case has a higher probability of the winning operation effect being a button effect than the former case). The same thing can be said regardless of the type of jackpot that the special figure determination information JJ has won. That is,
When the special figure determination information JJ has won any of the special jackpots A to D, the case in which the pre-high-precision production is executed in advance (corresponding to KB ₁₀ ) is executed in advance. There is a higher probability that the winning operation effect will be a lever effect than in the case that is not played (in other words, the latter case has a higher probability that the winning operation effect is a button effect than the former case).
When the special figure determination information JJ has won the big hit of any one of the communication A, the communication B, and the special A to the special D, the case (corresponding to KB ₁₀ ) in which the super-precision production is executed in advance is more advance. There is a higher probability that the winning operation effect will be a lever effect than in the case where the super-certain effect effect is not executed. ).

Alternatively, the winning operation effect selection process in the example EX10_6 may be executed according to the table 3220 of FIG. 60 described in the sixth embodiment. In the table 3220 of FIG. 60, “1> KC ₁ > KC ₃ > KC ₅ > KC ₇ ≧ 0” and “on the premise that the finalized effect execution determination process in step S614 of FIG. 114 is performed according to the table 3100 of FIG. 57. By setting 0 <KC ₂ <KC ₄ <KC ₆ <KC ₈ ≦ 1 ”, when the advance super-precision production is executed, the lever production is performed as the winning operation production than when the advance super-precision production is not executed. It is easy to execute. The super-probability effect (including the pre-probability probabilistic effect) is executed only when the special B or special D jackpot is won, and when the special B or special D jackpot is won, the winning operation effect is the lever effect. This is because the probability (corresponding to KC ₈ ) is the maximum. When it is determined in the finalized effect execution determination processing in step S614 of FIG. 114 that the premium effect as the super-determined effect is to be executed, the super-accuracy effect (premier effect) may always be the pre-determined super-accuracy effect. Then, according to the table 3220 of FIG. 60,
In the case where the special figure determination information JJ has won the big hit of any one of the communication A, the communication B, and the special A to the special D, the case where the pre-high-precision production is executed has the pre-high-precision production. The probability that the winning operation effect is the lever effect is higher than that in the case where it is not executed (conversely, the latter case has a higher probability that the winning operation effect is the button effect than the former case).

Further alternatively, the winning operation effect selection process of the example EX10_6 may be executed according to the table 3240 of FIG. 61 described in the sixth embodiment. When the table 3240 is followed, the expected degree of the jackpot associated with the lever effect as the winning operation effect is determined as the winning operation effect based on the size relationship between the probabilities KD ₁ and KD ₃ and the size relationship between the probabilities KD ₂ and KD ₄ . It is higher than the expectation of jackpots associated with button effects. Since the execution of the super-precision operation is limited to when the special B or special D jackpot is won, in consideration of the presence of a loss, the super-precision operation is executed in advance in the case in which the super-precision operation is executed in advance. The probability that the winning operation effect will be a lever effect is higher than the case where it is not performed (in other words, the latter case has a higher probability that the winning operation effect is a button effect than the former case).

――― Example EX10_7 ――――
Example EX10_7 will be described. The tenth embodiment can be combined with the above-described seventh embodiment.

  That is, in the tenth embodiment, the leverage certain effect limiting control (FIG. 74) of the seventh embodiment can be adopted. Although the details are described in the seventh embodiment, in short, the leverage certain effect restriction control is performed at a certain timing 4210 during the variable effect HE based on the result of the special figure determination with respect to the special figure determination information JJ. When the jackpot final effect is executed, the control is forbidden to execute the leverage certain effect RK after the timing 4210 (that is, the leverage certain effect RK is not executed). In the tenth embodiment, a rainbow image effect is particularly mentioned as the jackpot final effect.

  Further, in the tenth embodiment, the finalized effect limiting control (FIG. 75) of the seventh embodiment can be adopted. Although the details are described in the seventh embodiment, in short, the fixed effect restriction control is performed at a certain timing 4220 during the variable effect HE based on the result of the special figure determination with respect to the special figure determination information JJ. When it is determined that the leverage certain effect RK is to be executed, in the variable effect HE, it is a control that prohibits the jackpot finalizing effect from being executed before the timing 4220 (that is, the jackpot finalizing effect is not executed). In the tenth embodiment, a rainbow image effect is particularly mentioned as the jackpot final effect.

――― Example EX10_8 ――――
Example EX10_8 will be described. Although various examples of effects have been described on the premise that the final winning / winning effect is executed in response to the operation of the player, the final winning / winning effect is executed independently of the operation of the player. Is also good. That is, in the final win effect in the variable effect HE including the SP reach effect, the execution start timing of the final win effect regardless of whether the player inputs a button operation or a lever operation without performing any button effect or lever effect. The SP reach success effect or the SP reach failure effect may be executed when a predetermined time has elapsed from.

――― Example EX10_9 ――――
Example EX10_9 will be described. Although the flow of the effect of performing the rainbow lamp effect after executing the rainbow image effect has been described above, the rainbow image effect and the rainbow lamp effect in the variable effect HE (that is, during the variable display of the special symbol for the special symbol determination information JJ). In the case of performing both of the above, it may be possible that there is an overlapping period between the display period of the "premier image having a rainbow color" by the rainbow image effect and the execution period of the rainbow lamp effect. It may be possible to execute the rainbow image effect after the lamp effect is executed first and the rainbow lamp effect is ended.

  Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 116 and 117, when the “premier image having a rainbow color” (rainbow CI image in FIG. 116) is drawn and displayed, the rainbow lamp effect is executed and the “rainbow color” is displayed. When the premier image (third special character image in FIG. 117) that does not belong to the "premier image having" is drawn and displayed, the rainbow lamp effect is not executed, but when the premier image is drawn and displayed. Is not a "premier image having a rainbow color" or a "premium image having a rainbow color" (for example, the drawn and displayed premier image is the third special character image). , The rainbow CI image and the special telop image), the sub CPU 321 determines that the premium effect execution completion report signal 6250 (625 in FIG. 116) based on the drawing completion signal 6240. a, 6250b in FIG. 117) is received from the image control CPU 331, the lamp drive command 6260 for instructing execution of the rainbow lamp effect is transmitted to the lamp control board 350 in response to the reception (in response to the reception). A rainbow lamp effect may be executed. At this time, the execution start and end timings of the rainbow lamp effect may be as described above.

――― Example EX10_10 ――――
Example EX10_10 will be described. With reference to FIG. 113, a configuration has been described in which a plurality of CPUs (sub CPU 321 and image control CPU 331) are used to realize a predetermined effect including image display. However, the functions of the plurality of CPUs are assigned to one CPU. The predetermined effect may be realized by one CPU (for example, the sub CPU 431 in FIG. 2).

――― Example EX10_11 ――――
Example EX10_11 will be described. As described above, the rainbow lamp effect is an effect in which the light emitting elements forming the frame lamp section 160 emit light in the seven colors forming the rainbow, and the rainbow image effect displays an image including the seven colors forming the rainbow. It is an effect displayed on the section 104. That is, the rainbow lamp effect is the first color-specific effect that causes the frame lamp section 160 as the first effect means to develop the rainbow color, and the rainbow image effect is the image display section 104 as the second effect means. Is a second color-specification effect for producing a rainbow color.

  In the rainbow lamp effect as the first color-identifying effect, the rainbow-colored coloring is realized by causing the rainbow-colored light to be emitted by using the plurality of light-emitting elements (incandescent current or LED), and the second color-identifying specification. In the rainbow image production as a production, the display of the "premier image having a rainbow color" realizes the development of the rainbow color. In this way, the colors to be colored are common to each other between the first color development specific effect and the second color development specific effect, and this common color is the rainbow color.

  However, in the invention according to the tenth embodiment, the common color developed in the first color development specifying effect and the second color development specifying effect is not limited to the iridescent color. For example, the common color forms a rainbow. It may be any two or more colors (for example, two colors of red and blue) or any one color of the seven colors.

  The first effect means for realizing the first color development specific effect is not limited to the frame lamp section 160, and may be any effect means as long as it can realize a visual effect. Similarly, the second effect means for realizing the second color development specific effect is not limited to the image display unit 104, and may be any effect means that can realize a visual effect. The visual effect by the first effect means is, for example, when the image display device as the first effect means performs image display by itself, or when the light source (incandescent lamp or LED) as the first effect means is used. By emitting light by itself, or by the light guide plate as the first rendering means receiving the light from the light source and emitting the light, or by the reflecting plate or the scattering plate as the first rendering means from the light source. It is realized by reflecting or scattering the light of. The same applies to the visual effect by the second effect means.

  The first effect means for realizing the first color development specifying effect and the second effect means for realizing the second color specifying effect may be effect means of the same type (for example, both It may be an image display device) or different types of effecting means.

<< Deformation >>
The embodiment of the present invention can be appropriately modified in various ways within the scope of the technical idea shown in the claims. The above embodiment is merely an example of the embodiment of the present invention, and the meanings of the terms of the present invention and each constituent element are not limited to those described in the above embodiment. The specific numerical values shown in the above description are merely examples, and as a matter of course, they can be changed to various numerical values.

  Although the case where the gaming machine 100 is configured by a loop machine or the like has been described above, the gaming machine 100 is configured as a gaming machine of a type other than the above-described type (for example, a gaming machine classified into an old type one-two type mixing machine). May be.

  Further, the present invention may be applied to other gaming machines such as slot machines that are not classified as pachinko gaming machines. In a pachinko game machine, a game ball is used as a game medium (a three-dimensional game medium in a real space), but in a slot machine, a coin is used as a game medium.

100 gaming machines 105, 106 starting opening 111 big winning opening 401 main control section (determination means, game state control means, special game execution means)
403 Production control unit (production execution means)

Claims (2)

Determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player,
An operation unit including one or more operation means operable by a player,
When it is determined by the determination means to execute the special game, special game execution means for executing the special game,
A game state control means capable of controlling the game in a predetermined game state, or in a specific game state in which the probability that the special game is determined to be higher than the predetermined game state is high,
And a performance executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect including an operation effect for prompting a player to perform a predetermined operation on the operation unit,
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game which is more advantageous than the first special game,
The game state control means can control the game in the specific game state after the first special game and after the second special game,
In the operation effect, an operation corresponding effect based on the determination result of the determination means is performed in response to the predetermined operation performed on the operation unit,
The operation effect includes a first operation effect and a second operation effect indicating that the special game is expected to be executed more than the first operation effect,
The effect execution means may execute a specific effect that suggests that the special game is executed, based on the determination result of the determination means.
The specific effect can be executed only when it is determined by the determination means to execute the special game,
In the specific effect, there are a plurality of specific effects with different effect modes,
When the second special game is executed, a special effect in a special effect mode among the plurality of special effects may be executed, and when the first special game is executed, the special effect is performed. The specific effect of the aspect is not executed,
When the effect execution means determines that the special game is to be executed by the determination means, when the operation effect is performed after execution of the specific effect of the special effect mode, execution of the specific effect of the special effect mode A game machine characterized in that it is easier to execute the second operation effect as the operation effect, as compared to when performing the operation effect without going through. Determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player,
An operation unit including one or more operation means operable by a player,
When it is determined by the determination means to execute the special game, special game execution means for executing the special game,
A game state control means capable of controlling the game in a predetermined game state, or in a specific game state in which the probability that the special game is determined to be higher than the predetermined game state is high,
And a performance executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect including an operation effect for prompting a player to perform a predetermined operation on the operation unit,
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game which is more advantageous than the first special game,
The game state control means can control the game in the specific game state after the first special game and after the second special game,
In the operation effect, an operation corresponding effect based on the determination result of the determination means is performed in response to the predetermined operation performed on the operation unit,
The operation effect includes a first operation effect and a second operation effect indicating that the special game is expected to be executed more than the first operation effect,
The effect execution means may execute a specific effect that suggests that the special game is executed, based on the determination result of the determination means.
The specific effect can be executed only when it is determined by the determination means to execute the special game,
In the specific effect, there are a plurality of specific effects with different effect modes,
When the second special game is executed, a special effect in a special effect mode among the plurality of special effects may be executed, and when the first special game is executed, the special effect is performed. The specific effect of the aspect is not executed,
The production effect executing means, when performing the operation production after performing the specific production of the special production mode, compares the operation production with performing the operation production without executing the specific production of the special production mode. A game machine characterized in that it is easy to execute the second operation effect as.

Images